CN104321592B - Portable information terminal and its control method and recording medium - Google Patents
Portable information terminal and its control method and recording medium Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN104321592B CN104321592B CN201380026394.1A CN201380026394A CN104321592B CN 104321592 B CN104321592 B CN 104321592B CN 201380026394 A CN201380026394 A CN 201380026394A CN 104321592 B CN104321592 B CN 104321592B
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- air conditioner
- screen
- display
- set temperature
- room
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Active
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 107
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 104
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 claims description 136
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 312
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 165
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 88
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 61
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 41
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 29
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 23
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 21
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 21
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000004566 building material Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000010079 rubber tapping Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 3
- 240000004050 Pentaglottis sempervirens Species 0.000 description 2
- 235000004522 Pentaglottis sempervirens Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000007664 blowing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001816 cooling Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 2
- 241001025261 Neoraja caerulea Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004378 air conditioning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004397 blinking Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0481—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
- G06F3/0482—Interaction with lists of selectable items, e.g. menus
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F24—HEATING; RANGES; VENTILATING
- F24F—AIR-CONDITIONING; AIR-HUMIDIFICATION; VENTILATION; USE OF AIR CURRENTS FOR SCREENING
- F24F11/00—Control or safety arrangements
- F24F11/30—Control or safety arrangements for purposes related to the operation of the system, e.g. for safety or monitoring
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F24—HEATING; RANGES; VENTILATING
- F24F—AIR-CONDITIONING; AIR-HUMIDIFICATION; VENTILATION; USE OF AIR CURRENTS FOR SCREENING
- F24F11/00—Control or safety arrangements
- F24F11/50—Control or safety arrangements characterised by user interfaces or communication
- F24F11/52—Indication arrangements, e.g. displays
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F24—HEATING; RANGES; VENTILATING
- F24F—AIR-CONDITIONING; AIR-HUMIDIFICATION; VENTILATION; USE OF AIR CURRENTS FOR SCREENING
- F24F11/00—Control or safety arrangements
- F24F11/50—Control or safety arrangements characterised by user interfaces or communication
- F24F11/56—Remote control
- F24F11/58—Remote control using Internet communication
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0484—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
- G06F3/04847—Interaction techniques to control parameter settings, e.g. interaction with sliders or dials
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
- G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/28—Data switching networks characterised by path configuration, e.g. LAN [Local Area Networks] or WAN [Wide Area Networks]
- H04L12/2803—Home automation networks
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/64—Hybrid switching systems
- H04L12/6418—Hybrid transport
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L67/00—Network arrangements or protocols for supporting network services or applications
- H04L67/01—Protocols
- H04L67/02—Protocols based on web technology, e.g. hypertext transfer protocol [HTTP]
- H04L67/025—Protocols based on web technology, e.g. hypertext transfer protocol [HTTP] for remote control or remote monitoring of applications
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F24—HEATING; RANGES; VENTILATING
- F24F—AIR-CONDITIONING; AIR-HUMIDIFICATION; VENTILATION; USE OF AIR CURRENTS FOR SCREENING
- F24F11/00—Control or safety arrangements
- F24F11/50—Control or safety arrangements characterised by user interfaces or communication
- F24F11/56—Remote control
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F24—HEATING; RANGES; VENTILATING
- F24F—AIR-CONDITIONING; AIR-HUMIDIFICATION; VENTILATION; USE OF AIR CURRENTS FOR SCREENING
- F24F2110/00—Control inputs relating to air properties
- F24F2110/10—Temperature
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G05—CONTROLLING; REGULATING
- G05B—CONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
- G05B2219/00—Program-control systems
- G05B2219/20—Pc systems
- G05B2219/26—Pc applications
- G05B2219/2642—Domotique, domestic, home control, automation, smart house
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Combustion & Propulsion (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Atmospheric Sciences (AREA)
- Selective Calling Equipment (AREA)
- Air Conditioning Control Device (AREA)
- User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)
Abstract
Description
技术领域technical field
本发明涉及便携信息终端的控制方法和程序。The present invention relates to a control method and program for a portable information terminal.
背景技术Background technique
已提出了使用一个遥控器对多个家电设备进行远程监视或远程控制的技术。A technique of remotely monitoring or remotely controlling a plurality of home appliances using one remote controller has been proposed.
专利文献1公开了从电视机的监视器对多个家电设备进行远程操作的技术。具体而言,公开了如下技术:在监视器画面的右侧显示多个家电设备的图标,当从其中选择了任意的图标时(i),在监视器画面的左侧显示布局图(ii),当使光标(pointer)移动到该布局图中的要操作的家电设备的设置位置时(iii),在监视器画面上显示通过光标移动而选择的家电设备的操作画面(iv)(第0138~0140段以及图25(a)、图25(b))。Patent Document 1 discloses a technology for remotely operating a plurality of home appliances from a monitor of a television. Specifically, a technique is disclosed in which a plurality of icons of home appliances are displayed on the right side of the monitor screen, and when an arbitrary icon is selected from among them (i), a layout diagram is displayed on the left side of the monitor screen (ii) , when the cursor (pointer) is moved to the installation position of the home appliance to be operated in the layout plan (iii), the operation screen (iv) of the home appliance selected by the cursor movement is displayed on the monitor screen (p. 0138 ~ paragraph 0140 and Fig. 25(a), Fig. 25(b)).
专利文献2公开了由单个遥控器对多个家电设备进行控制的技术。具体而言,在遥控器的液晶监视器上显示各房间的布局和房间内的状况。例如,在液晶监视器上显示当某房间的照明设备点亮时显示的照明标记(标志、符号)、表示某房间的当前温度的室温标记、当某房间的窗被锁上时对窗划上阴影线的锁标记、表示控制对象物的状况等的设备/装备标记、在控制对象为浴缸时表示热水量的标记等(第0037~0041段以及图6)。Patent Document 2 discloses a technology for controlling a plurality of home appliances by a single remote controller. Specifically, the layout of each room and the situation in the room are displayed on the liquid crystal monitor of the remote controller. For example, displaying on the LCD monitor lighting signs (signs, symbols) displayed when the lighting equipment in a certain room is turned on, room temperature signs indicating the current temperature of a certain room, marking the windows when the windows of a certain room are locked A hatched lock mark, a device/equipment mark indicating the status of the object to be controlled, a mark indicating the amount of hot water when the control object is a bathtub, etc. (paragraphs 0037 to 0041 and FIG. 6 ).
专利文献3涉及对电动建材(玄关门、天窗)的开关动作和状态确认进行远程控制、远程监视的技术。具体而言,在个人电脑的监视器画面上显示与物件(物品)相应的1层、2层的布局图,在各布局图的对应位置显示电动建材(玄关门、天窗)的图形、表示所述电动建材的开关状态的状态显示图标。当选择了状态显示图标时,通过另外的窗口来显示所述被选的电动建材的操作画面。在所述操作画面中包含开操作按钮、关操作按钮、隐藏动作监视器画面、操作画面的按钮(第0025段以及图4、图5、图6)。Patent Document 3 relates to a technology for remote control and remote monitoring of the opening and closing operation and state confirmation of electric building materials (entrance doors, sunroofs). Specifically, on the monitor screen of a personal computer, layout drawings of the first floor and second floor corresponding to objects (items) are displayed, and graphics of electric building materials (entrance doors, skylights) are displayed at corresponding positions of each layout The status display icon describes the switch status of the electric building material. When the status display icon is selected, the operation screen of the selected electric building material is displayed through a separate window. The operation screen includes an ON operation button, an OFF operation button, a hidden motion monitor screen, and a button for the operation screen (paragraph 0025 and FIGS. 4 , 5 , and 6 ).
专利文献4公开了包含布局图和图标的用户界面。作为图标,例示有表示插座的图标、表示数码像框的图标和表示照明设备的图标(图7及图8B)。Patent Document 4 discloses a user interface including a layout diagram and icons. Examples of icons include an icon representing an outlet, an icon representing a digital photo frame, and an icon representing a lighting device ( FIGS. 7 and 8B ).
专利文献5公开了照明系统的用户界面。向屏幕上的对象区域的内侧拖拽与某光源相关联的图标,该图标越向所述对象区域的中心移动,对应的光源的光强度越强。Patent Document 5 discloses a user interface of a lighting system. The icon associated with a certain light source is dragged toward the inner side of the object area on the screen, and the closer the icon moves to the center of the object area, the stronger the light intensity of the corresponding light source is.
但是,在上述专利文献1~上述专利文献5中,需要进一步的改善。However, in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1 to the above-mentioned Patent Document 5, further improvement is required.
现有技术文献prior art literature
专利文献1:日本特开2007-104567号公报Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-104567
专利文献2:日本特开2000-138979号公报Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-138979
专利文献3:日本特开2009-213107号公报Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-213107
专利文献4:美国专利第7,730,223号说明书Patent Document 4: Specification of US Patent No. 7,730,223
专利文献5:日本特许第5128489号公报Patent Document 5: Japanese Patent No. 5128489
发明内容Contents of the invention
为了解决上述问题,本发明的一个技术方案是一种便携信息终端的控制方法,所述便携信息终端与控制一个以上的对象设备的网络连接、并具有触摸面板式显示器,所述控制方法针对所述便携信息终端的计算机执行包括以下的步骤:使表示建筑物的布局图的显示画面显示于所述触摸面板式显示器的步骤;使表示所述一个以上的对象设备的每个对象设备的图标显示在表示所述布局图的显示画面上的步骤,所述一个以上的对象设备包括空调机;当在所述布局图中在与超过预定面积的一个房间相当的区域的范围内检测到表示所述一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择时,将与所述一个房间相当的区域切换为使所述空调机的设定温度变化的调整区域的步骤;当在所述布局图中在与所述预定面积以下的其他房间相当的区域的范围内检测到表示所述一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择时,使调整画面重叠地显示于所述显示画面的步骤,所述调整画面是用于使在与所述其他房间相当的区域设置的空调机的设定温度变化的画面;当检测到对所述触摸面板式显示器的接触在所述调整区域或所述调整画面内移动时,使根据所述接触的移动量来使所述空调机的设定温度变化的控制命令输出到所述网络的步骤。In order to solve the above problems, one technical solution of the present invention is a control method of a portable information terminal, which is connected to a network controlling one or more target devices and has a touch panel display. The execution of the computer of the portable information terminal includes the steps of: displaying a display screen showing a layout diagram of a building on the touch panel display; and displaying an icon representing each of the one or more target devices. In the step of displaying the display screen of the floor plan, the one or more object devices include an air conditioner; and when it is detected in the floor plan within an area corresponding to a room exceeding a predetermined area, it indicates that the When an icon of an air conditioner in one or more target devices is selected, switching an area corresponding to the one room to an adjustment area for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner; When a selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among the one or more target devices is detected within an area corresponding to another room having a predetermined area or less, displaying an adjustment screen superimposed on the display screen, The adjustment screen is a screen for changing the set temperature of an air conditioner installed in an area corresponding to the other room; When moving inside, outputting a control command for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner according to the amount of movement of the contact to the network.
根据上述技术方案,能够实现进一步的改善。According to the technical solutions described above, further improvements can be achieved.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是本发明的一个实施方式的应用了家庭控制器的家庭控制系统的整体结构图。FIG. 1 is an overall configuration diagram of a home control system to which a home controller is applied according to one embodiment of the present invention.
图2是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器控制的主要设备的图。Fig. 2 is a diagram showing main devices controlled by a home controller according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图3是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器、设备和服务器的构成的框图。FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing configurations of a home controller, devices, and servers according to one embodiment of the present invention.
图4是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的安装形态的构成例的图。Fig. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an installation form of a home controller according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图5是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的基本画面的构成的图。Fig. 5 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图6是表示本发明的一个实施方式的布局图的例子的图。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a floor plan of an embodiment of the present invention.
图7是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中以文本方式包含设备图标的配置信息的布局图的例子的图。FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a layout diagram including arrangement information of device icons in text format in one embodiment of the present invention.
图8是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中以图像方式包含设备图标的配置信息的布局图的例子的图。FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a layout diagram including arrangement information of device icons as images in one embodiment of the present invention.
图9是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中以图像方式包含设备图标的配置信息的布局图的例子的图。FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a layout diagram including arrangement information of device icons as images in one embodiment of the present invention.
图10是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的基本画面的第1楼层显示状态与第2楼层显示状态的转换例的图。Fig. 10 is a diagram showing an example of transition between the display state of the first floor and the display state of the second floor on the basic screen of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图11是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备控制画面的显示状态的构成的图。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of a device control screen of a home controller according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图12是本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备控制画面的显示状态的设备图标配置例的图。12 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of device icons in a display state of a device control screen of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图13是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备控制画面的显示状态的构成的图。FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of a device control screen of a home controller according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图14是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备控制画面的显示状态的设备图标配置例的图。Fig. 14 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of device icons in a display state of a device control screen of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图15是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备控制画面的显示状态的设备图标配置例的图。Fig. 15 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of device icons in a display state of a device control screen of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图16是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备控制画面的显示状态的设备图标配置例的图。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of device icons in a display state of a device control screen of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图17是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备控制画面的显示状态的构成例的图。Fig. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a display state of a device control screen of a home controller according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图18是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的基本画面与设备控制画面的显示状态的转换例的图。Fig. 18 is a diagram showing an example of transition of display states between the basic screen of the home controller and the device control screen according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图19是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的基本画面的第2楼层显示状态与第2楼层的设备控制画面的显示状态的转换例的图。19 is a diagram showing an example of transition between the display state of the second floor on the basic screen of the home controller and the display state of the device control screen on the second floor of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图20是在本发明的一个实施方式中表示从某设备的设备控制画面的显示状态向另一设备的设备控制画面的显示状态的转换例的图。20 is a diagram showing an example of transition from the display state of the device control screen of a certain device to the display state of the device control screen of another device in one embodiment of the present invention.
图21是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备控制画面的显示状态与非显示状态的转换例的图。Fig. 21 is a diagram showing an example of transition between a display state and a non-display state of the device control screen of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图22是表示本发明的一个实施方式的从家庭控制器的基本画面向设备控制画面的显示状态的转换动态画面(animation)的例子的图。Fig. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a transition animation from the basic screen of the home controller to the display state of the device control screen according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图23是表示本发明的一个实施方式的从家庭控制器的基本画面向设备控制画面的显示状态的转换动态画面的例子的图。Fig. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a transition dynamic screen from the basic screen of the home controller to the display state of the device control screen according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图24是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备图标一览显示画面的构成的图。Fig. 24 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device icon list display screen of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图25是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的基本画面与设备图标一览显示画面的转换例的图。Fig. 25 is a diagram showing an example of transition between the basic screen of the home controller and the device icon list display screen according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图26是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的设备图标一览显示画面与设备控制画面的显示状态的转换例的图。FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of transition of the display states of the device icon list display screen and the device control screen of the home controller according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图27是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭控制器的基本画面与设备控制画面的显示状态的转换例的图。Fig. 27 is a diagram showing an example of transition of display states between the basic screen of the home controller and the device control screen according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图28是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器向不同设备的设备控制画面的显示状态连续转换的情形的图。Fig. 28 is a diagram showing how the display state of the home controller continuously transitions to the display state of the device control screen of a different device in one embodiment of the present invention.
图29是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中在网络上无法检测到的设备的基本画面的显示例的图。FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a display example of a basic screen of a device that cannot be detected on the network in one embodiment of the present invention.
图30是表示本发明的一个实施方式的家庭信息的构成的图。Fig. 30 is a diagram showing the structure of family information according to one embodiment of the present invention.
图31是表示本发明的一个实施方式的顶点信息的构成的图。Fig. 31 is a diagram showing the structure of vertex information according to one embodiment of the present invention.
图32是表示本发明的一个实施方式的房间信息的构成的图。Fig. 32 is a diagram showing the structure of room information according to one embodiment of the present invention.
图33是表示本发明的一个实施方式的顶点信息与第1楼层的布局图的对应例的图。Fig. 33 is a diagram showing an example of correspondence between vertex information and a floor plan of the first floor according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图34是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中服务器管理的设备列表的构成的图。FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list managed by a server in one embodiment of the present invention.
图35是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器管理的设备列表的构成的图。Fig. 35 is a diagram showing the structure of a device list managed by a home controller in one embodiment of the present invention.
图36是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器从服务器取得家庭信息的处理流程的时序图(sequence)。Fig. 36 is a sequence diagram (sequence) showing the flow of processing for the home controller to acquire home information from the server in one embodiment of the present invention.
图37是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中当家庭控制器连接到了网络时家庭控制器对网络上的设备进行检测的处理流程的时序图。FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of the home controller detecting devices on the network when the home controller is connected to the network in one embodiment of the present invention.
图38是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中当设备连接到了网络时家庭控制器对网络上的设备进行检测的处理流程的时序图。FIG. 38 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of a home controller detecting a device on the network when the device is connected to the network in one embodiment of the present invention.
图39A是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理流程的流程图。FIG. 39A is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of a home controller controlling a device in one embodiment of the present invention.
图39B是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理流程的流程图。Fig. 39B is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the home controller controlling the devices in one embodiment of the present invention.
图40是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器根据接触物的接触内容生成设备的控制命令的处理流程的流程图。FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing a processing flow of a home controller generating a control command of a device according to the content of contact of a contact object in one embodiment of the present invention.
图41是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器发送控制命令的处理流程的流程图。Fig. 41 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing for sending a control command by the home controller in one embodiment of the present invention.
图42是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器直接控制设备的处理流程的时序图。FIG. 42 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing in which the home controller directly controls devices in one embodiment of the present invention.
图43是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器经由服务器控制设备的处理流程的时序图。Fig. 43 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing by the home controller to control the devices via the server in one embodiment of the present invention.
图44是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器从服务器取得设备的状态的处理流程的时序图。Fig. 44 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing for the home controller to acquire the status of devices from the server in one embodiment of the present invention.
图45是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器通过1次操作控制多台设备的情况下的家庭控制器直接控制设备的处理流程的时序图。FIG. 45 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of a home controller directly controlling a device in a case where the home controller controls a plurality of devices by one operation in one embodiment of the present invention.
图46是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器通过1次操作控制多台设备的情况下的家庭控制器经由服务器控制设备的处理流程的时序图。FIG. 46 is a sequence diagram showing a processing flow of a home controller controlling a device via a server in a case where the home controller controls a plurality of devices by one operation in one embodiment of the present invention.
图47是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器通过1次操作控制多台设备的情况下的家庭控制器经由服务器控制设备的处理流程的时序图。FIG. 47 is a sequence diagram showing a process flow of a home controller controlling a device via a server in a case where the home controller controls a plurality of devices by one operation in one embodiment of the present invention.
图48是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中在家庭控制器中使设备图标移动的情况下的处理流程的时序图。Fig. 48 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing when moving device icons in the home controller in one embodiment of the present invention.
图49是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中更新家庭控制器和服务器的设备列表的处理流程的时序图。FIG. 49 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing for updating the device lists of the home controller and server in one embodiment of the present invention.
图50是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中更新家庭控制器和服务器的设备列表的处理流程的时序图。FIG. 50 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing for updating the device lists of the home controller and server in one embodiment of the present invention.
图51是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中更新家庭控制器和服务器的设备列表的处理流程的时序图。FIG. 51 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing for updating the device lists of the home controller and server in one embodiment of the present invention.
图52是表示本发明的一个实施方式中的另一模式(pattern)的布局图的图。Fig. 52 is a diagram showing a layout diagram of another pattern in one embodiment of the present invention.
图53是表示采用了图52所示的布局图的基本画面的构成的图。FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen using the floor plan shown in FIG. 52 .
图54是表示采用了图52所示的布局图的情况下的设备控制画面的显示状态的图。FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a display state of a device control screen when the floor plan shown in FIG. 52 is adopted.
图55是说明基本画面的显示状态与设备控制画面的显示状态的转换的图。Fig. 55 is a diagram explaining the transition between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the device control screen.
图56是表示在图52所示的布局图中根据实际的房间尺寸对各房间的尺寸进行了改变时的布局图的构成的图。Fig. 56 is a diagram showing the configuration of the floor plan when the size of each room is changed in accordance with the actual room size in the floor plan shown in Fig. 52 .
图57是表示采用了图56所示的布局图的基本画面的构成的图。FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen using the floor plan shown in FIG. 56 .
图58是表示作为布局图采用了图56所示的布局图的情况下的设备控制画面的显示状态的图。FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a display state of a device control screen when the floor plan shown in FIG. 56 is adopted as the floor plan.
图59是表示本发明的一个实施方式中的又一模式的布局图的图。Fig. 59 is a diagram showing a layout of still another mode in one embodiment of the present invention.
图60是表示采用了图59所示的布局图的基本画面的构成的图。FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen using the floor plan shown in FIG. 59 .
图61是表示采用了图59所示的布局图的情况下的设备控制画面的显示状态的图。FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a display state of a device control screen when the floor plan shown in FIG. 59 is adopted.
图62是表示在图59所示的布局图中用户进行放大显示(pinchout)某房间的操作的情况下的显示器所显示的布局图的图。FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a floor plan displayed on a monitor when the user performs an operation to zoom in and display (pinchout) a certain room in the floor plan shown in FIG. 59 .
图63是在图62所示的放大显示的布局图中表示设备控制画面的显示状态的图。FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a display state of a device control screen in the enlarged display layout shown in FIG. 62 .
图64是表示从基本画面的显示状态向设备控制画面的显示状态的画面转换的图。Fig. 64 is a diagram showing screen transition from the display state of the basic screen to the display state of the device control screen.
图65是表示在采用了图59所示的布局图的基本画面中采用了不显示设备图标的方式时的基本画面的构成的图。FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the configuration of the basic screen when a method of not displaying device icons is adopted in the basic screen using the layout diagram shown in FIG. 59 .
图66是在采用了不显示设备图标的基本画面的情况下表示从基本画面的显示状态向设备控制画面的显示状态的画面转换的图。FIG. 66 is a diagram showing screen transition from the display state of the basic screen to the display state of the device control screen when the basic screen that does not display the device icon is adopted.
图67是表示采用了图52所示的布局图的情况下的家庭信息的构成的图。FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the structure of household information when the floor plan shown in FIG. 52 is adopted.
图68是表示图67所示的房间信息的构成的图。Fig. 68 is a diagram showing the structure of room information shown in Fig. 67 .
图69是表示图67所示的房间信息中的显示位置与布局图的对应例的图。Fig. 69 is a diagram showing an example of correspondence between display positions and floor plans in the room information shown in Fig. 67 .
图70是表示采用了图52所示的布局图的情况下的服务器管理的设备列表的构成的图。Fig. 70 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list managed by a server when the layout shown in Fig. 52 is adopted.
图71是在采用了图52所示的布局图的情况下表示家庭控制器管理的设备列表的构成的图。Fig. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list managed by the home controller when the layout shown in Fig. 52 is adopted.
图72是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中基本画面的显示状态与作为空调机的设备控制画面的空调机控制画面的显示状态的转换的图。Fig. 72 is a diagram showing a transition between a display state of a basic screen and a display state of an air conditioner control screen as a device control screen of an air conditioner in one embodiment of the present invention.
图73是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中输入了变更空调机的左右风向的操作时的画面转换的图。Fig. 73 is a diagram showing screen transitions when an operation to change the left and right wind direction of the air conditioner is input in one embodiment of the present invention.
图74是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中采用了将关于空调机的工作状态的信息显示在控制对象区域的方式的情况下的基本画面的显示状态与空调机控制画面的显示状态的画面转换的图。Fig. 74 is a screen transition showing the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the air conditioner control screen in the case where the method of displaying information on the operating state of the air conditioner in the control target area is adopted in one embodiment of the present invention; diagram.
图75是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中高温设定时的空调机控制画面的显示状态的构成的图。Fig. 75 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of an air conditioner control screen at high temperature setting in one embodiment of the present invention.
图76是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中低温设定时的空调机控制画面的显示状态的构成的图。Fig. 76 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of an air conditioner control screen at low temperature setting in one embodiment of the present invention.
图77是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中使用了空调机控制画面的空调机的上下风向的操作例的图。Fig. 77 is a diagram showing an operation example of the vertical airflow direction of the air conditioner using the air conditioner control screen in one embodiment of the present invention.
图78是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中使用了空调机控制画面的空调机的左右风向的操作例的图。Fig. 78 is a diagram showing an operation example of the left and right wind directions of the air conditioner using the air conditioner control screen in the embodiment of the present invention.
图79是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中使用了空调机控制画面的空调机的风量的操作例的图。Fig. 79 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the air volume of the air conditioner using the air conditioner control screen in the embodiment of the present invention.
图80A是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理流程的流程图。FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of a home controller controlling a device in one embodiment of the present invention.
图80B是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理流程的流程图。FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the home controller controlling the devices in one embodiment of the present invention.
图81是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中图80B所示的S31010的设备控制画面的控制流程的流程图。FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a control flow of the device control screen at S31010 shown in FIG. 80B in one embodiment of the present invention.
图82是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中使用了空调机控制画面的空调机的设定温度的操作例的图。Fig. 82 is a diagram showing an operation example of setting temperature of the air conditioner using the air conditioner control screen in one embodiment of the present invention.
图83是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中图80B的S31010所示的设备控制画面的控制流程的流程图。FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a control flow of the device control screen shown in S31010 of FIG. 80B in one embodiment of the present invention.
图84是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中基本画面的显示状态与空调机控制画面的显示状态的转换的另一例的图。Fig. 84 is a diagram showing another example of transition between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the air conditioner control screen in the embodiment of the present invention.
图85是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中调整区域的显示状态的构成的图。Fig. 85 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of an adjustment area in one embodiment of the present invention.
图86是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中使用了调整区域的空调机的设定温度的操作例的图。Fig. 86 is a diagram showing an operation example of the set temperature of the air conditioner using the adjustment area in the embodiment of the present invention.
图87是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中在与调整区域对应的房间中设置有多台空调机的情况下的设备控制时序的图。Fig. 87 is a diagram showing a device control sequence when a plurality of air conditioners are installed in a room corresponding to an adjustment area in one embodiment of the present invention.
图88是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中在与调整区域对应的房间中设置有多台空调机的情况下的设备控制时序的另一例的图。Fig. 88 is a diagram showing another example of an equipment control sequence when a plurality of air conditioners are installed in a room corresponding to an adjustment area according to the embodiment of the present invention.
图89是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中使用了调整区域的空调机的设定温度的操作例的图。Fig. 89 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the set temperature of the air conditioner using the adjustment area in the embodiment of the present invention.
图90是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中使用了调整区域的空调机的设定温度的操作例的图。Fig. 90 is a diagram showing an example of operation of the set temperature of the air conditioner using the adjustment area in the embodiment of the present invention.
图91A是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理的另一例的流程图。Fig. 91A is a flowchart showing another example of the processing of the home controller to control the devices in the embodiment of the present invention.
图91B是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理的另一例的流程图。Fig. 91B is a flowchart showing another example of processing by the home controller to control devices in one embodiment of the present invention.
图92是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中图91B的S32110所示的设备控制画面的控制流程的流程图。FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a control flow of the device control screen shown in S32110 of FIG. 91B in one embodiment of the present invention.
图93是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中基本画面的显示状态与空调机控制画面的显示状态的转换的另一例的图。Fig. 93 is a diagram showing another example of transition between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the air conditioner control screen in the embodiment of the present invention.
图94是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中基本画面的显示状态与空调机控制画面的显示状态的转换的另一例的图。Fig. 94 is a diagram showing another example of transition between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the air conditioner control screen in the embodiment of the present invention.
图95是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中在配置于一定尺寸以下的房间区域的空调机图标被选择了的情况下所显示的调整区域的另一例的图。95 is a diagram showing another example of an adjustment area displayed when an air conditioner icon arranged in a room area of a certain size or less is selected in an embodiment of the present invention.
图96是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中在图94所示的配置于的一定尺寸以下的房间区域的空调机图标被选择了的情况下所显示的调整区域的又一例的图。96 is a diagram showing still another example of an adjustment area displayed when an air conditioner icon arranged in a room area of a certain size or less shown in FIG. 94 is selected in one embodiment of the present invention.
图97是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中使用了图96所示的调整区域的操作例的图。FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an operation example using the adjustment area shown in FIG. 96 in one embodiment of the present invention.
图98A是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理的又一例的流程图。Fig. 98A is a flow chart showing still another example of processing by the home controller to control devices in one embodiment of the present invention.
图98B是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理的又一例的流程图。Fig. 98B is a flow chart showing still another example of processing by the home controller to control devices in one embodiment of the present invention.
图99A是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理的又一例的流程图。Fig. 99A is a flowchart showing still another example of processing of the home controller to control devices in one embodiment of the present invention.
图99B是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理的又一例的流程图。Fig. 99B is a flow chart showing still another example of the processing of the home controller controlling the devices in the embodiment of the present invention.
图100是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中在控制对象区域显示有效果范围的空调机控制画面的显示状态的构成的图。Fig. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of an air conditioner control screen in which an effective range is displayed in a control target area in one embodiment of the present invention.
图101是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中在空调机的控制例中所使用的房间信息的构成的图。Fig. 101 is a diagram showing a structure of room information used in an example of controlling an air conditioner in one embodiment of the present invention.
图102是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中在空调机的控制例中所使用的设备列表的构成的图。Fig. 102 is a diagram showing the structure of an equipment list used in an example of controlling an air conditioner in one embodiment of the present invention.
图103是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中变更了风向时的效果范围的图。Fig. 103 is a diagram showing an effect range when the wind direction is changed in one embodiment of the present invention.
图104是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中消除了空调机控制画面的布局图的图。Fig. 104 is a diagram showing a layout diagram in which an air conditioner control screen is eliminated in one embodiment of the present invention.
图105是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中变更了风量时的效果范围的图。Fig. 105 is a diagram showing an effect range when the air volume is changed in one embodiment of the present invention.
图106是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中分等级地表示了效果高低的效果范围的图。FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an effect range in which the effect is high or low in a hierarchical manner in one embodiment of the present invention.
图107A是在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理的又一例的流程图。Fig. 107A is a flowchart of still another example of the processing of the home controller to control the devices in the embodiment of the present invention.
图107B是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器控制设备的处理的又一例的流程图。Fig. 107B is a flowchart showing still another example of processing by the home controller to control devices in one embodiment of the present invention.
图108是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中图107B的S33710的设备控制画面的控制流程的流程图。FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a control flow of the device control screen in S33710 of FIG. 107B in one embodiment of the present invention.
图109是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中图107B的S33710的设备控制画面的控制流程的流程图。FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a control flow of the device control screen in S33710 of FIG. 107B in one embodiment of the present invention.
图110是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中使用了接触物的效果范围的操作例的图。Fig. 110 is a diagram showing an example of operation using the effect range of a contact object in one embodiment of the present invention.
图111是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中操作了效果范围时的家庭控制器的处理流程的流程图。FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the home controller when an effective range is operated in one embodiment of the present invention.
具体实施方式detailed description
(发明本发明涉及的一个技术方案的经过)(the process of inventing a technical solution involved in the present invention)
首先,对本发明涉及的一个技术方案的着眼点进行说明。First, the focus of a technical solution involved in the present invention will be described.
在上述专利文献1中,在监视器画面的右侧显示多个家电设备的图标,在监视器画面的左侧显示布局图。即,将多个家电设备的图标和布局图分开显示,多个家电设备的图标不能移动。因此,布局图中要操作的家电设备的设置位置的指定是通过光标的移动来进行的。然后,显示操作画面。In the aforementioned Patent Document 1, icons of a plurality of home appliances are displayed on the right side of the monitor screen, and a layout diagram is displayed on the left side of the monitor screen. That is, the icons of multiple household appliances are displayed separately from the layout diagram, and the icons of multiple household appliances cannot be moved. Therefore, designation of the installation position of the home appliance to be operated in the layout plan is performed by moving the cursor. Then, the operation screen is displayed.
由于上述结构,在上述专利文献1中,到显示所希望的家电设备的操作画面为止的操作步骤数为上述(i)~(iv),操作步骤数较多。因此,在使用一个遥控器对多个家电设备进行远程监视或远程控制时,对于各家电设备的操作需要上述(i)~(iv)的操作步骤,操作变得复杂。如此,若仅仅是将多个家电设备的遥控器集中为一个遥控器,则在到操作多个家电设备中所希望的一个家电设备为止的阶段,会对便携信息终端要求更多的处理步骤数,会对用户要求更多的处理操作数。Due to the above-mentioned structure, in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, the number of operation steps until the operation screen of a desired home appliance is displayed is the above-mentioned (i) to (iv), and the number of operation steps is large. Therefore, when using one remote controller to remotely monitor or remotely control a plurality of home appliances, the operation steps (i) to (iv) above are required for the operation of each home appliance, and the operation becomes complicated. In this way, if only the remote controllers of a plurality of household electrical appliances are integrated into one remote controller, a larger number of processing steps will be required for the portable information terminal until a desired one of the plurality of household electrical appliances is operated. , will require more processing operations from the user.
在上述专利文献2中,仅进行各家电设备的状态显示,没有任何对各家电设备的操作进行远程控制的记载。因此,虽然能够使用一个遥控器对多个家电设备进行远程监视,但却无法进行远程控制。In the above-mentioned Patent Document 2, only the state display of each home appliance is performed, and there is no description of remotely controlling the operation of each home appliance. Therefore, although it is possible to remotely monitor a plurality of home appliances using one remote controller, it cannot perform remote control.
在上述专利文献3中,使用个人电脑对电动建材(玄关门、天窗)的开关动作及状态确认进行远程控制、远程监视。但是,远程控制的内容停留在开关动作这一简单控制,而没有考虑到其他家电设备的固有操作。在上述专利文献3中,通过状态显示图标的选择来始终显示操作画面。In the above-mentioned Patent Document 3, a personal computer is used to perform remote control and remote monitoring of the opening and closing operation and status confirmation of electric building materials (entrance doors, sunroofs). However, the content of the remote control is limited to the simple control of switching action, without considering the inherent operation of other home appliances. In the aforementioned Patent Document 3, an operation screen is always displayed by selecting a status display icon.
在上述专利文献4中,例如显示照明设备的操作画面、数码像框的操作画面(图8B)。在照明设备的操作画面中包含控制照明设备的开启/关闭(ON/OFF)的按钮、设定照明设备的亮度的按钮以及确认所述照明设备的状态的按钮。但是,没有考虑到其他家电设备的固有操作。在上述专利文献4中,通过各图标的选择来始终显示操作画面。In the aforementioned Patent Document 4, for example, an operation screen of a lighting device or an operation screen of a digital photo frame is displayed ( FIG. 8B ). The operation screen of the lighting device includes a button for controlling ON/OFF of the lighting device, a button for setting the brightness of the lighting device, and a button for checking the state of the lighting device. However, inherent operations of other home appliances are not considered. In the aforementioned Patent Document 4, the operation screen is always displayed by selecting each icon.
在上述专利文献5中,公开了通过例如使图标从对象区域的外侧向所述对象区域的内侧移动来控制与所述对象区域对应的房间的照明设备的光量这一点。但是,没有考虑到其他家电设备的固有操作。The aforementioned Patent Document 5 discloses that, for example, an icon is moved from the outside of the target area to the inside of the target area to control the light intensity of a lighting device in a room corresponding to the target area. However, inherent operations of other home appliances are not considered.
通过以上的研究,本发明人构思了以下的发明的各技术方案。Based on the above studies, the present inventors conceived the following aspects of the invention.
本发明的一个方式是一种便携信息终端的控制方法,所述便携信息终端与控制一个以上的对象设备的网络连接、并具有触摸面板式显示器,One aspect of the present invention is a control method of a portable information terminal that is connected to a network that controls one or more target devices and that has a touch panel display,
所述控制方法针对所述便携信息终端的计算机执行包括以下的步骤:The control method includes the following steps for the computer execution of the portable information terminal:
使表示建筑物的布局图的显示画面显示于所述触摸面板式显示器的步骤;a step of displaying a display screen representing a layout plan of a building on the touch panel display;
使表示所述一个以上的对象设备的每个对象设备的图标显示在表示所述布局图的显示画面上的步骤,所述一个以上的对象设备包括空调机;a step of displaying an icon representing each of the one or more target devices, including an air conditioner, on a display screen representing the floor plan;
当在所述布局图中在与超过预定面积的一个房间相当的区域的范围内检测到表示所述一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择时,将与所述一个房间相当的区域切换为使所述空调机的设定温度变化的调整区域的步骤;When selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among the one or more target devices is detected within an area corresponding to a room exceeding a predetermined area in the floor plan, the area corresponding to the one room a step of switching to an adjustment area that changes the set temperature of the air conditioner;
当在所述布局图中在与所述预定面积以下的其他房间相当的区域的范围内检测到表示所述一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择时,使调整画面重叠地显示于所述显示画面的步骤,所述调整画面是用于使在与所述其他房间相当的区域设置的空调机的设定温度变化的画面;When a selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among the one or more target devices is detected within a range corresponding to another room having a predetermined area or less in the floor plan, an adjustment screen is displayed in an overlapping manner. In the step of displaying a screen, the adjustment screen is a screen for changing a set temperature of an air conditioner installed in an area corresponding to the other room;
当检测到对所述触摸面板式显示器的接触在所述调整区域或所述调整画面内移动时,使根据所述接触的移动量来使所述空调机的设定温度变化的控制命令输出到所述网络的步骤。When it is detected that the touch on the touch panel display moves within the adjustment area or the adjustment screen, a control command for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner according to the movement amount of the touch is output to the The steps of the network.
根据该方式,当在所述布局图中与某房间相当的区域的范围内检测到显示空调机的图标的选择时,将与某房间相当的区域作为使所述空调机的设定温度变化的区域来使用。According to this aspect, when selection of an icon for displaying an air conditioner is detected within an area corresponding to a certain room in the floor plan, the area corresponding to a certain room is used as a place for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner. region to use.
即,不是另外显示使空调机的设定温度变化的专用画面,而是将布局图中与某房间相当的区域自身兼用作使空调机的设定温度变化的区域。That is, instead of separately displaying a dedicated screen for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner, an area corresponding to a certain room in the floor plan itself is also used as an area for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner.
因此,能够削减如上述专利文献1、上述专利文献3以及上述专利文献4那样独立于布局图地显示操作画面时的步骤数,能够减少便携信息终端内的处理步骤数及用户的操作数。其结果,能够一并减少在将一个以上的对象设备的遥控器整合为一个时的、便携信息终端内的处理数或用户的操作数,能够使到操作所希望的对象设备为止的时间缩短。Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of steps for displaying the operation screen independently of the floor plan as in Patent Document 1, Patent Document 3, and Patent Document 4 above, thereby reducing the number of processing steps in the portable information terminal and the number of user operations. As a result, when the remote controllers of one or more target devices are integrated, the number of processes in the portable information terminal and the number of user operations can be reduced, and the time required to operate a desired target device can be shortened.
另外,如上所述,将布局图中与某房间相当的区域自身作为用于使空调机的设定温度变化的操作画面来使用,使空调机的设定温度变化,因此,不是如上述专利文献2那样将布局图的显示仅用于显示照明设备的动作状态,而也能够利用于空调机的远程操作。In addition, as described above, the area itself corresponding to a certain room in the floor plan is used as an operation screen for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner, and the set temperature of the air conditioner is changed. 2, the display of the floor plan is only used to display the operating state of the lighting equipment, but it can also be used for the remote operation of the air conditioner.
另一方面,在布局图中尺寸小的房间中,当将与该房间相当的区域兼用作使空调机的设定温度变化的调整区域时,由于与房间相当的区域小,因此无法确保足够的调整范围。On the other hand, in a room with a small size in the layout plan, if the area corresponding to the room is also used as an adjustment area for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner, since the area corresponding to the room is small, sufficient Adjustment range.
根据本方式,当在布局图中的与预定面积以下的其他房间相当的区域内检测到表示一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择时,使在与其他房间相当的区域设置的空调机的设定温度变化的调整画面重叠地显示于显示画面。According to this aspect, when the selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among one or more target devices is detected in an area corresponding to another room with a predetermined area or less in the floor plan, the air conditioner installed in the area corresponding to the other room The adjustment screen of the set temperature change of the machine is superimposed on the display screen.
由此,在布局图中的与超过预定面积的一个房间相当的区域内检测到表示一个以上的对象设备的中的空调机的图标的选择的情况下,将与一个房间相当的区域兼用作使空调机的设定温度变化的调整区域。另一方面,在布局图中的与预定面积以下的其他房间相当的区域内检测到表示一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择的情况下,另外显示使在与其他房间相当的区域设置的空调机的设定温度变化的调整画面。As a result, when selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among one or more target devices is detected in an area corresponding to one room exceeding a predetermined area in the floor plan, the area corresponding to one room is also used as the The adjustment area for the set temperature change of the air conditioner. On the other hand, when selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among one or more target devices is detected in an area corresponding to another room with a predetermined area or less in the floor plan, an area corresponding to another room is additionally displayed. Adjustment screen of the set temperature change of the air conditioner that is set.
因此,能够将已经显示的布局图的显示挪用为调整画面而有效利用显示资源,同时尽可能地抑制另外的操作画面的使用。进而,在布局图中的尺寸小的房间中显示空调机的调整画面,因此,能够充分确保用户的操作区域。进而,在本构成中,根据对触摸面板式显示器的接触的移动量来使空调机的设定温度变化,因此,能够实现直观的空调机的操作。Therefore, it is possible to effectively use display resources by diverting the display of the already displayed floor plan into an adjustment screen, while suppressing the use of another operation screen as much as possible. Furthermore, since the adjustment screen of the air conditioner is displayed in a room with a small size in the floor plan, it is possible to ensure a sufficient operating area for the user. Furthermore, in this configuration, since the set temperature of the air conditioner is changed according to the movement amount of the touch on the touch panel display, intuitive operation of the air conditioner can be realized.
另外,在上述方式中,例如,所述调整画面也可以是将与所述其他房间相当的区域放大显示的画面。In addition, in the above aspect, for example, the adjustment screen may be a screen in which an area corresponding to the other room is enlarged and displayed.
在该情况下,将与布局图所包含的其他房间相当的区域放大显示后的画面活用为调整画面。由此,在操作中能够同样地对于与一个房间相当的区域和与其他房间相当的区域确保同样的调整范围。In this case, a screen in which an area corresponding to another room included in the floor plan is enlarged and displayed is used as an adjustment screen. Accordingly, during operation, the same adjustment range can be ensured equally for the area corresponding to one room and the area corresponding to another room.
另外,在上述方式中,例如,所述调整画面也可以在所述显示画面的中心重叠显示于所述显示画面。In addition, in the above manner, for example, the adjustment screen may be superimposed and displayed on the display screen at the center of the display screen.
在该情况下,调整画面显示于显示画面的中心,因此,能够使调整画面相对于显示画面更醒目。In this case, since the adjustment screen is displayed at the center of the display screen, it is possible to make the adjustment screen stand out more than the display screen.
另外,在上述方式中,例如,也可以为还包括:在所述调整画面的范围内检测到所述接触的移动起点的情况下,即使所述接触的移动超出了所述调整画面时,也使根据包含所述超出的部分的所述接触的移动量来使所述空调机的设定温度变化的控制命令输出到所述网络的步骤。In addition, in the above method, for example, it may further include: when the movement starting point of the contact is detected within the range of the adjustment screen, even when the movement of the contact exceeds the adjustment screen, outputting, to the network, a control command for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner according to the movement amount of the contact including the excess portion.
在该情况下,用户也能够将超出了调整画面的区域用于使空调机的设定温度变化。因此,用户能够有效地活用显示区域受到制约的显示器来使空调机的设定温度变化。此外,能够通过接触的移动起点是否位于调整画面的范围内来判别是否将超出了调整画面的区域用于使空调机的设定温度变化。In this case, the user can also use the area beyond the adjustment screen to change the set temperature of the air conditioner. Therefore, the user can effectively use the display with a limited display area to change the set temperature of the air conditioner. In addition, it can be determined whether or not an area beyond the adjustment screen is used to change the set temperature of the air conditioner based on whether or not the movement starting point of the touch is within the range of the adjustment screen.
另外,在上述方式中,例如也可以在所述接触的移动超出了所述调整画面的情况下,所述超出的部分不进行根据所述接触的移动量而使所述空调机的设定温度变化。In addition, in the above-mentioned form, for example, when the movement of the touch exceeds the adjustment screen, the excess part may not adjust the set temperature of the air conditioner according to the movement amount of the touch. Variety.
在该情况下,用于使空调机的设定温度变化的接触移动的范围被限制在调整画面的区域内,因此,能够防止接触移动的移动量过度变大而空调机的设定温度的变化量过度变大。另外,当虽然对显示器的接触移动超出了调整画面、但设定温度也变化时有可能会给用户带来对操作的不适感,但通过设置该限制,能够防止给用户带来这样的不适感。另外,无需将超出调整画面的区域识别为用于使空调机的设定温度变化的区域,能够减轻处理的负担。In this case, the range of the touch movement for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner is limited within the area of the adjustment screen, so that the movement amount of the touch movement becomes excessively large and the set temperature of the air conditioner cannot be changed. The amount becomes excessively large. In addition, even if the touch on the display moves beyond the adjustment screen, the set temperature may also cause discomfort to the user. However, by setting this limit, it is possible to prevent such discomfort to the user. . In addition, there is no need to recognize an area beyond the adjustment screen as an area for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner, and the processing load can be reduced.
另外,在上述方式中,例如也可以为所述接触的移动越大,则使所述空调机的设定温度变化得越大,所述接触的移动越小,则使所述空调机的设定温度变化得越小。In addition, in the above mode, for example, the larger the movement of the contact, the greater the change in the set temperature of the air conditioner, and the smaller the movement of the contact, the greater the change in the setting temperature of the air conditioner. The smaller the change in temperature.
在该情况下,能够使设定温度以与接触的移动量相应的变化量变化,因此,能够实现对于用户而言易懂的操作。In this case, since the set temperature can be changed by the amount of change corresponding to the amount of movement of the contact, it is possible to implement an operation that is easy for the user to understand.
另外,在上述方式中,例如也可以为还包括:在所述调整区域的范围内检测到所述接触的移动起点的情况下,即使所述接触的移动超出了与所述一个房间相当的区域时,也使根据包含所述超出的部分的所述接触量的移动量来使所述空调机的设定温度变化的控制命令输出到所述网络的步骤。In addition, in the above method, for example, it may further include: when the movement start point of the contact is detected within the range of the adjustment area, even if the movement of the contact exceeds the area corresponding to the one room and outputting, to the network, a control command for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner according to the movement amount including the contact amount of the excess portion.
在该情况下,用户也能够将超出了调整区域的区域用于使空调机的设定温度变化。因此,用户能够有效地活用显示区域受到制约的显示器来使空调机的设定温度变化。此外,能够通过接触的移动起点是否位于调整区域的范围内来判别是否将超出了调整区域的区域用于使空调机的设定温度变化。In this case, the user can also use the area beyond the adjustment area to change the set temperature of the air conditioner. Therefore, the user can effectively use the display with a limited display area to change the set temperature of the air conditioner. In addition, whether or not an area beyond the adjustment area is used to change the set temperature of the air conditioner can be determined by whether or not the movement starting point of the contact is within the range of the adjustment area.
另外,在上述方式中,例如也可以为在所述接触的移动超出了与所述一个房间相当的区域的情况下,所述超出的部分不进行根据所述接触的移动量而使所述空调机的设定温度变化。In addition, in the above-mentioned form, for example, when the movement of the contact exceeds an area corresponding to the one room, the excess part may not be performed according to the movement amount of the contact so that the air conditioner may The set temperature of the machine changes.
在该情况下,用于使空调机的设定温度变化的接触移动的范围被限制在调整区域内,因此,能够防止接触移动的移动量过度变大而空调机的设定温度的变化量过度变大。另外,通过设置该限制,能够使用户意识到设定温度的变化所涉及的范围为设置有空调机的房间内。In this case, the range of the contact movement for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner is limited within the adjustment area, so that the movement amount of the contact movement becomes excessively large and the change amount of the set temperature of the air conditioner is prevented from being excessively large. get bigger. In addition, by setting this restriction, the user can be made aware that the range related to the change of the set temperature is within the room where the air conditioner is installed.
另外,其他的方式例如一种便携信息终端的控制方法,所述便携信息终端与控制一个以上的对象设备的网络连接、并具有触摸面板式显示器,In addition, another mode is, for example, a method of controlling a portable information terminal that is connected to a network that controls one or more target devices and that has a touch panel display,
所述控制方法针对所述便携信息终端的计算机执行包括以下的步骤:The control method includes the following steps for the computer execution of the portable information terminal:
使表示建筑物的布局图的显示画面显示于所述触摸面板式显示器的步骤;a step of displaying a display screen representing a layout plan of a building on the touch panel display;
使表示所述一个以上的对象设备的每个对象设备的图标显示于表示所述布局图的显示画面上的步骤,所述一个以上的对象设备包括空调机;a step of displaying, on a display screen representing the floor plan, an icon representing each of the one or more target devices, the one or more target devices including an air conditioner;
当在所述布局图中在与超过预定面积的一个房间相当的区域的范围内检测到表示所述一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择时,将与所述一个房间相当的区域切换为使所述空调机的设定温度变化的调整区域的的步骤;When selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among the one or more target devices is detected within an area corresponding to a room exceeding a predetermined area in the floor plan, the area corresponding to the one room a step of switching to an adjustment area that changes the set temperature of the air conditioner;
当在所述布局图中在与所述预定面积以下的其他房间相当的区域的范围内检测到表示所述一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择时,使调整画面重叠地显示于所述显示画面的步骤,所述调整画面是用于使在与所述其他房间相当的区域设置的空调机的设定温度变化的画面;When a selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among the one or more target devices is detected within a range corresponding to another room having a predetermined area or less in the floor plan, an adjustment screen is displayed in an overlapping manner. In the step of displaying a screen, the adjustment screen is a screen for changing a set temperature of an air conditioner installed in an area corresponding to the other room;
当检测到对所述触摸面板式显示器的接触在所述调整区域或所述调整画面的任一个中移动时,使根据所述接触的移动方向来使所述空调机的设定温度变化的控制命令输出到所述网络的步骤。When it is detected that the contact on the touch panel display moves in either the adjustment area or the adjustment screen, a control command for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner according to the moving direction of the contact Steps to output to the network.
根据本方式,当在布局图中的与某房间相当的区域的范围内检测到表示空调机的图标的选择时,将与某房间相当的区域作为使所述空调机的设定温度变化的区域来使用。According to this aspect, when the selection of the icon representing the air conditioner is detected within the area corresponding to a certain room in the floor plan, the area corresponding to the certain room is set as the area where the set temperature of the air conditioner is changed. to use.
即,不是另外显示使空调机的设定温度变化的专用画面,而是将布局图中的与某个房间相当的区域自身兼用作使所述空调机的设定温度变化的区域。That is, instead of separately displaying a dedicated screen for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner, an area corresponding to a certain room in the floor plan itself is also used as an area for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner.
因此,能够削减如上述专利文献1、上述专利文献3以及上述专利文献4那样独立于布局图地显示操作画面时的步骤数,能够减少便携信息终端内的处理步骤数及用户的操作数。其结果,能够一并减少在将一个以上的对象设备的遥控器整合为一个时的、便携信息终端内的处理数及用户的操作数,能够使到操作所希望的对象设备为止的时间缩短。Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of steps for displaying the operation screen independently of the floor plan as in Patent Document 1, Patent Document 3, and Patent Document 4 above, thereby reducing the number of processing steps in the portable information terminal and the number of user operations. As a result, when the remote controllers of one or more target devices are integrated, the number of processes in the portable information terminal and the number of user operations can be reduced, and the time required to operate a desired target device can be shortened.
另外,如上所述,将布局图中的与某房间相当的区域自身作为用于使空调机的设定温度变化的操作画面来使用,使空调机的设定温度变化,因此,不是如上述专利文献2那样将布局图的显示仅用于显示照明设备的动作状态,而也能够利用于空调机的远程操作。In addition, as mentioned above, the area itself corresponding to a certain room in the floor plan is used as an operation screen for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner, and the set temperature of the air conditioner is changed. As in Document 2, the display of the floor plan is only used to display the operating state of the lighting equipment, but it can also be used for remote operation of the air conditioner.
另一方面,在布局图中尺寸小的房间中,当将与该房间相当的区域兼用作使空调机的设定温度变化的调整区域时,由于与所述房间相当的区域小,因此无法确保足够的调整范围。On the other hand, in a room with a small size in the layout plan, if the area corresponding to the room is also used as an adjustment area for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner, since the area corresponding to the room is small, it cannot be ensured. Sufficient adjustment range.
根据本方式,当在布局图中的与预定面积以下的其他房间相当的区域内检测到表示一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择时,使在与其他房间相当的区域设置的空调机的设定温度变化的调整画面重叠地显示于显示画面。According to this aspect, when the selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among one or more target devices is detected in an area corresponding to another room with a predetermined area or less in the floor plan, the air conditioner installed in the area corresponding to the other room The adjustment screen of the set temperature change of the machine is superimposed on the display screen.
由此,在布局图中的与超过预定面积的一个房间相当的区域内检测到表示一个以上的对象设备的中的空调机的图标的选择的情况下,将与一个房间相当的区域兼用作使空调机的设定温度变化的调整区域。另一方面,在布局图中的与预定面积以下的其他房间相当的区域内检测到表示一个以上的对象设备中的空调机的图标的选择的情况下,另外显示使在与其他房间相当的区域设置的空调机的设定温度变化的调整画面。As a result, when selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among one or more target devices is detected in an area corresponding to one room exceeding a predetermined area in the floor plan, the area corresponding to one room is also used as the The adjustment area for the set temperature change of the air conditioner. On the other hand, when selection of an icon representing an air conditioner among one or more target devices is detected in an area corresponding to another room with a predetermined area or less in the floor plan, an area corresponding to another room is additionally displayed. Adjustment screen of the set temperature change of the air conditioner that is set.
因此,能够将已经显示的布局图的显示挪用为调整画面而有效利用显示资源,同时尽可能地抑制另外的操作画面的使用。进而,在布局图中的尺寸小的房间中显示空调机的调整画面,因此,能够充分确保用户的操作区域。另外,在本构成中,根据对触摸面板式显示器的接触的移动方向来使空调机的设定温度变化,因此,能够实现直观的空调机的操作。Therefore, it is possible to effectively use display resources by diverting the display of the already displayed floor plan into an adjustment screen, while suppressing the use of another operation screen as much as possible. Furthermore, since the adjustment screen of the air conditioner is displayed in a room with a small size in the floor plan, it is possible to ensure a sufficient operating area for the user. In addition, in this configuration, since the set temperature of the air conditioner is changed according to the moving direction of the touch on the touch panel display, intuitive operation of the air conditioner can be realized.
另外,在上述方式中,例如,所述调整画面也可以是将与所述某个房间相当的区域放大显示的画面。In addition, in the above aspect, for example, the adjustment screen may be a screen in which an area corresponding to the certain room is enlarged and displayed.
另外,在上述方式中,例如,所述调整画面也可以在所述显示画面的中心重叠显示于所述显示画面。In addition, in the above manner, for example, the adjustment screen may be superimposed and displayed on the display screen at the center of the display screen.
另外,在上述其他的方式中,例如也可以为还包括:在所述调整画面的范围内检测到所述接触的移动起点的情况下,即使所述接触的移动超出了所述调整画面时,也使根据包含所述超出的部分的所述接触的移动方向来使所述空调机的设定温度变化的控制命令输出到所述网络的步骤。In addition, in the above other mode, for example, it may further include: when the movement starting point of the contact is detected within the range of the adjustment screen, even when the movement of the contact exceeds the adjustment screen, Also outputting to the network a control command for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner according to the moving direction of the contact including the protruding portion.
另外,在上述其他的方式中,例如也可以为在所述接触的移动超出了所述调整画面的情况下,所述超出的部分不进行根据所述接触的移动方向而使所述空调机的设定温度变化。In addition, in the above-mentioned other form, for example, when the movement of the touch exceeds the adjustment screen, the excess portion may not be adjusted according to the movement direction of the touch to make the air conditioner move. Set temperature changes.
另外,在上述其他的方式中,例如也可以为还包括:在检测到所述接触的移动方向是作为所述显示画面的上方的方向的情况下,使所述空调机的设定温度向变高的方向上升的步骤;在检测到所述接触的移动方向是作为所述显示画面的下方的方向的情况下,使所述空调机的设定温度向变低的方向降低的步骤。In addition, in the above other aspect, for example, when it is detected that the moving direction of the touch is an upward direction on the display screen, changing the set temperature direction of the air conditioner to a step of increasing in a higher direction; and a step of lowering the set temperature of the air conditioner in a lower direction when it is detected that the moving direction of the touch is a downward direction of the display screen.
另外,在上述其他的方式中,例如也可以为还包括:在所述调整区域的范围内检测到所述接触的移动起点的情况下,即使所述接触的移动超出了与所述一个房间相当的区域时,也使根据包含所述超出的部分的所述接触的移动量来使所述空调机的设定温度变化的控制命令输出到所述网络的步骤。In addition, in the above-mentioned other mode, for example, it may further include: when the movement start point of the contact is detected within the range of the adjustment area, even if the movement of the contact exceeds the range corresponding to the one room In the case of the region, outputting a control command for changing the set temperature of the air conditioner according to the movement amount of the contact including the excess portion to the network.
例如,也可以将超出了与所述某房间相当的区域的区域也作为所述调整区域。在该情况下,也可以通过接触的移动起点是否处于调整区域的范围内来判别超出了与某房间相当的区域的区域是否为调整区域。For example, an area beyond the area corresponding to the certain room may also be used as the adjustment area. In this case, whether or not an area beyond an area corresponding to a certain room is an adjustment area may be judged by whether or not the contact movement starting point is within the range of the adjustment area.
另外,在上述其他的方式中,例如也可以为在所述接触的移动超出了与所述某房间相当的区域的情况下,所述超出的部分不进行根据所述接触的移动方向而使所述空调机的设定温度变化。In addition, in the above-mentioned other form, for example, when the movement of the contact exceeds the area corresponding to the certain room, the excess part may not be moved according to the movement direction of the contact, so that the Changes in the set temperature of the air conditioner.
例如,也可以将超出了与某房间相当的区域的区域不作为调整区域。For example, an area beyond the area equivalent to a certain room may not be the adjustment area.
(实施方式)(implementation mode)
以下参照附图对本发明的一个实施方式进行说明。此外,在各附图中,对相同的构成要素使用相同的附图标记。One embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In addition, in each drawing, the same code|symbol is used for the same component.
在本实施方式中,对能够由1台控制器控制一个以上的设备的家庭控制器进行说明。In this embodiment, a home controller that can control one or more devices with one controller will be described.
(整体结构)(the whole frame)
图1是应用了本实施方式的家庭控制器的家庭控制系统的整体结构图。如图1所示,家庭控制系统具备家庭控制器100、设备200(对象设备的一个例子)以及服务器300。FIG. 1 is an overall configuration diagram of a home control system to which a home controller according to this embodiment is applied. As shown in FIG. 1 , the home control system includes a home controller 100 , a device 200 (an example of a target device), and a server 300 .
在家中配置有家庭控制器100和一个以上的设备200(例如,设备A200、设备B200),在云(cloud)中心配置有服务器300。家庭控制器100、设备200和服务器300经由有线和/或无线的网络进行相互通信。例如,设备200和家庭控制器100经由无线和/或有线的宅内网络以能够相互通信的方式连接,家庭控制器100、设备200和服务器300经由因特网等外部网络以能够相互通信的方式连接。A home controller 100 and one or more devices 200 (for example, device A200 and device B200 ) are arranged at home, and a server 300 is arranged at a cloud center. The home controller 100, the device 200, and the server 300 communicate with each other via a wired and/or wireless network. For example, the device 200 and the home controller 100 are communicably connected via a wireless and/or wired home network, and the home controller 100, device 200, and server 300 are communicably connected via an external network such as the Internet.
此外,家庭控制器100不需要一定配置在家中,也可以配置在家外。在该情况下,用户从外出目的地等控制一个以上设备200。In addition, the home controller 100 does not necessarily need to be placed at home, and may be placed outside the home. In this case, the user controls one or more devices 200 from an outgoing destination or the like.
作为家庭控制器100,可采用智能电话、平板终端等便携信息终端。但是,这是一个例子,也可以采用便携电话(移动电话)等按钮式的便携信息终端作为家庭控制器100。As the home controller 100, portable information terminals such as smart phones and tablet terminals can be used. However, this is an example, and a push-button portable information terminal such as a mobile phone (mobile phone) may be used as the home controller 100 .
图2是表示家庭控制器100控制的主要设备200的图。家庭控制器100控制空调机201、照明设备202、203、浴缸204、冰箱205、洗衣机206、马桶207以及窗帘208等设备200。此外,如照明设备202和照明设备203这样,在家庭控制器100控制的设备200中,同种类的设备200可以有多台。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a main device 200 controlled by the home controller 100 . The home controller 100 controls devices 200 such as an air conditioner 201 , lighting devices 202 and 203 , a bathtub 204 , a refrigerator 205 , a washing machine 206 , a toilet 207 , and curtains 208 . In addition, among the devices 200 controlled by the home controller 100 such as the lighting device 202 and the lighting device 203 , there may be multiple devices 200 of the same type.
另外,图2所示的空调机201等设备200不过是一个例子,也可以采用电视机、蓝光刻录机(Blue-ray recorder)、音频设备等来作为设备200。也就是说,作为设备200,只要是具有能够与家庭控制器100通信的功能的电气设备,则可以采用任何设备。另外,在图2中,作为设备200示出了在一般家庭中使用的电气设备,但本实施方式不限定于此,也可以采用在办公室等使用的办公设备。作为办公设备,例如能列举出打印机、个人电脑、扫描仪、复印机等。In addition, the equipment 200 such as the air conditioner 201 shown in FIG. 2 is just an example, and a television, a Blu-ray recorder (Blue-ray recorder), an audio equipment, etc. may be used as the equipment 200 . That is, as the device 200 , any device may be used as long as it is an electrical device having a function capable of communicating with the home controller 100 . In addition, in FIG. 2 , electrical equipment used in general households is shown as the equipment 200 , but this embodiment is not limited thereto, and office equipment used in offices or the like may be employed. Examples of office equipment include printers, personal computers, scanners, copiers, and the like.
图3是表示家庭控制器100、设备200以及服务器300的构成的框图。如图3所示,家庭控制器100具备显示器101、触摸面板控制单元102、显示控制单元103、存储单元104、设备管理单元105、设备控制单元106以及通信控制单元107。FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing configurations of the home controller 100 , the device 200 , and the server 300 . As shown in FIG. 3 , home controller 100 includes display 101 , touch panel control section 102 , display control section 103 , storage section 104 , device management section 105 , device control section 106 , and communication control section 107 .
显示器101例如由触摸面板显示器构成,显示用于供用户操作家庭控制器100的用户界面等。用户能够通过碰触显示器101来向家庭控制器100输入各种操作。The display 101 is constituted by, for example, a touch panel display, and displays a user interface for the user to operate the home controller 100 . A user can input various operations to the home controller 100 by touching the display 101 .
触摸面板控制单元102在识别到用户向显示器101的操作时,对该操作的内容进行解析,向其他构成要素通知操作内容。例如,如果在用户轻敲的显示器101上的位置显示有对象(Object),则触摸面板控制单元102判定为该对象被用户选择。作为对象,可采用按钮等受理用户操作的各种GUI部件。When touch panel control section 102 recognizes a user's operation on display 101 , it analyzes the content of the operation, and notifies other components of the operation content. For example, if an object (Object) is displayed at a position on display 101 tapped by the user, touch panel control section 102 determines that the object is selected by the user. As objects, various GUI components that accept user operations, such as buttons, can be used.
显示控制单元103生成家庭控制器100的GUI(Graphical User Interface:图形用户界面)并使其显示于显示器101。存储单元104存储设备管理单元105管理的设备列表等家庭控制器100的工作所需要的信息。Display control section 103 generates a GUI (Graphical User Interface: Graphical User Interface) of home controller 100 and displays it on display 101 . The storage unit 104 stores information necessary for the operation of the home controller 100 such as the device list managed by the device management unit 105 .
设备管理单元105使用存储单元104所存储的设备列表来管理控制对象的设备200。另外,当设备200连接到宅内的网络上时,设备管理单元105检测到该设备200。进而,设备管理单元105从服务器300取得后述的家庭信息2700,将所取得的家庭信息2700存储于存储单元104来进行管理。设备控制单元106对设备200发出控制命令。通信控制单元107控制家庭控制器100与设备200间的通信、和/或家庭控制器100与服务器300间的通信。另外,通信控制单元107从其他区块受理各种数据的发送请求,发送给设备200或服务器300,并且接收从设备200或服务器300发送来的数据,提供给相应的区块。The device management unit 105 uses the device list stored in the storage unit 104 to manage the devices 200 to be controlled. Also, when the device 200 is connected to the home network, the device management section 105 detects the device 200 . Furthermore, device management section 105 acquires family information 2700 described later from server 300 , and stores and manages the acquired family information 2700 in storage section 104 . The device control unit 106 issues a control command to the device 200 . The communication control unit 107 controls communication between the home controller 100 and the device 200 , and/or communication between the home controller 100 and the server 300 . In addition, the communication control unit 107 accepts various data transmission requests from other blocks, sends them to the device 200 or the server 300, and receives data sent from the device 200 or the server 300, and provides them to the corresponding blocks.
此外,显示器101也可以不是触摸面板显示器而是通常的显示器。在该情况下,用户使用未图示的鼠标等外部输入装置,使显示于显示器101上的光标移动并点击所希望的对象来输入对象的选择指示即可。也就是说,在本实施方式中,用户通过触碰显示器101而进行的一系列操作可以替换成使用鼠标等外部输入装置使光标移动、点击的操作。In addition, the display 101 may be a normal display instead of a touch panel display. In this case, the user may use an external input device such as a mouse (not shown) to move a cursor displayed on display 101 and click a desired object to input an instruction to select an object. That is to say, in this embodiment, a series of operations performed by the user by touching the display 101 can be replaced by operations of moving and clicking a cursor using an external input device such as a mouse.
如图3所示,设备200具备控制执行单元201、状态管理单元202、存储单元204以及通信控制单元207。控制执行单元201从家庭控制器100和/或服务器300接收控制命令,按照所接收到的控制命令来控制设备200。由控制执行单元201控制的设备200的控制内容,根据设备200的种类而不同。例如,如果设备200是照明设备,则控制执行单元201使照明设备开启、关闭。另外,控制执行单元201将控制命令的执行结果和/或设备200的状态发送给家庭控制器100和/或服务器300。As shown in FIG. 3 , the device 200 includes a control execution unit 201 , a state management unit 202 , a storage unit 204 , and a communication control unit 207 . The control execution unit 201 receives a control command from the home controller 100 and/or the server 300, and controls the device 200 according to the received control command. The control content of the device 200 controlled by the control execution unit 201 differs depending on the type of the device 200 . For example, if the device 200 is a lighting device, the control execution unit 201 turns on and off the lighting device. In addition, the control execution unit 201 sends the execution result of the control command and/or the state of the device 200 to the home controller 100 and/or the server 300 .
状态管理单元202管理设备200的状态。由状态管理单元202管理的设备200的管理内容,根据设备200的种类而不同。例如,如果设备200是照明设备,则状态管理单元202对照明设备当前是开启状态还是关闭状态进行管理。存储单元204存储与状态管理单元202管理的设备200的状态相关的信息。通信控制单元207控制设备200与家庭控制器100间的通信和/或设备200与服务器300间的通信。另外,通信控制单元207从其他区块受理各种数据的发送请求,发送给家庭控制器100或服务器300,并且接收从家庭控制器100或服务器300发送来的数据,提供给相应的区块。The status management unit 202 manages the status of the device 200 . The management content of the device 200 managed by the status management unit 202 differs depending on the type of the device 200 . For example, if the device 200 is a lighting device, the state management unit 202 manages whether the lighting device is currently in an on state or an off state. The storage unit 204 stores information related to the state of the device 200 managed by the state management unit 202 . The communication control unit 207 controls communication between the device 200 and the home controller 100 and/or communication between the device 200 and the server 300 . In addition, the communication control unit 207 accepts various data transmission requests from other blocks, sends them to the home controller 100 or the server 300, and receives data sent from the home controller 100 or the server 300, and provides them to the corresponding blocks.
如图3所示,服务器300具备家庭信息管理单元301、设备控制单元302、存储单元304以及通信控制单元307。家庭信息管理单元301按家或按用户账户来管理后述的家庭信息2700。另外,家庭信息管理单元301根据来自家庭控制器100的请求而将家庭信息2700发送给家庭控制器100。进而,家庭信息管理单元301从设备200取得与设备200的使用履历相关的日志信息和/或与设备200的状态相关的信息,将所取得的这些信息存储于存储单元304来进行管理。As shown in FIG. 3 , the server 300 includes a family information management unit 301 , a device control unit 302 , a storage unit 304 , and a communication control unit 307 . Family information management section 301 manages family information 2700 described later by family or by user account. In addition, family information management section 301 transmits family information 2700 to home controller 100 in response to a request from home controller 100 . Furthermore, family information management section 301 acquires log information related to the use history of device 200 and/or information related to the state of device 200 from device 200 , and stores and manages the acquired information in storage section 304 .
设备控制单元302根据来自家庭控制器100的请求而向设备200发送控制命令。存储单元304存储家庭信息管理单元301管理的家庭信息2700和/或与设备200的状态相关的信息等服务器300的工作所需要的信息。通信控制单元307与通信控制单元107同样地控制服务器300与家庭控制器100间的通信、和/或服务器300与设备200间的通信。另外,通信控制单元307从其他区块受理各种数据的发送请求,发送给家庭控制器100或设备200,并且接收从家庭控制器100或设备200发送来的数据,提供给相应的区块。The device control unit 302 sends a control command to the device 200 according to a request from the home controller 100 . Storage unit 304 stores information necessary for the operation of server 300 such as family information 2700 managed by family information management unit 301 and/or information related to the state of device 200 . The communication control unit 307 controls the communication between the server 300 and the home controller 100 and/or the communication between the server 300 and the device 200 similarly to the communication control unit 107 . In addition, the communication control unit 307 accepts transmission requests of various data from other blocks, transmits them to the home controller 100 or the device 200, and receives data transmitted from the home controller 100 or the device 200, and provides them to the corresponding blocks.
图4是表示家庭控制器100的安装形态的构成例的图。如图4所示,家庭控制器100具备应用程序401、OS(Operating System:操作系统)402、存储器403以及未图示的其他硬件。FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an installation form of the home controller 100 . As shown in FIG. 4 , the home controller 100 includes an application program 401 , an OS (Operating System: operating system) 402 , a memory 403 , and other hardware not shown.
应用程序401是用于使便携信息终端作为家庭控制器100发挥功能的应用程序软件,由家庭控制器100的处理器来执行。家庭控制器100可以从计算机可读取的记录介质中读取应用程序401来安装应用程序401,也可以通过从网络下载来安装应用程序401。OS402是便携信息终端的基本软件,由家庭控制器100的处理器来执行。存储器403由家庭控制器100具备的RAM、ROM等存储装置构成,存储应用程序401所包含的数据群。通过家庭控制器100的处理器执行应用程序401,实现图3所示的触摸面板控制单元102、显示控制单元103、存储单元104、设备管理单元105、设备控制单元106以及通信控制单元107的功能。另外,通过家庭控制器100的处理器执行应用程序401,存储器403作为存储单元104发挥功能。The application 401 is application software for making the portable information terminal function as the home controller 100 , and is executed by the processor of the home controller 100 . The home controller 100 may install the application program 401 by reading the application program 401 from a computer-readable recording medium, or may install the application program 401 by downloading it from a network. OS 402 is the basic software of the portable information terminal, and is executed by the processor of the home controller 100 . The memory 403 is constituted by a storage device such as RAM and ROM included in the home controller 100, and stores data groups included in the application program 401. Execution of the application program 401 by the processor of the home controller 100 realizes the functions of the touch panel control unit 102 shown in FIG. . In addition, the memory 403 functions as the storage unit 104 when the processor of the home controller 100 executes the application program 401 .
但是,在本实施方式中,家庭控制器100既可以单独以应用程序401来安装,也可以以应用程序401和OS402来安装,还可以以应用程序401、OS402以及存储器403来安装,另外也可以以应用程序401、OS402、存储器403以及其他未图示的硬件来安装。无论在哪个安装形态下都能够实现本实施方式的家庭控制器100。此外,在本实施方式中,通过构成便携信息终端的例如处理器和存储装置构成计算机。作为处理器,可采用CPU、FPGA和ASIC的任一方或其中两个以上的组合。作为存储装置,例如可采用ROM、RAM和硬盘中的任一方或其中两个以上的组合。However, in this embodiment, the home controller 100 may be installed with the application program 401 alone, or may be installed with the application program 401 and the OS 402, or may be installed with the application program 401, the OS 402, and the memory 403, or may be It is installed with an application program 401, an OS 402, a memory 403, and other not-shown hardware. The home controller 100 of this embodiment can be realized in any mounting form. In addition, in this embodiment, a computer is constituted by, for example, a processor and a storage device constituting a portable information terminal. As the processor, any one of CPU, FPGA, and ASIC, or a combination of two or more of them can be used. As the storage device, for example, any one of ROM, RAM, and hard disk, or a combination of two or more of them can be used.
图5是表示家庭控制器100的基本画面的构成的图。如图5所示,显示器101所显示的家庭控制器100的基本画面具备布局图500、设备图标501以及设备一览显示变更按钮503。布局图500是以平面方式表示构成家的各楼层的一个以上的房间的配置和形状的俯视图。在家由一层以上的楼层构成的情况下,布局图500也可按楼层来准备。例如,在家由2层楼层构成的情况下,如图6所示,对于布局图500,在显示器101上显示第1楼层的布局图601和第2楼层的布局图602这两个布局图。FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen of the home controller 100 . As shown in FIG. 5 , the basic screen of the home controller 100 displayed on the display 101 includes a floor plan 500 , a device icon 501 , and a device list display change button 503 . Floor plan 500 is a plan view showing the arrangement and shape of one or more rooms constituting each floor of a house in a planar manner. In the case where the home consists of more than one floor, the floor plan 500 may also be prepared by floor. For example, when a house consists of two floors, as shown in FIG.
设备图标501重叠显示在布局图500上,是表示设备200的图标。当触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户轻敲设备图标501时,显示控制单元103使显示器101显示后述的设备控制画面502。由此,用户能够操作设备控制画面502来控制设备200。The device icon 501 is displayed superimposed on the floor plan 500 and is an icon representing the device 200 . When touch panel control section 102 detects that the user taps device icon 501 , display control section 103 causes display 101 to display device control screen 502 described later. Thus, the user can control the device 200 by operating the device control screen 502 .
设备图标501按设备200来准备。显示控制单元103基于设备200在宅内的实际配置,在布局图500上配置设备图标501。将设备图标501配置在布局图500的哪个位置的信息被登记(登录)在后述的设备列表3100的配置3104中。在此,在配置3104中登记有与设备200的实际配置位置对应的布局图500上的位置。因此,显示控制单元103通过将设备图标501配置在设备列表3100的配置3104中所登记的位置,能够将设备图标501配置在与设备200的实际配置位置对应的布局图500上的位置。The device icon 501 is prepared for each device 200 . The display control unit 103 arranges the device icons 501 on the floor plan 500 based on the actual arrangement of the devices 200 in the house. Information on where on the floor plan 500 the device icons 501 are arranged is registered (registered) in an arrangement 3104 of the device list 3100 to be described later. Here, the position on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the actual arrangement position of the device 200 is registered in the arrangement 3104 . Therefore, display control section 103 can arrange device icon 501 at a position on floor plan 500 corresponding to the actual arrangement position of device 200 by arranging device icon 501 at a position registered in arrangement 3104 of device list 3100 .
在图5所示的布局图500中,通过表示房间隔断的隔断线将一个楼层分割成多个房间。因此,对于在哪个房间配置了何种设备200,用户能够一目了然。In the floor plan 500 shown in FIG. 5 , one floor is divided into a plurality of rooms by partition lines representing room partitions. Therefore, the user can know at a glance what kind of device 200 is installed in which room.
另外,在图5的例子中,在与家具的实际配置位置对应的布局图500上的位置,显示有家具的概略图像。另外,在与门的实际配置位置对应的布局图500上的位置,显示有表示门的可动区域的图像。另外,在与楼梯(台阶)的配置位置对应的布局图500上的位置,显示有楼梯的图像。因此,对于配置于各房间的家具的位置、楼层的楼梯及门的位置,用户也能够一目了然。In addition, in the example of FIG. 5 , schematic images of furniture are displayed at positions on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the actual arrangement positions of the furniture. In addition, an image showing the movable area of the door is displayed at a position on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the actual arrangement position of the door. In addition, images of stairs are displayed at positions on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the positions where the stairs (steps) are arranged. Therefore, the user can also know at a glance the positions of furniture arranged in each room, and the positions of stairs and doors on floors.
在基本画面的右下显示的记有“向一览UI”的按钮是设备一览显示变更按钮503,是用于从基本画面向后述的设备一览显示画面(参照图24)切换画面显示的按钮。当触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户轻敲设备一览显示变更按钮503时,显示控制单元103将显示器101的画面显示从基本画面切换到设备一览显示画面。但是,在家庭控制器100中预先登记了不利用设备一览显示画面的情况下,显示控制单元103也可以不显示设备一览显示变更按钮503。The button marked "to list UI" displayed on the lower right of the basic screen is the device list display change button 503, which is a button for switching the screen display from the basic screen to the device list display screen (see FIG. 24) described later. When touch panel control section 102 detects that the user taps device list display change button 503 , display control section 103 switches the screen display of display 101 from the basic screen to the device list display screen. However, when the non-use of the device list display screen is registered in advance in the home controller 100 , the display control section 103 may not display the device list display change button 503 .
此外,在上述说明中,使一个设备图标501与一个设备200对应,但本实施方式不限定于此,也可以使一个设备图标501与多个设备200对应,使多个设备200共用一个设备图标501。例如,在起居室存在两个照明设备的情况下,也可以将这两个照明设备由一个设备图标501来表示。In addition, in the above description, one device icon 501 is associated with one device 200, but this embodiment is not limited thereto, and one device icon 501 may be associated with a plurality of devices 200, so that a plurality of devices 200 share one device icon. 501. For example, if there are two lighting devices in the living room, these two lighting devices may be represented by one device icon 501 .
在该情况下,当由用户轻敲表示这两个照明设备的设备图标501时,显示控制单元103使显示器101显示能够同时控制两个照明设备的设备控制画面502。由此,用户能够同时控制两个照明设备。在起居室这样的大房间内多会配置有多个照明设备。用户在开启或关闭起居室的照明设备的情况下,大多不是开启或关闭起居室所配置的一部分照明设备,而是开启或关闭全部照明设备。在该情况下,如果能够将全部照明设备一起开启或关闭,则能够减少用户的操作数。因此,对于用户同时操作的可能性高的多个设备200,采用使其与一个设备图标501相关联而显示一个设备控制画面502的方式即可。In this case, when the device icon 501 representing the two lighting devices is tapped by the user, the display control unit 103 causes the display 101 to display the device control screen 502 capable of simultaneously controlling the two lighting devices. Thereby, the user is able to control two lighting devices simultaneously. In a large room such as a living room, there are often multiple lighting devices. When the user turns on or off the lighting equipment in the living room, most of the lighting equipment does not turn on or off a part of the lighting equipment installed in the living room, but turns on or off all the lighting equipment. In this case, if all the lighting devices can be turned on or off at once, the number of operations for the user can be reduced. Therefore, for a plurality of devices 200 that are likely to be operated simultaneously by the user, one device icon 501 may be associated with one device control screen 502 to display one device control screen 502 .
此外,在设备图标501表示多个设备200的情况下,显示控制单元103将该设备图标501显示在与任一个设备200的实际配置位置对应的布局图500上的位置即可。或者,显示控制单元103也可以将表示多个设备200的设备图标501显示在配置多个设备200的房间的预定的位置。Also, when the device icon 501 represents a plurality of devices 200 , the display control section 103 may display the device icon 501 at a position on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the actual arrangement position of any one of the devices 200 . Alternatively, the display control section 103 may display a device icon 501 representing a plurality of devices 200 at a predetermined position in a room in which a plurality of devices 200 are arranged.
此外,为了基于设备200的宅内的实际配置将设备图标501配置在布局图500上,用户使设备图标501移动到布局图500的适当位置。用户通过在长按设备图标501的同时进行拖拽,能够使设备图标501移动到任意的位置。这在家庭控制器100的初次利用时或新购入设备200时等添加设备图标501的定时(时刻)来执行。Also, the user moves the device icon 501 to an appropriate position on the floor plan 500 in order to arrange the device icon 501 on the floor plan 500 based on the actual arrangement of the device 200 in the house. The user can move the device icon 501 to an arbitrary position by dragging the device icon 501 while pressing and holding it. This is performed at the timing (time) at which the device icon 501 is added, such as when the home controller 100 is used for the first time or when the device 200 is newly purchased.
具体而言,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到设备图标501的拖拽时,设备管理单元105将移动后的设备图标501的布局图500上的位置登记在后述的设备列表3100的配置3104中。由此,在配置3104中登记与设备200的实际配置位置对应的布局图500上的位置。Specifically, when the touch panel control section 102 detects the dragging of the device icon 501, the device management section 105 registers the position on the layout diagram 500 of the moved device icon 501 in the arrangement 3104 of the device list 3100 described later. . Thus, the position on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the actual arrangement position of the device 200 is registered in the arrangement 3104 .
设备图标501的初始显示位置由系统事前设定即可,例如可以采用布局图500的显示区域的外侧的预定位置和/或布局图500上的预定房间内的预定位置。此外,基于设备200的宅内的实际配置将设备图标501配置在布局图500上的方法不限于此,也可以使用如下所述的方法。The initial display position of the device icon 501 may be set by the system in advance, for example, a predetermined position outside the display area of the floor plan 500 and/or a predetermined position in a predetermined room on the floor plan 500 may be used. In addition, the method of arranging the device icon 501 on the floor plan 500 based on the actual arrangement of the device 200 in the house is not limited to this, and the following method may be used.
如图7、图8以及图9所示,在布局图500上还存在包含设备图标501的配置信息的标识。例如,在图7的布局图500的例子中,在应配置设备图标501的位置,记载有示出应配置的设备图标501所表示的设备200的种类的文本。另外,在图8的布局图500的例子中,在应配置设备图标501的位置,记载有示出应配置的设备图标501所表示的设备200的种类的图像。另外,在图9的布局图500的例子中,在应配置设备图标501的位置,记载有以圆圈和/或四边形等简略示出应配置的设备图标501所表示的设备200的种类的图像。As shown in FIG. 7 , FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 , on the layout diagram 500 there is also a mark including configuration information of the device icon 501 . For example, in the example of the floor plan 500 in FIG. 7 , text indicating the type of device 200 indicated by the device icon 501 to be placed is described at the position where the device icon 501 should be placed. In addition, in the example of the floor plan 500 in FIG. 8 , an image showing the type of device 200 indicated by the device icon 501 to be arranged is described at the position where the device icon 501 should be arranged. In addition, in the example of the floor plan 500 in FIG. 9 , at the position where the device icon 501 should be arranged, an image that briefly shows the type of device 200 indicated by the device icon 501 to be arranged is described in the form of a circle and/or a rectangle.
如此,在布局图500包含设备图标501的配置信息的情况下,显示控制单元103基于布局图500所记载的配置信息将设备图标501自动地配置在布局图500上来生成图5的基本画面即可。在该情况下,用户不需要进行使设备图标501移动到布局图500的适当位置的操作。In this way, when the floor plan 500 includes the arrangement information of the device icons 501, the display control section 103 automatically arranges the device icons 501 on the floor plan 500 based on the arrangement information described in the floor plan 500 to generate the basic screen of FIG. 5 . In this case, the user does not need to perform an operation to move the device icon 501 to an appropriate position on the floor plan 500 .
例如,在图7的第1楼层的布局图4401的例子中,显示控制单元103检测记载有“电视机”这一文本的位置,在该位置自动地配置电视机的设备图标501,并且将所检测到的位置登记在设备列表3100的配置3104中。For example, in the example of the floor plan 4401 of the first floor in FIG. The detected position is registered in the configuration 3104 of the device list 3100 .
另外,在图8的第1楼层的布局图4501的例子中,显示控制单元103检测记载有“电视机”的图像的位置,在该位置自动地配置电视机的设备图标501,并且将所检测到的位置登记在设备列表3100的配置3104中。另外,在图9的第1楼层的布局图4601的例子中,显示控制单元103检测记载有“以斜线涂划的圆圈”形状的图像的位置,在该位置自动地配置电视机的设备图标501,并且将所检测到的位置登记在设备列表3100的配置3104中。In addition, in the example of the floor plan 4501 on the first floor in FIG. The arrived location is registered in the configuration 3104 of the device list 3100 . In addition, in the example of the floor plan 4601 of the first floor in FIG. 9 , the display control section 103 detects the position where an image in the shape of a "circle drawn with diagonal lines" is described, and automatically arranges the device icon of the TV at the position. 501, and register the detected location in the configuration 3104 of the device list 3100.
此外,显示控制单元103可以使用通常利用的文本识别技术和/或图像识别技术,识别布局图500所包含的配置信息,检测配置信息的显示位置。In addition, the display control unit 103 may use commonly used text recognition technology and/or image recognition technology to recognize the configuration information contained in the layout diagram 500 and detect the display position of the configuration information.
图10是说明家庭控制器100的基本画面中的楼层显示的切换方法的图。图10中,例示了家由第1楼层和第2楼层这两层楼层构成的情况。在家庭控制器100的基本画面显示了第1楼层的布局图601的状态下,触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户对第1楼层的楼梯区域603的轻敲。于是,显示控制单元103将基本画面的楼层显示从第1楼层切换到第2楼层。同样,在家庭控制器100的基本画面显示了第2楼层的布局图602的状态下,触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户对第2楼层的楼梯区域604的轻敲。于是,显示控制单元103将基本画面的楼层显示从第2楼层切换到第1楼层。FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a method of switching floor displays on the basic screen of the home controller 100 . In FIG. 10 , a case where a house is composed of two floors, a first floor and a second floor, is illustrated. While the floor plan 601 of the first floor is displayed on the basic screen of the home controller 100, the touch panel control section 102 detects that the user taps the stair area 603 on the first floor. Then, display control section 103 switches the floor display on the basic screen from the first floor to the second floor. Similarly, when the floor plan 602 of the second floor is displayed on the basic screen of the home controller 100, the touch panel control section 102 detects that the user taps the stair area 604 on the second floor. Then, display control section 103 switches the floor display on the basic screen from the second floor to the first floor.
在此,当由用户轻敲(敲击)的位置位于由登记在房间信息2900(参照图32)的房间类型2902中的楼梯的4个顶点包围的区域内时,触摸面板控制单元102判断为轻敲了楼梯区域603即可。Here, when the position tapped (tapped) by the user is within the area surrounded by the four vertices of the stairs registered in the room type 2902 of the room information 2900 (see FIG. 32 ), touch panel control section 102 determines that Just tap the staircase area 603.
进一步,楼层显示的切换不仅可以通过楼梯区域603的轻敲来进行切换,也可以通过显示器101的划动操作来进行切换。在家庭控制器100的基本画面显示了第1楼层的布局图601的状态下,触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户在显示器101上从右向左进行了划动操作。于是,显示控制单元103将基本画面的楼层显示从第1楼层切换到第2楼层。同样,在家庭控制器100的基本画面显示了第2楼层的布局图602的状态下,触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户在显示器101上从左向右进行了划动操作。于是,显示控制单元103将基本画面的楼层显示从第2楼层切换到第1楼层。此外,也可以通过上下方向的划动操作来进行切换。Furthermore, switching of the floor display can be performed not only by tapping the stair area 603 but also by swiping the display 101 . While the floor plan 601 of the first floor is displayed on the basic screen of the home controller 100 , the touch panel control section 102 detects that the user has performed a flick operation from right to left on the display 101 . Then, display control section 103 switches the floor display on the basic screen from the first floor to the second floor. Similarly, when the floor plan 602 of the second floor is displayed on the basic screen of the home controller 100 , the touch panel control section 102 detects that the user performs a flick operation from left to right on the display 101 . Then, display control section 103 switches the floor display on the basic screen from the second floor to the first floor. In addition, switching can also be performed by a swipe operation in the up and down direction.
图11是表示家庭控制器100的设备控制画面502的显示状态的构成的图。在图5所示的基本画面中,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户选择了设备图标501时,显示控制单元103将与所选择的设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502显示于显示器101。设备控制画面502是按各设备200而固有的,是用于对设备200进行控制或状态确认的控制画面。例如,在图11中,示出了由用户选择了空调机的设备图标801的例子,使用空调机的设备控制画面502对空调机的温度设定和/或风向进行控制。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of a device control screen 502 of the home controller 100 . In the basic screen shown in FIG. 5 , when touch panel control section 102 detects that the user selects device icon 501 , display control section 103 displays device control screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501 on display 101 . The device control screen 502 is specific to each device 200 and is a control screen for controlling the device 200 or checking the status. For example, in FIG. 11 , an example is shown in which the user selects the device icon 801 of the air conditioner, and controls the temperature setting and/or wind direction of the air conditioner using the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner.
在设备控制画面502显示有空调机的图像,用户能够快速识别该设备控制画面502是空调机的控制画面,实现了防止误操作。在空调机的图像的下侧显示有表示风向的图像,用户能够通过例如反复轻敲该图像来选择所希望的风向。显示在设备控制画面502内的数值表示空调机的当前设定温度。另外,在设备控制画面502中,向上的三角形按钮是温度上升按钮,向下的三角形按钮是温度下降按钮。按一次温度上升按钮,空调机的设定温度就上升预定温度(例如0.5度),按一次温度下降按钮,空调机的设定温度就下降预定温度(例如0.5度)。The image of the air conditioner is displayed on the device control screen 502, and the user can quickly recognize that the device control screen 502 is the control screen of the air conditioner, thereby preventing misoperation. An image showing the wind direction is displayed below the image of the air conditioner, and the user can select a desired wind direction by repeatedly tapping the image, for example. The numerical value displayed in the device control screen 502 represents the current set temperature of the air conditioner. In addition, on the device control screen 502 , an upward triangle button is a temperature increase button, and a downward triangle button is a temperature decrease button. Press the temperature rising button once, and the set temperature of the air conditioner will rise to a predetermined temperature (for example, 0.5 degrees); press the temperature drop button once, and the set temperature of the air conditioner will drop by a predetermined temperature (for example, 0.5 degrees).
关于设备控制画面502的显示状态中的设备图标501的配置方法,存在以下的方法。There are the following methods for arranging the device icons 501 in the display state of the device control screen 502 .
第1种方法是如图11所示将设备图标501配置在设备控制画面502的显示区域外的方法。当触摸面板控制单元102检测到由用户轻敲了某设备图标501时,显示控制单元103不管设备图标501是否处于布局图500的显示区域内都将全部设备图标501配置在设备控制画面502的显示区域外且显示器101的显示区域内。在图11的例子中,设备图标501以椭圆形配置成包围设备控制画面502。也即是,在由用户选择了某设备图标501而显示与该设备图标501对应的设备200的设备控制画面502时,显示控制单元103使全部设备图标501退避到设备控制画面502的显示区域外。The first method is a method of arranging the device icon 501 outside the display area of the device control screen 502 as shown in FIG. 11 . When the touch panel control unit 102 detects that a certain device icon 501 is tapped by the user, the display control unit 103 arranges all the device icons 501 on the display of the device control screen 502 regardless of whether the device icon 501 is in the display area of the layout diagram 500 area and within the display area of the display 101. In the example of FIG. 11 , device icons 501 are arranged in an ellipse to surround a device control screen 502 . That is, when a certain device icon 501 is selected by the user and the device control screen 502 of the device 200 corresponding to the device icon 501 is displayed, the display control unit 103 retracts all the device icons 501 out of the display area of the device control screen 502 .
由此,能够防止设备图标501被设备控制画面502盖住。因此,在用户要使与当前设备控制画面502显示的设备200不同的设备200的设备控制画面502显示的情况下,不需要进行暂且消除当前显示的设备控制画面502来找出该不同的设备200的设备图标501的作业。This prevents the device icon 501 from being covered by the device control screen 502 . Therefore, when the user wants to display the device control screen 502 of a device 200 different from the device 200 currently displayed on the device control screen 502, it is not necessary to temporarily delete the currently displayed device control screen 502 to find the different device 200. The device icon 501 of the job.
在此,显示控制单元103例如根据设备控制画面502的尺寸来在具有预先确定的形状的椭圆的外周上决定各设备图标501的配置位置,在该位置配置设备图标501即可。作为配置位置的决定方法,例如可以采用将成为显示对象的全部设备图标501以等间隔排列在椭圆的外周上的方法,也可以采用将设备图标501配置成使相邻的设备图标501与椭圆的中心所成的角度相等的方法。或者,显示控制单元103也可以将椭圆的外周划分成设备控制画面502的上下左右4个区域,将设备图标501配置成在各区域中设备图标501的个数相等、且以等间隔排列。另外,在所决定的配置位置配置布局图500上最接近的位置所配置的设备图标501即可。Here, display control section 103 determines the arrangement position of each device icon 501 on the outer periphery of an ellipse having a predetermined shape based on, for example, the size of device control screen 502 , and the device icon 501 may be arranged at the position. As a method of determining the arrangement position, for example, a method of arranging all the device icons 501 to be displayed on the outer periphery of an ellipse at equal intervals may be used, or a method of arranging the device icons 501 such that adjacent device icons 501 are aligned with the ellipse may be adopted. The method in which the angles formed by the centers are equal. Alternatively, the display control unit 103 may also divide the outer circumference of the ellipse into four areas of the device control screen 502, up, down, left, and right, and arrange the device icons 501 such that the number of device icons 501 in each area is equal and arranged at equal intervals. In addition, the device icon 501 arranged at the closest position on the floor plan 500 may be arranged at the determined arrangement position.
此外,在上述说明中,设为将设备图标501排列成椭圆形,但本实施方式不限定于此,也可以将设备图标501排列成圆形。在该情况下,也使用与将设备图标501排列成椭圆形的情况同样的方法来决定设备图标501的配置位置即可。另外,作为使设备图标501退避到设备控制画面502的显示区域外时的设备图标501的配置形状,也可以采用三角形、四边形、五边形等多边形。In addition, in the above description, the device icons 501 are arranged in an oval shape, but this embodiment is not limited thereto, and the device icons 501 may be arranged in a circular shape. Also in this case, the arrangement position of the device icons 501 may be determined by the same method as in the case of arranging the device icons 501 in an oval shape. In addition, as the arrangement shape of the device icons 501 when the device icons 501 are retracted out of the display area of the device control screen 502 , a polygon such as a triangle, a quadrangle, or a pentagon may be used.
第2种方法是如图13所示将设备图标501以1列配置在设备控制画面502和布局图500的显示区域外且显示器101的显示区域内的方法。当触摸面板控制单元102检测到由用户轻敲了某设备图标501时,显示控制单元103将全部设备图标501以一纵列配置在布局图500的显示区域的左侧。也即是,显示控制单元103使全部设备图标501退避到布局图500的显示区域外且显示器101的显示区域内的空白区域。The second method is a method of arranging device icons 501 in one column outside the display area of the device control screen 502 and floor plan 500 and within the display area of the display 101 as shown in FIG. 13 . When touch panel control section 102 detects that a certain device icon 501 is tapped by the user, display control section 103 arranges all device icons 501 in a single column on the left side of the display area of floor plan 500 . That is, the display control unit 103 retracts all the device icons 501 to a blank area outside the display area of the floor plan 500 and within the display area of the display 101 .
此外,在图13中,设备图标501配置在了布局图502的左侧,但本实施方式不限定于此,也可以以一纵列配置在布局图502的右侧,还可以以一横排配置在布局图500的上侧或下侧。In addition, in FIG. 13 , the device icons 501 are arranged on the left side of the floor plan 502 , but this embodiment is not limited thereto, and may also be arranged in a vertical row on the right side of the floor plan 502 , or in a horizontal row. Arranged on the upper side or the lower side of the floor plan 500 .
另外,在无法将全部设备图标501配置在布局图500左侧的情况下,显示控制单元103进行如下控制即可:当向上方或下方对以一纵列配置在左侧的设备图标501进行划动操作时,根据该划动操作使设备图标501向上方或下方滚动,使非显示的设备图标501显示在显示器101内。In addition, when all the device icons 501 cannot be arranged on the left side of the floor plan 500, the display control section 103 may perform the following control: when the device icons 501 arranged in a column on the left side are swiped upward or downward, During the flick operation, the device icon 501 is scrolled upward or downward according to the flick operation, and the non-displayed device icon 501 is displayed on the display 101 .
由此,非显示的设备图标501被显示在显示器101内,用户能够选择该设备图标501。此外,在以一横排配置设备图标501的情况下无法显示全部设备图标501时,显示控制单元103进行如下控制即可:当向左方或右方对以一横排配置的设备图标501进行划动操作时,根据该划动操作使设备图标501向左方或右方滚动,使非显示的设备图标501显示在显示器101内。As a result, the non-displayed device icon 501 is displayed on the display 101 , and the user can select the device icon 501 . In addition, when all the device icons 501 cannot be displayed when the device icons 501 are arranged in a row, the display control unit 103 only needs to perform the following control: when the device icons 501 arranged in a row are moved to the left or right When the swipe operation is performed, the device icon 501 is scrolled leftward or rightward according to the swipe operation, and the non-displayed device icon 501 is displayed on the display 101 .
此外,在设备控制画面502的显示状态下,显示控制单元103可以将用户选择的设备图标501以与没被选择的设备图标501不同的显示形式来进行显示。由此,用户能够容易识别所选择的设备图标501。In addition, in the display state of the device control screen 502 , the display control unit 103 may display the device icon 501 selected by the user in a different display form from the device icon 501 not selected. Thus, the user can easily recognize the selected device icon 501 .
例如,如图11所示,显示控制单元103可以将所选择的设备图标801以与没被选择的其他设备图标501不同的颜色来显示。具体而言,显示控制单元103将所选择的设备图标501的背景部分的颜色以与没被选择的设备图标501的背景部分的颜色不同的颜色来显示即可。但是,这只不过是一个例子,显示控制单元103既可以使所选择的设备图标501的亮度比没被选择的设备图标501的亮度亮,也可以使所选择的设备图标501的浓度比没被选择的设备图标501的浓度浓,还可以使所选择的设备图标501以一定的周期进行闪烁。For example, as shown in FIG. 11 , the display control unit 103 may display the selected device icon 801 in a different color from the other device icons 501 not selected. Specifically, the display control section 103 may display the background color of the selected device icon 501 in a color different from the background color of the unselected device icon 501 . However, this is just an example, and the display control unit 103 may make the brightness of the selected device icon 501 brighter than that of the non-selected device icon 501, or make the selected device icon 501 darker than the non-selected device icon. The density of the selected device icon 501 is high, and the selected device icon 501 may be blinked at a fixed cycle.
另外,在设备控制画面502的显示状态下,用户选择的设备图标501可以与没被选择的设备图标501区别而配置。由此,用户能够容易识别所选择的设备图标501。In addition, in the display state of the device control screen 502 , the device icon 501 selected by the user may be arranged differently from the device icon 501 not selected. Thus, the user can easily recognize the selected device icon 501 .
例如,如图12所示,显示控制单元103可以将所选择的设备图标901配置在椭圆外周上的最上端的位置。另外,显示控制单元103例如也可以将所选择的设备图标501配置在椭圆外周上的特定的位置(例如,最下端、最右端或最左端的位置)。无论如何,显示控制单元103只要将用户选择的设备图标501配置在用户易于视觉识别的特定的位置即可。For example, as shown in FIG. 12 , the display control unit 103 may arrange the selected device icon 901 at the uppermost position on the outer circumference of the ellipse. In addition, the display control section 103 may arrange the selected device icon 501 at a specific position on the outer periphery of the ellipse (for example, the bottommost, rightmost, or leftmost position). In any case, the display control section 103 only needs to arrange the device icon 501 selected by the user at a specific position where the user can easily recognize it visually.
另外,例如,如图14所示,显示控制单元103也可以使设备图标501的排列滚动,以使所选择的设备图标1101配置在显示器101的显示区域内。在图14的例子中,滚动设备图标501,以使所选择的设备图标1101配置在以一纵列显示于布局图500左侧的图标列的中心。由此,用户能够容易识别所选择的设备图标501。另外,在图14中,设备图标1101配置在图标列的中心,但只要是显眼的位置,则也可以是这之外的位置,例如可以配置在图标列的最上或图标列的最下。Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 14 , display control section 103 may scroll the arrangement of device icons 501 so that the selected device icon 1101 is arranged in the display area of display 101 . In the example of FIG. 14 , the device icon 501 is scrolled so that the selected device icon 1101 is arranged at the center of the icon column displayed in a column on the left side of the floor plan 500 . Thus, the user can easily recognize the selected device icon 501 . In addition, in FIG. 14 , the device icon 1101 is arranged at the center of the icon row, but it may be placed at a position other than this as long as it is conspicuous. For example, it may be arranged at the top or bottom of the icon row.
此外,作为使设备图标501退避到布局图500的显示区域外时的设备图标501的配置顺序,例如可以采用如下顺序:越是布局图500上的配置位置接近用户选择的设备图标501的设备200,就越配置在接近所选择的设备图标501的位置。或者,也可以采用如下顺序:越是与用户选择的设备200同时使用的可能性高的设备200的设备图标501,就越配置在接近用户选择的设备200的设备图标501的位置。例如,由于用户同时使用电视机和蓝光刻录机的可能性高,因此当由用户选择了电视机的设备图标501时,在其旁边显示蓝光刻录机的设备图标501即可。为了实现该配置,将表示同时使用的可能性高的设备200的组合的表预先存储在存储单元104中,按照该表来决定设备图标501的配置即可。In addition, as the arrangement order of the device icons 501 when the device icons 501 are retracted out of the display area of the floor plan 500 , for example, the following order may be adopted: the closer the arrangement position on the floor plan 500 is to the device 200 of the device icon 501 selected by the user. , the closer to the selected device icon 501 is placed. Alternatively, the device icon 501 of the device 200 that is more likely to be used simultaneously with the device 200 selected by the user may be arranged in a position closer to the device icon 501 of the device 200 selected by the user. For example, since the user is likely to use a TV and a Blu-ray recorder at the same time, when the user selects the device icon 501 for the TV, the device icon 501 for the Blu-ray recorder may be displayed next to it. In order to realize this arrangement, a table indicating combinations of devices 200 that are likely to be used at the same time is stored in storage section 104 in advance, and the arrangement of device icons 501 is determined according to the table.
另外,在显示设备控制画面502时的上述任一种设备图标501的配置方法中,显示控制单元103也可以按照特定的条件对设备图标501进行分组配置。In addition, in any of the above methods for arranging the device icons 501 when the device control screen 502 is displayed, the display control unit 103 may also arrange the device icons 501 in groups according to specific conditions.
例如,在图15中,根据配置设备200的位置对设备图标501进行分组。配置于起居室的设备200分组为设备图标1201,配置于化妆间的设备200分组为设备图标1202,配置于卧室的设备200分组为设备图标1203。而且,对各组设定显示顺序,按照该显示顺序将分组后的设备图标501以一纵列配置在布局图500的左侧。作为组的显示顺序,例如采用如下顺序即可:越是位于与配置有用户所选择的设备200的房间接近的房间的组,就越接近配置有用户所选择的设备200的房间的组。For example, in FIG. 15 , the device icons 501 are grouped according to the location where the device 200 is configured. Devices 200 placed in the living room are grouped into a device icon 1201 , devices 200 placed in a dressing room are grouped into a device icon 1202 , and devices 200 placed in a bedroom are grouped into a device icon 1203 . Then, a display order is set for each group, and the grouped device icons 501 are arranged in a single column on the left side of the floor plan 500 according to the display order. The display order of the groups may be, for example, an order in which a group located in a room closer to a room in which the device 200 selected by the user is placed is closer to a room in which the device 200 selected by the user is placed.
另外,显示控制单元103也可以按设备200的种类对设备图标501进行分组配置。例如,在图16中,将电视机的两个设备图标501分组为设备图标2301而配置在布局图500的左侧,将空调机的两个设备图标501分组为空调机的设备图标2302而配置在布局图500的左侧。如此,显示控制单元103也可以将种类相同的设备200的设备图标501连续地配置,按种类对设备图标501进行分组。In addition, the display control unit 103 may arrange the device icons 501 in groups according to the types of the devices 200 . For example, in FIG. 16 , two device icons 501 of a TV are grouped into a device icon 2301 and placed on the left side of the floor plan 500, and two device icons 501 of an air conditioner are grouped into a device icon 2302 of an air conditioner. On the left side of the floor plan 500 . In this way, the display control section 103 may arrange the device icons 501 of the devices 200 of the same type consecutively, and group the device icons 501 by type.
此外,显示控制单元103根据登记在设备列表3100(参照图35)的设备类型3102中的内容来判别设备200的种类即可。In addition, display control section 103 may discriminate the type of device 200 based on the contents of device type 3102 registered in device list 3100 (see FIG. 35 ).
在上述的说明中,种类相同的设备200的设备图标501被分到1组,但本实施方式不限定于此。例如,显示控制单元103也可以以与种类相应的类目(category:类别)对设备200进行分类,按类目对设备图标501进行分组而配置在布局图500的左侧。In the above description, the device icons 501 of the devices 200 of the same type are grouped into one group, but this embodiment is not limited thereto. For example, the display control section 103 may classify the devices 200 in categories corresponding to the types (category), group the device icons 501 by category and arrange them on the left side of the floor plan 500 .
例如,如图16的左下所示,冰箱、微波炉以及洗碗干燥机这3个设备图标501被分类到厨房设备的类目中,这3个设备图标被分组为厨房设备的设备图标2303而配置在布局图500的左侧。For example, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 16 , three device icons 501 of a refrigerator, a microwave oven, and a dish washer-dryer are classified into the category of kitchen devices, and these three device icons are grouped and arranged as a device icon 2303 of kitchen devices. On the left side of the floor plan 500 .
此外,作为其他的类目,有娱乐设备、空调设备。娱乐设备的类目中包含电视机、刻录机、唱机(播放机)以及家庭影院等设备200。另外,空调设备的类目中包含空调机、空气净化器、加湿器、除湿器以及住宅空气循环设备等设备200。In addition, as other categories, there are entertainment equipment and air-conditioning equipment. The category of entertainment equipment includes equipment 200 such as televisions, recorders, record players (players), and home theaters. In addition, the category of air conditioners includes equipment 200 such as air conditioners, air cleaners, humidifiers, dehumidifiers, and residential air circulation equipment.
例如,电视机、刻录机、空调机以及空气净化器的设备图标501配置在布局图500上,当由用户选择了电视机的设备图标501时,分类到娱乐设备的类目中的电视机和刻录机的设备图标501被分成1组而配置在布局图500的左侧,分类到空调设备的类目中的空调机和空气净化器的设备图标501被分成1组而配置在布局图500的左侧。For example, the equipment icons 501 of televisions, recorders, air conditioners, and air purifiers are arranged on the layout diagram 500. When the equipment icon 501 of the television is selected by the user, the televisions and televisions classified into the category of entertainment equipment Device icons 501 for recorders are divided into one group and arranged on the left side of the floor plan 500 , and device icons 501 for air conditioners and air cleaners classified into the category of air conditioners are arranged in one group on the left side of the floor plan 500 . left side.
此外,显示控制单元103根据登记在设备列表3100的设备类型3102中的内容来判断设备200的类目即可。在该情况下,将用于根据登记在设备类型3102中的内容对设备200的类目进行分类的分类表预先存储在存储单元104中,显示控制单元103按照该分类表来判断设备200的类目即可。In addition, the display control section 103 may determine the category of the device 200 based on the content of the device type 3102 registered in the device list 3100 . In this case, a classification table for classifying the category of the device 200 according to the contents registered in the device type 3102 is stored in the storage unit 104 in advance, and the display control unit 103 judges the class of the device 200 according to the classification table. can be used.
此外,作为与设备200的种类相应的分类方式,除了上述以外还可以采用各种方式,例如,如图24所示,也可以采用分类成生活家电、空调、装备(设备)的方式。In addition, as a classification method according to the type of the device 200, various methods other than the above can be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG.
此外,如上所述基于特定的条件对设备图标501进行分组配置的方法,也可以如图11所示那样适用使设备图标501退避成包围设备控制画面502的显示方式。In addition, the method of arranging the device icons 501 in groups based on specific conditions as described above may be applied to a display method in which the device icons 501 are retracted to surround the device control screen 502 as shown in FIG. 11 .
图17(A)、(B)是表示显示设备控制画面502的状态下的布局图500的显示方法的图。如图17(A)、(B)所示,布局图500的显示方法有2种。第1种是如图17(A)所示将整个布局图500设为由半透明的灰色层覆盖的状态(图中由网点表示)的显示方法。17(A) and (B) are diagrams showing a display method of the floor plan 500 in a state where the device control screen 502 is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 17(A) and (B), there are two methods of displaying the floor plan 500 . The first is a display method in which the entire floor plan 500 is covered with a translucent gray layer (indicated by dots in the figure) as shown in FIG. 17(A).
在该情况下,设备控制画面502的背后变为灰色而强调了设备控制画面502,因此用户能够更明确地识别设备控制画面502。另外,灰色层是半透明的,布局图500并不完全是非显示状态,因此能够实现具有临场感的设备控制画面502的操作。灰色层是具有灰色等亮度低的颜色并设定了预定的透明度的图像数据。In this case, the back of the device control screen 502 is grayed out to emphasize the device control screen 502 , so that the user can recognize the device control screen 502 more clearly. In addition, the gray layer is translucent, and the floor plan 500 is not completely in a non-display state, so that the operation of the device control screen 502 with a sense of presence can be realized. The gray layer is image data having a low-brightness color such as gray and having a predetermined transparency set.
此外,显示控制单元103按设备控制画面502为最上层、布局图500为最下层的顺序,决定设备控制画面502、灰色层以及布局图500的显示顺序并将这些图像合成即可。由此,能够防止显示为设备控制画面502被灰色层覆盖。In addition, the display control section 103 may determine the display order of the device control screen 502 , the gray layer, and the floor plan 500 in the order that the device control screen 502 is the top layer and the floor plan 500 is the bottom layer, and synthesize these images. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the device control screen 502 from being displayed as being covered with a gray layer.
第2种是如图17(B)所示将布局图500中的非控制对象区域1302设为由半透明的灰色层覆盖的状态(图中的网点区域),并将控制对象区域1301设为没有由半透明的灰色层覆盖的状态的显示方法。由此,用户能够一边识别控制对象区域1301一边操作设备控制画面502,能够实现具有临场感的操作。在此,所谓控制对象区域1301是配置有指用户选择的设备图标501所表示的设备200的房间的布局图500上的区域,所谓非控制对象区域1302是指该房间以外的布局图500上的区域。例如,在控制对象设备是设置于起居室的空调机的情况下,控制对象区域1301成为布局图500的起居室的区域,非控制对象区域1302成为布局图500的起居室以外的区域。The second is to set the non-control object area 1302 in the floor plan 500 as a state covered by a translucent gray layer (dot area in the figure) as shown in Figure 17 (B), and set the control object area 1301 to There is no display method for states covered by a semi-transparent gray layer. Thereby, the user can operate the device control screen 502 while recognizing the control target area 1301 , and realize operations with a sense of presence. Here, the control target area 1301 is the area on the floor plan 500 of the room where the device 200 indicated by the device icon 501 selected by the user is arranged, and the non-control target area 1302 is the area on the floor plan 500 other than the room. area. For example, when the control target device is an air conditioner installed in the living room, the control target area 1301 is the area of the living room in the floor plan 500 , and the non-control target area 1302 is an area other than the living room in the floor plan 500 .
例如,设为用户选择了图35所示的设备ID3101为A的空调机的设备图标501。在该情况下,显示控制单元103根据登记在空调机的配置3104中的内容来确定空调机的位置(X10,Y100,Z1)。接着,显示控制单元103参照房间信息2900来决定所确定的位置(X10,Y100,Z1)位于哪个房间。在此,位置(X10,Y100,Z1)为位于由顶点ID为F、G、H、I、L、O、N的顶点包围的区域内。于是,显示控制单元103判定为空调机配置于房间ID为A的起居室。然后,显示控制单元103生成将起居室的区域设为控制对象区域1301、并将除此以外的布局图500上的区域设为非控制对象区域1302的灰色层。For example, it is assumed that the user selects the device icon 501 of the air conditioner whose device ID 3101 is A shown in FIG. 35 . In this case, the display control unit 103 determines the position (X10, Y100, Z1) of the air conditioner based on the content registered in the configuration 3104 of the air conditioner. Next, display control section 103 refers to room information 2900 to determine in which room the specified position (X10, Y100, Z1) is located. Here, the position (X10, Y100, Z1) is located in a region surrounded by vertices whose vertex IDs are F, G, H, I, L, O, and N. Then, display control section 103 determines that the air conditioner is installed in the living room with room ID A. FIG. Then, display control section 103 generates a gray layer in which the area of the living room is the control target area 1301 and the other areas on the floor plan 500 are the non-control target area 1302 .
接着,使用图18对基本画面的显示状态与设备控制画面502的显示状态的转换进行说明。在图18的左图所示的基本画面中,用户选择要进行控制的设备200(在此为空调机)的设备图标501,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该选择。于是,如图18的右图所示,显示控制单元103将与所选择的设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502重叠显示在布局图500上。由此,基本画面的显示状态转换到设备控制画面502的显示状态。Next, transition between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the device control screen 502 will be described using FIG. 18 . On the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 18 , the user selects a device icon 501 of a device 200 (here, an air conditioner) to be controlled, and touch panel control section 102 detects the selection. Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 18 , the display control section 103 superimposes and displays the device control screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501 on the floor plan 500 . Thereby, the display state of the basic screen transitions to the display state of the device control screen 502 .
另一方面,如图18的右图所示,在设备控制画面502的显示状态下,用户轻敲与设备控制画面502对应的空调机的设备图标501或设备控制画面502的显示区域外(例如,位于设备控制画面502的显示区域外的布局图500的显示区域),触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲。于是,如图18的左图所示,显示控制单元103消除设备控制画面502,从设备控制画面502的显示状态返回到基本画面的显示状态。此时,显示控制单元103使设备图标501返回到布局图500上的原来的配置位置。On the other hand, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 18 , in the display state of the device control screen 502, the user taps the device icon 501 of the air conditioner corresponding to the device control screen 502 or outside the display area of the device control screen 502 (for example, , the display area of the floor plan 500 located outside the display area of the device control screen 502 ), the touch panel control unit 102 detects the tap. Then, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 18 , the display control unit 103 erases the device control screen 502 and returns from the display state of the device control screen 502 to the display state of the basic screen. At this time, display control section 103 returns device icon 501 to the original arrangement position on floor plan 500 .
以上所述的显示状况在由基本画面显示的布局图500是某个楼层的情况下也是同样的。例如,如图19的左图所示,在基本画面显示第2楼层的布局图602的情况下,用户轻敲要控制的设备200(在此为空调机)的设备图标501,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲。于是,如图19的右图所示,显示控制单元103将与所选择的设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502重叠显示在第2楼层的布局图602上。The display status described above is also the same when the floor plan 500 displayed on the basic screen is a certain floor. For example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 19 , when the floor plan 602 of the second floor is displayed on the basic screen, the user taps the device icon 501 of the device 200 (here, an air conditioner) to be controlled, and the touch panel control unit 102 detects the tap. Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 19 , the display control section 103 superimposes and displays the device control screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501 on the floor plan 602 of the second floor.
另一方面,如图19的右图所示,在空调机的设备控制画面502的显示状态下,用户轻敲与所显示的设备控制画面502对应的空调机的设备图标501、或设备控制画面502的显示区域外(例如,位于设备控制画面502的显示区域外的布局图500的显示区域),触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲。于是,如图19的左图所示,显示控制单元103消除设备控制画面502,从设备控制画面502的显示状态返回到显示第2楼层的布局图602的基本画面的显示状态。On the other hand, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 19 , in the display state of the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner, the user taps the device icon 501 of the air conditioner corresponding to the displayed device control screen 502 or the device control screen Outside the display area of 502 (eg, the display area of floor plan 500 located outside the display area of device control screen 502 ), touch panel control unit 102 detects the tap. Then, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 19 , the display control section 103 clears the device control screen 502 and returns from the display state of the device control screen 502 to the display state of the basic screen displaying the floor plan 602 of the second floor.
接着,使用图20对从某设备控制画面502的显示状态向另一设备控制画面502的显示状态切换的切换方法进行说明。如图20的左图所示,在空调机的设备控制画面502的显示状态下,用户轻敲与空调机的设备图标501不同的设备图标501即洗衣机的设备图标501,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲。于是,如图20的右图所示,显示控制单元103消除所显示的设备控制画面502,将与洗衣机的设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502重叠显示在布局图500上。反过来也同样。Next, a method of switching from the display state of a certain device control screen 502 to the display state of another device control screen 502 will be described using FIG. 20 . As shown in the left diagram of FIG. 20, in the display state of the equipment control screen 502 of the air conditioner, the user taps the equipment icon 501 different from the equipment icon 501 of the air conditioner, that is, the equipment icon 501 of the washing machine, and the touch panel control unit 102 detects It's time to tap. Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 20 , the display control unit 103 erases the displayed device control screen 502 and superimposes and displays the device control screen 502 corresponding to the device icon 501 of the washing machine on the floor plan 500 . And vice versa.
如此,当用户连续选择不同的设备图标501时,设备控制画面502被一个一个地切换,因此用户能够连续进行不同设备200的控制。即,在某设备控制画面502显示期间中要显示另外的设备控制画面502时,用户不需要输入消除某设备控制画面502的操作,能够以一次触碰(one touch)来切换设备控制画面502。In this way, when the user continuously selects different device icons 501 , the device control screens 502 are switched one by one, so that the user can continuously control different devices 200 . That is, when another device control screen 502 is displayed while a certain device control screen 502 is being displayed, the user does not need to input an operation to delete a certain device control screen 502, and can switch the device control screen 502 with one touch.
此外,在设备控制画面502的显示状态下,用户轻敲了与显示中的设备控制画面502对应的设备图标501时,显示控制单元103可以停留在仅消除设备控制画面502而不返回到基本画面。该画面转换表示在图21中。Furthermore, in the display state of the device control screen 502, when the user taps the device icon 501 corresponding to the device control screen 502 being displayed, the display control unit 103 may stay at only eliminating the device control screen 502 without returning to the basic screen . This screen transition is shown in FIG. 21 .
在图21的左图中,由用户选择了空调机的设备图标501,因此显示空调机的设备控制画面502,并且全部设备图标501以一纵列显示在布局图500的左侧。在该状态下,用户轻敲空调机的设备图标501,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲。于是,如图21的右图所示,显示控制单元103在维持设备图标501的一纵列显示的状态下仅消除空调机的设备控制画面502。在该情况下,由于设备图标501在布局图500上没有移动,因此能够响应用户要仅显示布局图500时的要求。In the left diagram of FIG. 21 , the user selects an air conditioner device icon 501 , so an air conditioner device control screen 502 is displayed, and all device icons 501 are displayed in a column on the left side of the floor plan 500 . In this state, the user taps the device icon 501 of the air conditioner, and the touch panel control section 102 detects the tap. Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 21 , the display control section 103 erases only the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner while maintaining the display of device icons 501 in one column. In this case, since the device icon 501 does not move on the floor plan 500 , it is possible to respond to a user's request for displaying only the floor plan 500 .
另一方面,在设备控制画面502的非显示状态下,用户选择任意的设备图标501,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该选择。于是,显示控制单元103显示与所选择的设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502。例如,在图21的右图中,用户从以一纵列配置在布局图500左侧的设备图标501中选择空调机的设备图标501时,如图21的左图所示,显示空调机的设备控制画面502。On the other hand, when the user selects an arbitrary device icon 501 while the device control screen 502 is not displayed, the touch panel control section 102 detects the selection. Then, the display control unit 103 displays the device control screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501 . For example, in the right diagram of FIG. 21, when the user selects the equipment icon 501 of the air conditioner from the equipment icons 501 arranged in a column on the left side of the floor plan 500, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. Device control screen 502 .
接着,使用图22对动态进行从基本画面的显示状态向设备控制画面502的显示状态的转换的情况进行说明。如图22的左上图所示,在基本画面中用户选择例如空调机的设备图标501。于是,显示控制单元103按图22的右上图→右下图→左下图的顺序使空调机的设备控制画面502的透明度逐渐降低,最终使透明度变为0。与此同时,显示控制单元103使全部设备图标501移动到包围设备控制画面502的椭圆的外周上。Next, a case where the transition from the display state of the basic screen to the display state of the device control screen 502 is dynamically performed will be described using FIG. 22 . As shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 22 , the user selects an equipment icon 501 such as an air conditioner on the basic screen. Then, the display control section 103 gradually reduces the transparency of the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner in the order of the upper right diagram → the lower right diagram → the lower left diagram of FIG. 22 , and finally makes the transparency 0. At the same time, the display control section 103 moves all the device icons 501 to the outer periphery of the ellipse surrounding the device control screen 502 .
接着,使用图23对动态进行从基本画面的显示状态向设备控制画面502的显示状态的转换的情况进行说明。如图23的左上图所示,在基本画面中,用户选择例如空调机的设备200的设备图标501。于是,显示控制单元103按图23的右上图→右下图→左下图的顺序使空调机的设备控制画面502的透明度逐渐降低,最终使透明度变为0。同时,显示控制单元103使全部设备图标移动到布局图500的左侧。Next, a case where the transition from the display state of the basic screen to the display state of the device control screen 502 is dynamically performed will be described using FIG. 23 . As shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 23 , the user selects a device icon 501 of a device 200 such as an air conditioner on the basic screen. Then, the display control section 103 gradually reduces the transparency of the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner in the order of the upper right diagram → the lower right diagram → the lower left diagram of FIG. 23 , and finally makes the transparency 0. At the same time, the display control unit 103 moves all the device icons to the left side of the floor plan 500 .
通过如此动态进行画面转换,能够通过从选择设备图标501到显示设备控制画面502的画面表现来提高用户对操作设备控制画面502的兴趣。By dynamically performing screen transitions in this way, the user's interest in operating the device control screen 502 can be increased through the screen representation from the selection of the device icon 501 to the display of the device control screen 502 .
图24是表示设备一览显示画面的构成的图。设备一览显示画面通过在图5所示的基本画面中用户轻敲设备一览显示变更按钮503而显示。FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list display screen. The device list display screen is displayed when the user taps the device list display change button 503 on the basic screen shown in FIG. 5 .
如图24所示,设备一览显示画面具备设备一览2000、设备详细图标2001以及基本画面显示按钮2003。As shown in FIG. 24 , the device list display screen includes a device list 2000 , a device detail icon 2001 , and a basic screen display button 2003 .
用户轻敲设备详细图标2001,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲时,显示控制单元103使设备控制画面502重叠显示在设备一览2000上。由此,用户能够与轻敲设备图标501的情况同样地使设备控制画面502显示而对设备200进行操作。When the user taps the device detailed icon 2001 and touch panel control section 102 detects the tap, display control section 103 superimposes and displays device control screen 502 on device list 2000 . Thereby, the user can display the device control screen 502 and operate the device 200 similarly to the case of tapping the device icon 501 .
设备详细图标2001按设备200来准备。设备详细图标2001除了表示设备200的图像之外还表现设备200的开启、关闭状态和/或工作状态,这一点与设备图标501不同。例如,在图24的左上所显示的冰箱的设备详细图标2001中,除了冰箱的图像以外,还显示有表示冰箱当前为开启的“ON”和表示当前为制冷状态的“运转/冰”的信息。The device detailed icon 2001 is prepared for each device 200 . The device detailed icon 2001 is different from the device icon 501 in that it represents the on/off state and/or operating state of the device 200 in addition to the image of the device 200 . For example, in the device detailed icon 2001 of the refrigerator displayed on the upper left of FIG. 24 , in addition to the image of the refrigerator, information of "ON" indicating that the refrigerator is currently turned on and "operating/ice" indicating that the refrigerator is currently in a cooling state is displayed. .
设备一览2000基于事先确定的分类基准对设备详细图标2001进行分类显示。作为事先确定的分类基准,例如采用设备200的种类、配置设备200的房间、或设备200的使用状况等。在图24中,作为分类基准,例示了使用设备200的种类的情况,设备详细图标2001分类成生活家电、空调和装备这3个类目。In the device list 2000, device detailed icons 2001 are classified and displayed based on predetermined classification criteria. As a predetermined classification criterion, for example, the type of the device 200 , the room in which the device 200 is placed, or the state of use of the device 200 is employed. In FIG. 24 , the case where the type of device 200 is used is illustrated as a classification basis, and the device detailed icon 2001 is classified into three categories of household appliances, air conditioners, and equipment.
在图24的例子中,冰箱、电动牙刷、洗衣机以及电视机分类到生活家电的类目中,空调机和空气净化器分类到空调的类目中,马桶、照明设备以及浴缸分类到装备的类目中。该情况下,将用于根据登记在设备列表3100(参照图35)的设备类型3102中的内容来决定各设备200分类到生活家电、空调和装备的哪个类目中的分类表预先存储在存储单元104中。然后,显示控制单元103按照该分类表将各设备分类到各类目中即可。In the example in Figure 24, refrigerators, electric toothbrushes, washing machines, and televisions are classified into the category of home appliances, air conditioners and air purifiers are classified into the category of air conditioners, and toilets, lighting equipment, and bathtubs are classified into the category of equipment. In the eyes. In this case, a classification table for determining which category of household appliances, air conditioners, and equipment each device 200 is classified into based on the contents registered in the device type 3102 of the device list 3100 (see FIG. 35 ) is stored in the memory. Unit 104. Then, the display control unit 103 only needs to classify each device into each category according to the classification table.
返回到图24,显示在设备一览2000的右下的记为“向布局UI”的按钮是基本画面显示按钮2003。基本画面显示按钮2003是用于从设备一览显示画面向基本画面切换画面的按钮。Returning to FIG. 24 , the button labeled “To Layout UI” displayed on the lower right of the device list 2000 is the basic screen display button 2003 . The basic screen display button 2003 is a button for switching the screen from the device list display screen to the basic screen.
在上述说明中,设为能够切换基本画面和设备一览显示画面,但也能够取代图5所示的基本画面而将设备一览显示画面作为基本画面来利用。该情况下,基本画面显示按钮2003也可以省略。In the above description, it was assumed that the basic screen and the device list display screen can be switched, but instead of the basic screen shown in FIG. 5 , the device list display screen can also be used as the basic screen. In this case, the basic screen display button 2003 may also be omitted.
此外,在上述说明中,使一个设备详细图标2001与一个设备200对应,但本实施方式不限定于此,也可以使一个设备详细图标2001与多个设备200对应,使多个设备200共用一个设备详细图标2001。例如,在起居室有两个照明设备的情况下,也可以将这两个照明设备由一个设备详细图标2001来表示。In addition, in the above description, one device detailed icon 2001 is associated with one device 200, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and one device detailed icon 2001 may be associated with a plurality of devices 200, and a plurality of devices 200 may share one Equipment detailed icons 2001. For example, when there are two lighting devices in the living room, these two lighting devices may be represented by one detailed device icon 2001 .
该情况下,当由用户轻敲表示这两个照明设备的设备详细图标2001时,显示控制单元103使显示器101显示能够同时控制两个照明设备的设备控制画面502。在该情况下,可获得与由多个设备200共用一个设备图标501的情况相同的效果。此外,在使多个照明设备共用一个设备详细图标2001的情况下,设备详细图标2001显示两个照明设备各自的开启、关闭状态和/或工作状态即可。In this case, when the user taps the device detailed icon 2001 representing the two lighting devices, the display control section 103 causes the display 101 to display the device control screen 502 capable of simultaneously controlling the two lighting devices. In this case, the same effect as in the case where one device icon 501 is shared by a plurality of devices 200 can be obtained. In addition, when a plurality of lighting devices share one device detailed icon 2001 , the device detailed icon 2001 only needs to display the respective ON, OFF states, and/or operating states of the two lighting devices.
此外,可以在基本画面中取代设备图标501而使用设备详细图标2001,也可以在设备一览显示画面中取代设备详细图标2001而使用设备图标501。另外,选择了设备详细图标2001时所显示的设备控制画面502和选择了设备图标501时所显示的设备控制画面502可以相同,也可以不同。例如,由于设备详细图标2001中包含了比设备图标501多的信息,所以在选择了设备详细图标2001时所显示的设备控制画面502中,可以包含比选择了设备图标501时所显示的设备控制画面502更多的按钮和/或状态。In addition, the device detailed icon 2001 may be used instead of the device icon 501 on the basic screen, and the device icon 501 may be used instead of the device detailed icon 2001 on the device list display screen. In addition, the device control screen 502 displayed when the device detailed icon 2001 is selected may be the same as or different from the device control screen 502 displayed when the device icon 501 is selected. For example, since the detailed device icon 2001 contains more information than the device icon 501, the device control screen 502 displayed when the device detailed icon 2001 is selected may contain more information than the device control screen displayed when the device icon 501 is selected. Screen 502 for more buttons and/or states.
图25是表示基本画面与设备一览显示画面的画面转换的图。在图25的左图所示的基本画面中,由用户选择了设备一览显示变更按钮503时,显示器101的显示切换到图25的右图所示的设备一览显示画面。另一方面,在图25的右图所示的设备一览显示画面中,由用户选择了基本画面显示按钮2003时,显示器101的显示切换到图25的左图所示的基本画面。FIG. 25 is a diagram showing screen transitions between the basic screen and the device list display screen. On the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 25 , when the user selects the device list display change button 503 , the display on the display 101 switches to the device list display screen shown in the right diagram of FIG. 25 . On the other hand, when the user selects the basic screen display button 2003 on the device list display screen shown in the right diagram of FIG. 25 , the display on the display 101 switches to the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 25 .
具体而言,触摸面板控制单元102检测到基本画面显示按钮2003的轻敲时,显示控制单元103将显示器101的显示画面从设备一览显示画面切换到基本画面。另一方面,在基本画面的显示状态下,触摸面板控制单元102检测到设备一览显示变更按钮503的轻敲时,显示控制单元103将显示器101的显示画面从基本画面切换到设备一览显示画面。Specifically, when touch panel control section 102 detects that basic screen display button 2003 is tapped, display control section 103 switches the display screen of display 101 from the device list display screen to the basic screen. On the other hand, when touch panel control section 102 detects that device list display change button 503 is tapped while the basic screen is displayed, display control section 103 switches the display screen of display 101 from the basic screen to the device list display screen.
例如,在显示选择了设备一览显示画面的情况下,用户要操作位于眼前的电视机时,如果在家里仅有1台该电视机,则在设备一览显示画面中电视机的设备详细图标2001仅包含一个,因此用户不会误操作而能够直接选择电视机的设备详细图标2001,显示与电视机对应的设备控制画面502。For example, when the device list display screen is displayed and selected, when the user wants to operate a TV set in front of him, if there is only one TV set at home, the device detailed icon 2001 of the TV set on the device list display screen is only Since one is included, the user can directly select the device detailed icon 2001 of the TV without misoperation, and display the device control screen 502 corresponding to the TV.
另一方面,在选择了设备一览显示画面的情况下,能够进行关于各个设备200的操作或状态确认,但因为设备一览显示画面着眼于各个设备200,所以设备200与配置设备200的位置的关系不清楚。因此,例如,对于如空调机或照明设备这样在同一房屋内设置了多个的设备200,哪个房间的空调机或照明设备成为了控制对象不清楚,有可能导致误操作。On the other hand, when the device list display screen is selected, it is possible to perform operations and status confirmation on each device 200, but since the device list display screen focuses on each device 200, the relationship between the devices 200 and the positions where the devices 200 are arranged Not sure. Therefore, for example, for multiple devices 200 such as air conditioners and lighting devices installed in the same house, it may not be clear which room the air conditioner or lighting device is to be controlled, which may lead to erroneous operations.
因此,在本实施方式中,除了设备一览显示画面之外还设置基本画面,能够选择基本画面和设备一览显示画面。Therefore, in this embodiment, a basic screen is provided in addition to the device list display screen, and the basic screen and the device list display screen can be selected.
由此,在选择了基本画面的情况下,设备200与配置设备200的位置的关系变得明确。因此,例如,对于如空调机或照明设备这样在同一房屋设置了多个的同类设备200,容易判别哪个房间的空调机或照明设备成为了控制对象,能够防止对设置在与所希望的房间不同的房间的空调机或照明设备进行误操作。Thus, when the basic screen is selected, the relationship between the device 200 and the position where the device 200 is placed becomes clear. Therefore, for example, for a plurality of similar devices 200 installed in the same house such as air conditioners or lighting equipment, it is easy to determine which room the air conditioner or lighting equipment is to be controlled, and it is possible to prevent the control of the air conditioner or lighting equipment installed in a room different from the desired one. Misoperation of the air conditioner or lighting equipment in the room.
图26是表示设备一览显示画面的显示状态与设备控制画面502的显示状态的画面转换的图。在图26的左图所示的设备一览显示画面中,用户选择要控制的设备200(在此为空调机)的设备详细图标2001,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该选择。于是,如图26的右图所示,显示控制单元103将与所选择的设备详细图标2001对应的空调机的设备控制画面502重叠显示在设备一览显示画面上。由此,设备一览显示画面的显示状态转换到设备控制画面502的显示状态。FIG. 26 is a diagram showing screen transition between the display state of the device list display screen and the display state of the device control screen 502 . On the device list display screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 26 , the user selects a device detailed icon 2001 of a device 200 (here, an air conditioner) to be controlled, and touch panel control section 102 detects the selection. Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 26 , the display control section 103 superimposes and displays the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner corresponding to the selected device detailed icon 2001 on the device list display screen. As a result, the display state of the device list display screen transitions to the display state of the device control screen 502 .
此外,在图26的右图的例子中,显示控制单元103使用户选择的空调机以外的设备详细图标2001非显示,仅将空调机的设备详细图标2001显示在与设备控制画面502不同的位置。由此,用户能够明确地识别自己选择的设备详细图标2001。In addition, in the example of the right figure in FIG. 26 , the display control section 103 hides the detailed device icons 2001 other than the air conditioner selected by the user, and displays only the detailed device icon 2001 of the air conditioner at a position different from the device control screen 502 . . Thus, the user can clearly recognize the device detailed icon 2001 selected by the user.
另一方面,如图26的右图所示,在设备控制画面502的显示状态下,用户选择空调机的设备详细图标2001,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该选择。于是,如图26的左图所示,显示控制单元103消除设备控制画面502,从设备控制画面502的显示状态返回到设备一览显示画面的显示状态。On the other hand, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 26 , while the device control screen 502 is displayed, the user selects the device detailed icon 2001 of the air conditioner, and the touch panel control section 102 detects the selection. Then, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 26 , the display control section 103 erases the device control screen 502 and returns from the display state of the device control screen 502 to the display state of the device list display screen.
此外,在图26的右图所示的设备控制画面502的显示状态下,设备详细图标2001仅显示了一个,但与图13等同样也可以显示没被用户选择的其他设备详细图标2001。该情况下,多个设备详细图标2001可以如图13所示以一列显示在画面一端,也可以如图12所示以包围设备控制画面502的方式显示。In addition, in the display state of the device control screen 502 shown in the right diagram of FIG. 26 , only one device detailed icon 2001 is displayed, but other device detailed icons 2001 not selected by the user may be displayed similarly to FIG. 13 . In this case, the plurality of detailed device icons 2001 may be displayed in a row at one end of the screen as shown in FIG. 13 , or may be displayed so as to surround the device control screen 502 as shown in FIG. 12 .
根据该构成,用户能够在设备控制画面502的显示状态下连续地选择设备详细图标2001,使其他的设备控制画面502连续显示。由此,在某设备控制画面502显示期间中要显示另外的设备控制画面502时,用户不需要输入消除某设备控制画面502的操作,能够以一次触碰来切换设备控制画面502。According to this configuration, the user can continuously select the device detailed icon 2001 while the device control screen 502 is displayed, and display other device control screens 502 continuously. Thus, when another device control screen 502 is displayed while a certain device control screen 502 is being displayed, the user does not need to input an operation to delete a certain device control screen 502 , and can switch the device control screen 502 with one touch.
图27是表示在基本画面上存在多个表示同类设备200的设备图标501的情况下,基本画面的显示状态与设备控制画面502的显示状态之间的画面转换的图。如图27的左图所示,在基本画面上存在两个电视机的设备图标501。在此,将电视机A的设备图标501表示为设备图标2401,将电视机B的设备图标501表示为设备图标2402。此时,用户能够从布局图500上直观地选择要控制的电视机来进行操作。FIG. 27 is a diagram showing screen transitions between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the device control screen 502 when a plurality of device icons 501 representing similar devices 200 exist on the basic screen. As shown in the left diagram of FIG. 27 , there are two device icons 501 of televisions on the basic screen. Here, the device icon 501 of the TV A is shown as a device icon 2401 , and the device icon 501 of the TV B is shown as a device icon 2402 . At this time, the user can intuitively select the TV to be controlled from the layout diagram 500 for operation.
例如,在图27的右图中,示出了选择了电视机A的设备图标2401并显示了电视机A的设备控制画面2403的例子。如此,即使存在多个同类设备200的设备图标501,各设备图标501也配置在与实际的设置位置对应的布局图500上的位置。因此,用户能够从布局图500上的显示位置直观地选择要控制的设备200的设备图标501,能够防止错误地显示另外的设备200的设备控制画面502。For example, in the right diagram of FIG. 27 , an example in which the device icon 2401 of the TV A is selected and the device control screen 2403 of the TV A is displayed is shown. In this way, even if there are a plurality of device icons 501 of similar devices 200 , each device icon 501 is arranged at a position on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the actual installation position. Therefore, the user can intuitively select the device icon 501 of the device 200 to be controlled from the display position on the floor plan 500 , and can prevent the device control screen 502 of another device 200 from being erroneously displayed.
图28是表示在设备控制画面502的显示状态下,连续选择不同的设备图标501而连续切换设备控制画面502时的画面转换的图。在左上图中,处于空调机的设备控制画面2511的显示状态。在该状态下,选择了冰箱的设备图标2501时,如右上图所示,在显示器101上显示冰箱的设备控制画面2512。另外,在左上图中,选择了洗衣机的设备图标2502时,如右下图所示。显示洗衣机的设备控制画面2513。另外,在左上图中,选择了空气净化器的设备图标2503时,如左下图所示,显示空气净化器的设备控制画面2514。这些画面转换在右上图、右下图以及左下图也是同样的。FIG. 28 is a diagram showing screen transitions when different device icons 501 are successively selected and the device control screens 502 are continuously switched while the device control screen 502 is displayed. In the upper left figure, the device control screen 2511 of the air conditioner is displayed. In this state, when the refrigerator device icon 2501 is selected, a refrigerator device control screen 2512 is displayed on the display 101 as shown in the upper right figure. In addition, in the upper left diagram, when the device icon 2502 of the washing machine is selected, it will be as shown in the lower right diagram. The device control screen 2513 of the washing machine is displayed. In addition, when the device icon 2503 of the air cleaner is selected in the upper left figure, the device control screen 2514 of the air cleaner is displayed as shown in the lower left figure. These screen transitions are also the same for the upper right diagram, the lower right diagram, and the lower left diagram.
如此,用户在设备控制画面502的显示状态下选择设备图标501时,能够直接显示与该设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502。因此,在某设备控制画面502显示期间中要显示另外的设备控制画面502的情况下,即使不输入消除显示中的设备控制画面502的操作,也能够以一次触碰来显示另外的设备控制画面502。由此,用户能够顺畅地进行设备控制画面502的切换。In this way, when the user selects the device icon 501 while the device control screen 502 is being displayed, the device control screen 502 corresponding to the device icon 501 can be directly displayed. Therefore, when another device control screen 502 is displayed while a certain device control screen 502 is being displayed, another device control screen can be displayed with one touch without inputting an operation to erase the device control screen 502 being displayed. 502. Thus, the user can smoothly switch the device control screen 502 .
图29是表示在基本画面中显示在网络上无法检测到的通信不良的设备200的设备图标501的例子的图。设备管理单元105将尽管登记在了设备列表3100中但在网络上却无法检测到的设备200和/或对控制命令没有响应的设备200检测为通信不良的设备200。而且,显示控制单元103将通信不良的设备200的设备图标501以与能够通信的设备200的设备图标501不同的显示方式来显示。FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example in which a device icon 501 of a communication-deficient device 200 that cannot be detected on the network is displayed on the basic screen. The device management unit 105 detects a device 200 that cannot be detected on the network despite being registered in the device list 3100 and/or a device 200 that does not respond to a control command as a communication-poor device 200 . Furthermore, the display control section 103 displays the device icon 501 of the communication-poor device 200 in a different display form from the device icon 501 of the communication-capable device 200 .
例如,在图29中,通信不良的设备200的设备图标501表示为设备图标2601。而且,设备图标2601以半透明来显示。由此,用户能够快速识别到设备图标2601所表示的设备200当前发生了故障或由于发生通信故障而无法进行控制。For example, in FIG. 29 , the device icon 501 of the device 200 having poor communication is represented as the device icon 2601 . Also, the device icon 2601 is displayed semi-transparently. In this way, the user can quickly recognize that the device 200 represented by the device icon 2601 is currently faulty or cannot be controlled due to a communication fault.
此外,在图29中,将设备图标2601以半透明来显示,但本实施方式不限定于此,例如,也可以使颜色比其他设备图标501淡来加以显示,或使颜色比其他设备图标501暗来加以显示,或在设备图标2601上添加注释标记。In addition, in FIG. 29 , the device icon 2601 is displayed semi-transparently, but this embodiment is not limited thereto. For example, it may be displayed with a lighter color than the other device icon 501 , or may be displayed with a color that is lighter than the other device icon 501 . or add a comment mark to the device icon 2601.
图30是表示家庭信息2700的构成的图。家庭信息2700由服务器300按家来管理,家庭控制器100基于家庭信息2700控制基本画面、设备控制画面502等的显示。如图30所示,家庭信息2700具备布局图500、顶点信息2800、房间信息2900以及服务器管理的设备列表4700。FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the structure of family information 2700 . The family information 2700 is managed by the server 300 for each house, and the home controller 100 controls the display of the basic screen, the device control screen 502 and the like based on the family information 2700 . As shown in FIG. 30 , home information 2700 includes floor plan 500 , vertex information 2800 , room information 2900 , and device list 4700 managed by the server.
如图6所示,布局图500按家的楼层来准备,是以平面方式表示构成各楼层的一间以上房间的配置和形状的俯视图。在本实施方式中,布局图500由例如以位图形式表示俯视图的图像数据构成。As shown in FIG. 6 , the floor plan 500 is prepared for each floor of a house, and is a plan view showing the arrangement and shape of one or more rooms constituting each floor in a planar manner. In the present embodiment, the floor plan 500 is composed of image data representing a plan view in bitmap format, for example.
顶点信息2800是用于使布局图500与2维的坐标轴空间对应以使家庭控制器100能够解析布局图500的信息。房间信息2900是用于根据顶点信息2800决定房间的区域的信息。此外,顶点信息2800、房间信息2900以及服务器管理的设备列表4700的详细说明如下。The vertex information 2800 is information for associating the floor plan 500 with a two-dimensional coordinate axis space so that the home controller 100 can analyze the floor plan 500 . Room information 2900 is information for determining a room area based on vertex information 2800 . In addition, the details of the vertex information 2800, the room information 2900, and the device list 4700 managed by the server are as follows.
图31是表示顶点信息2800的构成的图。如图31所示,顶点信息2800具备顶点ID2801、顶点坐标2802。顶点ID2801是用于识别布局图500上的顶点的标识符。顶点坐标2802是由(X坐标,Y坐标,楼层序号)的形式表示的坐标,表示布局图500上显示的隔断线等的顶点的位置。例如,顶点ID为B的顶点的顶点坐标为(X20,Y0,Z1),所以表示在第1楼层(1层的楼层)X坐标为20、Y坐标为0的位置。FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the structure of vertex information 2800 . As shown in FIG. 31 , vertex information 2800 includes vertex ID 2801 and vertex coordinates 2802 . Vertex ID 2801 is an identifier for identifying a vertex on layout diagram 500 . Vertex coordinates 2802 are coordinates represented in the format of (X coordinate, Y coordinate, floor number), and represent the position of vertices such as partition lines displayed on floor plan 500 . For example, since the vertex coordinates of the vertex whose vertex ID is B are (X20, Y0, Z1), it indicates the position where the X coordinate is 20 and the Y coordinate is 0 on the first floor (floor 1).
图33是表示登记在顶点信息2800中的各顶点与布局图500的对应关系的图。但是,在图33中,布局图500的左上的顶点设为原点(X坐标和Y坐标都是0)。例如,对于顶点ID为A的顶点,因为顶点坐标为(X0,Y0,Z1),所以位于原点。另外,对于顶点ID为B的顶点,因为顶点坐标为(X20,Y0,Z1),所以位于浴室的右上的顶点。FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between vertices registered in vertex information 2800 and floor plan 500 . However, in FIG. 33 , the upper left vertex of the floor plan 500 is set as the origin (both the X coordinate and the Y coordinate are 0). For example, for a vertex whose vertex ID is A, since the vertex coordinates are (X0, Y0, Z1), it is located at the origin. In addition, since the vertex coordinates of the vertex ID B are (X20, Y0, Z1), the vertex is located at the upper right of the bathroom.
图32是表示房间信息2900的构成的图。如图32所示,房间信息2900具备房间ID2901、房间类型2902以及房间坐标2903。房间ID2901是用于识别布局图500上的房间的标识符。房间类型2902表示房间的种类。房间坐标2903由顶点ID2801的组来表现,决定布局图500上的房间的区域。例如,房间ID为C的房间是浴室,表示在布局图500上将顶点ID按A、B、G、F的顺序连接而成的区域。另外,房间信息2900不仅包含房间的信息,还包含楼梯的信息。将顶点ID按H、I、R、Q的顺序连接而成的房间ID为D的区域表示楼梯。FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the structure of room information 2900 . As shown in FIG. 32 , room information 2900 includes room ID 2901 , room type 2902 , and room coordinates 2903 . Room ID 2901 is an identifier for identifying a room on floor plan 500 . The room type 2902 indicates the type of room. The room coordinates 2903 are represented by groups of vertex IDs 2801 and determine the area of the room on the floor plan 500 . For example, a room whose room ID is C is a bathroom, and represents an area formed by connecting vertex IDs A, B, G, and F in order on the floor plan 500 . In addition, the room information 2900 includes not only room information but also staircase information. A region with a room ID of D, where the vertex IDs are connected in the order H, I, R, and Q, represents a staircase.
如此,因为具备顶点信息2800和房间信息2900,所以家庭控制器100通过在布局图500的图像数据上描绘由顶点信息2800表示的顶点,并将由房间坐标2903表示的顶点连接,能够确定布局图500中显示的房间的区域,能够根据房间类型2902来识别房间的类型。In this way, since the vertex information 2800 and the room information 2900 are provided, the home controller 100 can specify the floor plan 500 by drawing the vertices indicated by the vertex information 2800 on the image data of the floor plan 500 and connecting the vertices indicated by the room coordinates 2903. The area of the room displayed in , the type of room can be identified according to the room type 2902.
此外,系统管理者使布局图500显示于个人电脑的显示器,根据所显示的布局图来检测顶点,将所检测到的顶点的顶点ID及顶点坐标输入到个人电脑,由此生成顶点信息2800即可。另外,系统管理者根据显示于显示器的布局图来检测房间,并将所检测到的房间的房间ID、房间类型以及房间坐标输入到个人电脑,由此生成房间信息2900即可。或者,顶点信息2800和房间信息2900也可以通过取入作为布局图500的原始数据的CAD数据来生成。In addition, the system administrator displays the floor plan 500 on the monitor of the personal computer, detects vertices based on the displayed floor plan, and inputs the vertex IDs and vertex coordinates of the detected vertices to the personal computer to generate vertex information 2800, namely Can. In addition, the system manager may detect rooms from the floor plan displayed on the monitor, and input the room ID, room type, and room coordinates of the detected rooms into the personal computer to generate room information 2900 . Alternatively, vertex information 2800 and room information 2900 may be generated by importing CAD data as raw data of floor plan 500 .
图34是表示服务器300管理的设备列表4700的构成的图。如图34所示,设备列表4700具备设备ID4701、设备类型4702、型号4703、配置4704、能力信息4705以及控制命令发送目的地(目标)4706。FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list 4700 managed by the server 300 . As shown in FIG. 34 , device list 4700 includes device ID 4701 , device type 4702 , model 4703 , configuration 4704 , capability information 4705 , and control command transmission destination (destination) 4706 .
设备ID4701是设备200的标识符。设备类型4702表示设备200的种类。型号4703表示设备200的型号。配置4704是与顶点坐标2802同样由(X坐标,Y坐标,楼层序号)的形式表示的坐标,表示与设备200对应的设备图标501在布局图500上的配置。The device ID 4701 is an identifier of the device 200 . The device type 4702 indicates the type of the device 200 . The model number 4703 indicates the model number of the device 200 . Arrangement 4704 is a coordinate expressed in the format of (X coordinate, Y coordinate, floor number) similarly to vertex coordinate 2802 , and indicates the arrangement of device icon 501 corresponding to device 200 on floor plan 500 .
显示控制单元103能够基于该配置4704将设备图标501配置在布局图500上并显示基本画面等。能力信息4705表示能够对设备200进行控制的内容和/或能够从设备200取得的状态。例如,设备ID为A的空调机能够控制温度、风向以及风量。控制命令发送目的地4706表示控制设备200的控制命令的发送目的地。例如,对于设备ID为A的空调机,因为控制命令发送目的地4706为设备,所以控制命令从家庭控制器100直接发送给设备200。另一方面,对于设备ID为C的冰箱,因为控制命令发送目的地4706为服务器,所以控制命令从家庭控制器100经由服务器300发送给设备200。控制命令是用于操作设备200或确认设备200的状态的命令。Based on this arrangement 4704, the display control section 103 can arrange the device icon 501 on the floor plan 500 and display a basic screen or the like. Capability information 4705 indicates what can be controlled on the device 200 and/or a state that can be obtained from the device 200 . For example, an air conditioner with a device ID of A can control temperature, wind direction, and air volume. The control command transmission destination 4706 indicates the transmission destination of the control command of the control device 200 . For example, for the air conditioner whose device ID is A, since the control command transmission destination 4706 is a device, the control command is directly transmitted from the home controller 100 to the device 200 . On the other hand, for the refrigerator whose device ID is C, since the control command transmission destination 4706 is the server, the control command is transmitted from the home controller 100 to the device 200 via the server 300 . The control command is a command for operating the device 200 or confirming the state of the device 200 .
此外,设备列表4700也可以登记设备200当前的状态。由此,在从家庭控制器100发出设备200的状态确认请求的情况下,服务器300能够将该设备200的状态通知给家庭控制器100。In addition, the device list 4700 may also register the current state of the device 200 . Thus, when the home controller 100 issues a request to confirm the state of the device 200 , the server 300 can notify the home controller 100 of the state of the device 200 .
此外,如上所述,为了基于设备200的宅内的实际配置将设备图标501配置在布局图500上,用户使设备图标501移动到布局图500的适当位置。因此,对于没有由用户指定布局图500上的配置的设备图标501,作为配置4704的值设定为(0,0,0)等表示未设定的值。显示控制单元103将配置4704为未设定的设备图标501显示在事先确定的显示器101上的位置。Also, as described above, the user moves the device icon 501 to an appropriate position on the floor plan 500 in order to arrange the device icon 501 on the floor plan 500 based on the actual arrangement of the device 200 in the house. Therefore, for the device icons 501 whose arrangement on the floor plan 500 has not been specified by the user, a value indicating no setting such as (0, 0, 0) is set as the value of the arrangement 4704 . The display control section 103 displays the device icon 501 whose configuration 4704 is not set at a position on the display 101 determined in advance.
此外,在家庭信息2700中也可以省略服务器管理的设备列表4700。该情况下,家庭控制器100直接从设备200取得与记载在服务器管理的设备列表4700中的设备类型4702、型号4703以及能力信息4705对应的信息即可。In addition, the device list 4700 managed by the server may be omitted from the family information 2700 . In this case, the home controller 100 may directly acquire information corresponding to the device type 4702 , model 4703 , and capability information 4705 described in the device list 4700 managed by the server from the device 200 .
图35是表示家庭控制器100管理的设备列表3100的构成的图。家庭控制器100基于该设备列表3100的信息在基本画面的布局图500上配置设备图标501、控制设备200。FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list 3100 managed by the home controller 100 . Based on the information of the device list 3100 , the home controller 100 arranges the device icons 501 on the floor plan 500 of the basic screen and controls the devices 200 .
设备列表3100具备设备ID3101、设备类型3102、型号3103、配置3104、能力信息3105、控制命令发送目的地3106以及IP地址3107。设备ID3101~控制命令发送目的地3106与图34的同一名称的内容相同。Device list 3100 includes device ID 3101 , device type 3102 , model 3103 , configuration 3104 , capability information 3105 , control command destination 3106 , and IP address 3107 . Device ID 3101 to control command destination 3106 are the same as those of the same name in FIG. 34 .
在设备列表3100中,对于设备类型3102、型号3103、配置3104、能力信息3105、控制命令发送目的地3106的内容,设备管理单元105能够通过使服务器300发送设备列表4700来取得。设备管理单元105从设备200取得IP地址3107。但是,在能够从设备200直接取得设备类型3102、型号3103、能力信息3105以及控制命令发送目的地3106的情况下,设备管理单元105也可以使这些内容优先。In device list 3100 , device management section 105 can acquire device type 3102 , model 3103 , configuration 3104 , capability information 3105 , and control command destination 3106 by sending device list 4700 from server 300 . The device management unit 105 acquires the IP address 3107 from the device 200 . However, when the device type 3102 , model 3103 , capability information 3105 , and control command destination 3106 can be directly acquired from the device 200 , the device management section 105 may prioritize these contents.
此外,对于控制命令发送目的地3106,既可以不从服务器300、设备200取得而采用由家庭控制器系统事先确定的内容,也可以基于与家庭控制器100连接的网络的状态等来自动地决定,还可以由用户设定。In addition, the control command transmission destination 3106 may be determined in advance by the home controller system without obtaining from the server 300 or the device 200, or may be automatically determined based on the state of the network connected to the home controller 100, etc. , can also be set by the user.
接着,使用附图说明到家庭控制器100控制设备200为止的流程。Next, the flow until the home controller 100 controls the device 200 will be described using the drawings.
图36是表示家庭控制器100从服务器300取得家庭信息2700的处理流程的时序图。家庭控制器100在初次利用时或启动时等任意的定时(timing)从服务器300取得家庭信息2700,基于所取得的家庭信息2700生成图5所示的基本画面。FIG. 36 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of processing in which home controller 100 acquires home information 2700 from server 300 . The home controller 100 acquires the family information 2700 from the server 300 at an arbitrary timing such as when it is used for the first time or when it starts up, and generates the basic screen shown in FIG. 5 based on the acquired family information 2700 .
首先,家庭控制器100的设备管理单元105向服务器300发送家庭信息请求(S3201)。在此,家庭信息请求至少包含表示利用家庭控制器100的用户或家的家庭控制器ID。接收到家庭信息请求的服务器300的家庭信息管理单元301从存储单元304中检索与家庭控制器ID对应的家庭信息2700(S3202),并发送给家庭控制器100(S3203)。家庭控制器100的设备管理单元105将从服务器300接收到的家庭信息2700存储于存储单元104,显示控制单元103基于该家庭信息2700生成基本画面并显示于显示器101(S3204)。First, the device management unit 105 of the home controller 100 transmits a home information request to the server 300 (S3201). Here, the family information request includes at least a home controller ID indicating a user using the home controller 100 or a house. Having received the family information request, the family information management unit 301 of the server 300 retrieves the family information 2700 corresponding to the home controller ID from the storage unit 304 (S3202), and transmits it to the home controller 100 (S3203). The device management unit 105 of the home controller 100 stores the family information 2700 received from the server 300 in the storage unit 104, and the display control unit 103 generates a basic screen based on the family information 2700 and displays it on the display 101 (S3204).
接着,使用图37说明在家庭控制器100连接于网络之后家庭控制器100检测网络上的设备200的处理的流程。Next, the flow of processing for the home controller 100 to detect the devices 200 on the network after the home controller 100 is connected to the network will be described using FIG. 37 .
在图37中,作为在网络上连接有图31中所示的设备ID为A的设备A200和设备ID为B的设备B200的情况进行说明。In FIG. 37 , a case where the device A200 with the device ID A and the device B200 with the device ID B shown in FIG. 31 are connected to the network will be described.
在家庭控制器100初次利用时或电源接通时,若家庭控制器100连接于网络(S3301),则家庭控制器100的设备管理单元105对网络上的全部设备200广播设备检索请求(S3302)。接收到设备检索请求的设备A200将设备检索响应返回给家庭控制器100(S3303)。接收到设备检索响应的家庭控制器100从设备A200取得设备信息(S3304),更新显示画面(S3305)。When the home controller 100 is used for the first time or when the power is turned on, if the home controller 100 is connected to the network (S3301), the device management unit 105 of the home controller 100 broadcasts a device search request to all devices 200 on the network (S3302) . The device A200 having received the device retrieval request returns a device retrieval response to the home controller 100 (S3303). The home controller 100 having received the device search response acquires device information from the device A200 (S3304), and updates the display screen (S3305).
同样,接收到设备检索请求的设备B200将设备检索响应返回给家庭控制器100(S3306)。接收到设备检索响应的家庭控制器100从设备B200取得设备信息(S3307),更新显示画面(S3308)。在此,所谓设备信息是指表示设备200的设备类型、型号以及能力信息等的信息。家庭控制器100的设备管理单元105基于该设备信息生成设备列表3100(参照图35)。Likewise, the device B200 that has received the device retrieval request returns a device retrieval response to the home controller 100 (S3306). The home controller 100 having received the device search response acquires device information from the device B200 (S3307), and updates the display screen (S3308). Here, the device information refers to information indicating the device type, model, capability information, and the like of the device 200 . The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 generates a device list 3100 (see FIG. 35 ) based on the device information.
接着,使用图38说明在设备200连接于网络时家庭控制器100检测网络上的设备200的处理的流程。若设备A200在初次利用时或电源接通时连接于网络(S3401),则向网络上的全部家庭控制器100广播网络连接通知(S3402)。接收到网络连接通知的家庭控制器100的设备管理单元105从设备A200取得设备信息(S3403),显示控制单元103更新显示画面(S3404)。设备B200的网络连接时的处理也与设备A200同样(S3405~S3408)。Next, the flow of processing for the home controller 100 to detect the device 200 on the network when the device 200 is connected to the network will be described using FIG. 38 . When the device A200 is connected to the network when it is used for the first time or when the power is turned on (S3401), it broadcasts a network connection notification to all the home controllers 100 on the network (S3402). The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 having received the network connection notification acquires the device information from the device A200 (S3403), and the display control section 103 updates the display screen (S3404). The processing at the time of network connection of the device B200 is also the same as that of the device A200 (S3405 to S3408).
在此,对图37及图38中的家庭控制器100的显示画面的更新(S3305、S3308、S3404、S3408)进行说明。家庭控制器100在到从设备200接收到设备检索响应或网络连接通知为止的期间、也即是到在网络上检测到设备200为止的期间,使与设备200对应的设备图标501非显示。然后,接收到设备检索响应的家庭控制器100将所对应的设备200的设备图标501显示于画面。或者,家庭控制器100在到在网络上检测到设备200为止的期间,将未检测到的设备200的设备图标501的颜色显示为比检测到的设备200的设备图标501淡(例如,半透明)。然后,接收到设备检索响应的家庭控制器100使未检测到的设备200的设备图标501的颜色变化为与所检测到的设备200的设备图标501的颜色相同的颜色。Here, the update (S3305, S3308, S3404, S3408) of the display screen of the home controller 100 in FIGS. 37 and 38 will be described. The home controller 100 hides the device icon 501 corresponding to the device 200 until it receives a device search response or a network connection notification from the device 200 , that is, until the device 200 is detected on the network. Then, the home controller 100 that has received the device search response displays the device icon 501 of the corresponding device 200 on the screen. Alternatively, until the home controller 100 detects the device 200 on the network, the device icon 501 of the undetected device 200 is displayed in a lighter color (for example, translucent) than the device icon 501 of the detected device 200 . ). Then, the home controller 100 that has received the device search response changes the color of the device icon 501 of the undetected device 200 to the same color as the color of the device icon 501 of the detected device 200 .
图39A、图39B是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器100控制设备200的处理流程的流程图。39A and 39B are flowcharts showing the flow of processing in which the home controller 100 controls the device 200 in one embodiment of the present invention.
首先,触摸面板控制单元102检测到在基本画面中由用户选择了表示某设备200的设备图标501(S3501)。接着,显示控制单元103使全部设备图标501退避到设备控制画面502的显示区域外(S3502)。在该情况下,设备图标501如图11、图13所示进行退避。First, the touch panel control section 102 detects that the user has selected the device icon 501 representing a certain device 200 on the basic screen (S3501). Next, the display control section 103 retracts all the device icons 501 out of the display area of the device control screen 502 (S3502). In this case, the device icon 501 retreats as shown in FIGS. 11 and 13 .
接着,显示控制单元103对退避的设备图标501的显示位置进行调整(S3503)。例如,如图12、图14所示调整所选择的设备图标501以使其显示在特定的位置。Next, the display control section 103 adjusts the display position of the retracted device icon 501 (S3503). For example, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14 , the selected device icon 501 is adjusted to be displayed at a specific position.
接着,显示控制单元103判断与由用户选择的设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502是专用画面还是布局图(S3504)。Next, the display control section 103 judges whether the device control screen 502 corresponding to the device icon 501 selected by the user is a dedicated screen or a floor plan (S3504).
在此,所谓专用画面的设备控制画面502是指图13所示那样的重叠显示于布局图上并在布局图之外另外准备的设备控制画面502。另一方面,所谓布局图的设备控制画面502是指布局图本身成为设备控制画面502。Here, the device control screen 502 of a dedicated screen refers to a device control screen 502 that is superimposed on the floor plan as shown in FIG. 13 and is prepared separately from the floor plan. On the other hand, the device control screen 502 of the floor plan means that the floor plan itself becomes the device control screen 502 .
例如,在照明设备中,如果用户直接轻敲配置有照明设备的布局图上的房间的区域来使照明设备开启、关闭或者调整亮度,则能实现具有临场感的操作。另外,在用户要同时操作在起居室设置了多个的照明设备的情况下,若使各个照明设备专用的设备控制画面502同时显示在布局图上,则画面整体会被照明设备专用的设备控制画面502覆盖,视觉识别性降低。For example, in a lighting device, if the user directly taps an area of a room on a floor plan where the lighting device is arranged to turn on or off the lighting device or adjust brightness, operations with a sense of presence can be realized. In addition, when the user wants to operate a plurality of lighting devices installed in the living room at the same time, if the device control screen 502 dedicated to each lighting device is displayed on the floor plan at the same time, the entire screen will be controlled by the device dedicated to the lighting device. The screen 502 is covered and the visibility is reduced.
因此,在以下的说明中,使照明设备的设备控制画面502为成为布局图的设备控制画面。具体而言,在基本画面中,当用户选择了设置于某房间的照明设备的设备图标501时,全部设备图标501退避到布局图的显示区域外,布局图成为能够受理该房间的照明设备的操作的状态。而且,如果用户轻敲设置有所选择的照明设备的布局图上的房间的区域,则能够同时操作该房间内的一个以上照明设备。Therefore, in the following description, the device control screen 502 of the lighting device will be a device control screen that becomes a floor plan. Specifically, on the basic screen, when the user selects the device icon 501 of the lighting device installed in a certain room, all the device icons 501 are withdrawn from the display area of the floor plan, and the floor plan becomes the one that can accept the lighting device of the room. The status of the operation. Furthermore, if the user taps the region of the room on the floor plan where the selected lighting device is installed, it is possible to simultaneously operate one or more lighting devices in the room.
例如,在房间的照明设备关闭的状态下,当用户轻敲该房间的区域时,该房间的一个以上照明设备同时点亮,接着,当用户轻敲该区域时,一个以上照明设备同时熄灭。For example, in a state where lighting devices in a room are turned off, when the user taps an area of the room, more than one lighting device in the room is turned on at the same time, and then, when the user taps the area, one or more lighting devices are turned off simultaneously.
在S3504中,在设备控制画面502为布局图的情况下,如果配置有设备图标501的房间的区域为一定尺寸以下(S3506中“是”),则显示控制单元103使放大显示了该房间区域的设备专用的设备控制画面502重叠显示在布局图上(S3507)。在此,例如,从楼层整体的布局图分割出该房间的部分而放大后的布局图重叠显示在楼层整体的布局图上。In S3504, when the device control screen 502 is a floor plan, if the area of the room where the device icon 501 is placed is less than a certain size (YES in S3506), the display control section 103 enlarges and displays the room area. The device-specific device control screen 502 is superimposed and displayed on the floor plan (S3507). Here, for example, an enlarged floor plan obtained by dividing the part of the room from the floor plan of the whole floor is superimposed and displayed on the floor plan of the whole floor.
另一方面,如果配置有设备图标501的房间的区域大于一定尺寸(S3506中“否”),则显示控制单元103将布局图作为设备控制画面502来显示(S3508)。On the other hand, if the area of the room where the device icon 501 is arranged is larger than a certain size (NO in S3506), the display control unit 103 displays the floor plan as the device control screen 502 (S3508).
关于作为各设备200的设备控制画面502采用专用画面还是采用布局图的信息被预先存储在存储单元104中。因此,显示控制单元103参照该信息判定设备控制画面502是专用画面还是布局图即可。Information on whether to adopt a dedicated screen or a layout drawing as the device control screen 502 of each device 200 is stored in the storage unit 104 in advance. Therefore, it is only necessary for the display control section 103 to refer to this information to determine whether the device control screen 502 is a dedicated screen or a floor plan.
另外,显示控制单元103根据房间信息2900确定相应房间的顶点,根据顶点信息2800确定所确定出的顶点的坐标,求出由所确定出的顶点的坐标包围的区域的面积,由此算出相应的房间的尺寸即可。然后,如果该房间的尺寸比预先确定的一定尺寸大则在S3506中判定为“否”,如果为一定尺寸以下则在S3506中判定为“是”即可。In addition, the display control section 103 specifies the vertex of the corresponding room based on the room information 2900, specifies the coordinates of the specified vertex based on the vertex information 2800, obtains the area surrounded by the coordinates of the specified vertex, and calculates the corresponding The size of the room is fine. Then, if the size of the room is larger than a predetermined fixed size, it may be determined as "No" in S3506, and if it is smaller than a predetermined size, it may be determined as "Yes" in S3506.
另一方面,在S3504中设备控制画面502是专用画面的情况下,显示控制单元103将专用画面重叠显示于布局图上(S3505)。On the other hand, in S3504, when the device control screen 502 is a dedicated screen, the display control section 103 superimposes and displays the dedicated screen on the floor plan (S3505).
在S3509中,触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物(在此为用户的手指)开始接触显示器101。In S3509 , touch panel control unit 102 detects that a contact object (here, the user's finger) has come into contact with display 101 .
接着,触摸面板控制单元102判定接触对象是否为设备图标501(S3510)。Next, touch panel control section 102 determines whether or not the contact object is device icon 501 (S3510).
当判定为是接触设备图标501时(S3510中“是”),触摸面板控制单元102判定接触物是否接触了与S3501中选择的设备图标501相同的设备图标501(S3511)。在判定为接触物接触了与S3501中选择的设备图标501为同一设备图标501的情况下(S3511中“是”),显示控制单元103使显示中的设备控制画面502为非显示而显示基本画面(S3514)。When it is determined that the device icon 501 has been touched (YES in S3510), touch panel control section 102 determines whether the contact object has touched the same device icon 501 as the device icon 501 selected in S3501 (S3511). When it is determined that the contact object has touched the same device icon 501 as the device icon 501 selected in S3501 (YES in S3511), the display control section 103 hides the device control screen 502 being displayed and displays the basic screen. (S3514).
另外,在触摸面板控制单元102判定为不是接触设备图标501的情况下(S3510中“否”),触摸面板控制单元102进而判定接触对象是否为设备控制画面502(S3512)。在判定为接触对象不是设备控制画面502的情况下(S3512中“否”),显示控制单元103使显示中的设备控制画面502为非显示而显示基本画面(S3514)。In addition, when touch panel control section 102 determines that device icon 501 is not touched (NO in S3510), touch panel control section 102 further determines whether the touch object is device control screen 502 (S3512). When it is determined that the contact object is not the device control screen 502 (NO in S3512), the display control section 103 hides the device control screen 502 being displayed and displays the basic screen (S3514).
另一方面,在触摸面板控制单元102判定为接触物接触了设备控制画面502内的按钮等时(S3512中“是”),处理进入S3513,执行设备固有的控制流程(S3513)。On the other hand, when touch panel control section 102 determines that a contact object has touched a button or the like in device control screen 502 (YES in S3512), the process proceeds to S3513, and a device-specific control flow is executed (S3513).
接着,使用图40对在S3513中执行的设备固有的控制流程进行详细说明。首先,设备控制单元106根据接触物的接触内容来决定设备固有的控制内容(S3601)。接着,设备控制单元106生成与控制内容相应的控制命令(S3602)。如图11所示,在显示了空调机的设备控制画面502的状态下,设为用户轻敲使温度上升的按钮,触摸面板控制单元102检测到这一情况。于是,设备控制单元106生成使空调机的温度上升的控制命令。接着,设备控制单元106使处理进入S3603,执行控制命令发送流程。Next, the device-specific control flow executed in S3513 will be described in detail using FIG. 40 . First, the device control section 106 determines device-specific control content based on the contact content of the contact object (S3601). Next, the device control section 106 generates a control command corresponding to the control content (S3602). As shown in FIG. 11 , it is assumed that the user taps a button for raising the temperature while the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner is displayed, and the touch panel control section 102 detects this. Then, the device control unit 106 generates a control command to increase the temperature of the air conditioner. Next, the device control section 106 advances the process to S3603, and executes the control command transmission flow.
接着,使用图41对在S3603中执行的控制命令发送流程进行详细说明。首先,设备控制单元106判定家庭控制器100是否正连接在家庭网络上(S3701),如果正连接在家庭网络上(S3701中“是”),则按照设备列表3100的控制命令发送目的地3106的内容,检查控制命令的发送目的地(S3702)。在此,所谓家庭网络是指用户宅内的网络。因此,如果用户从外出目的地操作家庭控制器100,则在S3701中判定为“否”,如果用户在宅内操作家庭控制器100,则在S3701中判定为“是”。Next, the flow of control command transmission executed in S3603 will be described in detail using FIG. 41 . First, the device control unit 106 determines whether the home controller 100 is connected to the home network (S3701), and if it is connected to the home network ("Yes" in S3701), it sends the device list 3100 according to the control command of the destination 3106. Contents, the destination of the control command is checked (S3702). Here, the so-called home network refers to the network in the user's house. Therefore, if the user operates the home controller 100 from a destination outside, the determination is "No" in S3701, and if the user operates the home controller 100 at home, the determination is "YES" in S3701.
如果在S3702中控制命令的发送目的地是“设备”,则设备控制单元106将控制命令发送给相应的设备200(S3703)。另一方面,如果在S3702中控制命令的发送目的地是“服务器”,则设备控制单元106将控制命令发送给服务器300(S3704)。If the transmission destination of the control command is "device" in S3702, the device control unit 106 transmits the control command to the corresponding device 200 (S3703). On the other hand, if the transmission destination of the control command is "server" in S3702, the device control unit 106 transmits the control command to the server 300 (S3704).
例如,在设备列表3100中,空调机的控制命令发送目的地3106是“设备”,因此设备控制单元106将控制命令发送给空调机。另一方面,在设备列表3100中,冰箱的控制命令发送目的地3106是“服务器”,因此设备控制单元106将控制命令发送给服务器300。For example, in the device list 3100, the control command transmission destination 3106 of the air conditioner is "device", so the device control unit 106 transmits the control command to the air conditioner. On the other hand, in the device list 3100 , the control command transmission destination 3106 of the refrigerator is “server”, so the device control unit 106 transmits the control command to the server 300 .
另外,在S3701中判断为家庭控制器100没有连接于家庭网络的情况下(S3701中“否”),也实施S3704的处理。In addition, when it is judged in S3701 that the home controller 100 is not connected to the home network (NO in S3701), the process of S3704 is also performed.
在S3705中,设备控制单元106从设备200接收控制结果。接着,在对同时操作的设备200都发送控制命令已结束的情况下(S3706中“是”),设备控制单元106使处理进入S3707。另一方面,在对同时操作的设备200都发送控制命令还没有结束的情况下(S3706中“否”),设备控制单元106使处理返回到S3702,重复S3702之后的处理。In S3705 , the device control unit 106 receives the control result from the device 200 . Next, when the transmission of the control command to all the devices 200 operating at the same time has been completed (YES in S3706), the device control section 106 advances the process to S3707. On the other hand, when the transmission of the control command to all devices 200 operating at the same time has not yet ended (NO in S3706), device control section 106 returns the process to S3702, and repeats the processes after S3702.
例如,在同一房间设置了两个照明设备且预先设定为同时操作这两个照明设备的情况下,设备控制单元106向这两个照明设备分别发送控制命令。此外,对于与其他设备200不同时操作的设备200,在S3706中不判定为“否”。For example, in the case where two lighting devices are set in the same room and are preset to operate the two lighting devices simultaneously, the device control unit 106 sends control commands to the two lighting devices respectively. Also, for a device 200 that does not operate at the same time as other devices 200 , no determination is made in S3706 as "No".
接着,显示控制单元103更新显示器101所显示的画面(S3707)。例如,若设为空调机的设定温度被变更,则更新设备控制画面502,以使得:温度显示例如闪烁显示直到空调机的设定温度根据控制命令被变更,当根据控制命令而变更了空调机的设定温度时,结束温度显示的闪烁。另外,在照明设备的例子中,在照明设备开启的情况下,更新画面以使设置有照明设备的房间的布局图上的区域比其他区域亮。Next, the display control section 103 updates the screen displayed on the display 101 (S3707). For example, if the set temperature of the air conditioner is changed, the device control screen 502 is updated so that the temperature display, for example, flashes until the set temperature of the air conditioner is changed according to the control command. When the set temperature of the machine is reached, the blinking of the temperature display ends. In addition, in the example of the lighting device, when the lighting device is turned on, the screen is updated so that the area on the floor plan of the room where the lighting device is installed is brighter than other areas.
接着,使用图42对家庭控制器100直接控制设备200的处理流程进行说明。首先,家庭控制器100的触摸面板控制单元102检测用户对设备控制画面502的操作(S3801)。接着,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106生成与用户的操作相应的控制命令并发送给设备200(S3802)。Next, the flow of processing in which the home controller 100 directly controls the device 200 will be described using FIG. 42 . First, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100 detects a user's operation on the device control screen 502 (S3801). Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates a control command corresponding to the user's operation and transmits it to the device 200 (S3802).
接收到控制命令的设备200执行控制命令(S3803),将控制结果发送给家庭控制器100(S3804)。接收到控制结果的家庭控制器100的显示控制单元103根据控制结果更新显示画面(S3805)。The device 200 having received the control command executes the control command (S3803), and transmits the control result to the home controller 100 (S3804). The display control unit 103 of the home controller 100 having received the control result updates the display screen according to the control result (S3805).
接着,使用图43对家庭控制器100经由服务器300控制设备200的处理流程进行说明。首先,家庭控制器100的触摸面板控制单元102检测用户对设备控制画面502的操作(S3901)。接着,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106生成与用户的操作相应的控制命令并发送给服务器300(S3902)。Next, the flow of processing in which the home controller 100 controls the device 200 via the server 300 will be described using FIG. 43 . First, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100 detects a user's operation on the device control screen 502 (S3901). Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates a control command corresponding to the user's operation and transmits it to the server 300 (S3902).
接收到控制命令的服务器300将该控制命令发送给设备200(S3903)。接收到控制命令的设备200执行控制命令(S3904),将控制结果发送给服务器300(S3905)。接收到控制结果的服务器300将该控制结果发送给家庭控制器100(S3906)。接收到该控制结果的家庭控制器100的显示控制单元103根据控制结果更新显示画面(S3907)。The server 300 having received the control command sends the control command to the device 200 (S3903). The device 200 having received the control command executes the control command (S3904), and transmits the control result to the server 300 (S3905). The server 300 having received the control result transmits the control result to the home controller 100 (S3906). The display control section 103 of the home controller 100 having received the control result updates the display screen according to the control result (S3907).
接着,使用图44对家庭控制器100经由服务器300确认设备200的设备状态的处理流程进行说明。首先,设备200将当前的设备状态发送给服务器300(S4001)。在此,设备200在电源接通时、电源关闭时、设备状态发生了变化时、或者定期地将设备状态发送给服务器300,使服务器300存储设备状态。此外,S4001的处理也可以与S4002~S4006的处理非同步地执行。Next, the flow of processing in which the home controller 100 checks the device status of the device 200 via the server 300 will be described using FIG. 44 . First, the device 200 sends the current device state to the server 300 (S4001). Here, the device 200 transmits the device status to the server 300 when the power is turned on, when the power is turned off, when the device status changes, or periodically, so that the server 300 stores the device status. In addition, the process of S4001 may be performed asynchronously with the process of S4002-S4006.
接着,家庭控制器100的触摸面板控制单元102检测用户对设备控制画面502的操作(S4002)。接着,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106生成与用户的操作相应的控制命令并发送给服务器300(S4003)。在此,生成用于确认设备200的设备状态的控制命令。Next, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100 detects the user's operation on the device control screen 502 (S4002). Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates a control command corresponding to the user's operation and transmits it to the server 300 (S4003). Here, a control command for confirming the device state of the device 200 is generated.
接收到控制命令的服务器300检索该设备200当前的设备状态(S4004),将该设备200的设备状态作为控制结果发送给家庭控制器100(S4005)。接收到控制结果的家庭控制器100的显示控制单元103根据控制结果更新显示画面(S4006)。例如,如果设备200的设备控制画面502显示于显示器101,则根据控制结果更新设备200的设备控制画面502的内容。The server 300 having received the control command retrieves the current device status of the device 200 (S4004), and sends the device status of the device 200 to the home controller 100 as a control result (S4005). The display control unit 103 of the home controller 100 having received the control result updates the display screen according to the control result (S4006). For example, if the device control screen 502 of the device 200 is displayed on the display 101, the content of the device control screen 502 of the device 200 is updated according to the control result.
接着,使用图45对在家庭控制器100以1次操作控制多台设备200的情况下家庭控制器100直接控制设备200的处理流程进行说明。在此,以家庭控制器100控制设备A200和设备B200的情况为例进行说明。Next, the flow of processing in which the home controller 100 directly controls the devices 200 when the home controller 100 controls a plurality of devices 200 with one operation will be described using FIG. 45 . Here, the case where the home controller 100 controls the device A200 and the device B200 will be described as an example.
首先,家庭控制器100的触摸面板控制单元102检测用户对设备控制画面502的操作(S4101)。接着,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106生成与用户的操作相应的控制命令并发送给设备A200(S4102)。First, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100 detects a user's operation on the device control screen 502 (S4101). Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates a control command corresponding to the user's operation and transmits it to the device A200 (S4102).
接收到控制命令的设备A200执行控制命令(S4103),将控制结果发送给家庭控制器100(S4104)。The device A200 having received the control command executes the control command (S4103), and transmits the control result to the home controller 100 (S4104).
接着,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106将与发送给设备A200的控制命令相同的控制命令发送给设备B200(S4105)。接收到控制命令的设备B200执行控制命令(S4106),将控制结果发送给家庭控制器100(S4107)。Next, the device control unit 106 of the home controller 100 transmits the same control command as that transmitted to the device A200 to the device B200 (S4105). The device B200 having received the control command executes the control command (S4106), and transmits the control result to the home controller 100 (S4107).
接收到控制结果的家庭控制器100的显示控制单元103根据控制结果更新显示画面(S4108)。在该情况下,例如,如果设备A200、B200的设备控制画面502显示于显示器101,则根据控制结果更新设备A200、B200的设备控制画面502的内容。The display control unit 103 of the home controller 100 having received the control result updates the display screen according to the control result (S4108). In this case, for example, if the device control screen 502 of the device A200, B200 is displayed on the display 101, the content of the device control screen 502 of the device A200, B200 is updated according to the control result.
接着,使用图46对在家庭控制器100以1次操作控制多台设备200的情况下家庭控制器100经由服务器300控制设备200的处理流程进行说明。在此,以家庭控制器100控制设备A200和设备B200的情况为例进行说明。另外,设为设备A200、B200由一个设备图标501来表示,并通过一个设备控制画面502来进行控制。Next, when the home controller 100 controls a plurality of devices 200 with one operation, the flow of processing in which the home controller 100 controls the devices 200 via the server 300 will be described using FIG. 46 . Here, the case where the home controller 100 controls the device A200 and the device B200 will be described as an example. In addition, it is assumed that the devices A200 and B200 are represented by one device icon 501 and controlled through one device control screen 502 .
首先,家庭控制器100的触摸面板控制单元102检测用户对设备控制画面502的操作(S4201)。First, the touch panel control unit 102 of the home controller 100 detects a user's operation on the device control screen 502 (S4201).
接着,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106生成与用户的操作相应的设备A200的控制命令并发送给服务器300(S4202)。Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates a control command for the device A200 according to the user's operation and transmits it to the server 300 (S4202).
接收到设备A200的控制命令的服务器300将控制命令发送给设备A200(S4203)。接收到控制命令的设备A200执行控制命令(S4204),将控制结果发送给服务器300(S4205)。接收到控制结果的服务器300将该控制结果发送给家庭控制器100(S4206)。The server 300 having received the control command of the device A200 transmits the control command to the device A200 (S4203). The device A200 having received the control command executes the control command (S4204), and transmits the control result to the server 300 (S4205). The server 300 having received the control result transmits the control result to the home controller 100 (S4206).
同样,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106生成与用户的操作相应的设备B200的控制命令并发送给服务器300(S4207)。Similarly, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates a control command for the device B200 according to the user's operation and transmits it to the server 300 (S4207).
接收到控制命令的服务器300将控制命令发送给设备B200(S4208)。接收到控制命令的设备B200执行控制命令(S4209),将控制结果发送给服务器300(S4210)。接收到控制结果的服务器300将该控制结果发送给家庭控制器100(S4211)。The server 300 having received the control command transmits the control command to the device B200 (S4208). The device B200 having received the control command executes the control command (S4209), and transmits the control result to the server 300 (S4210). The server 300 having received the control result transmits the control result to the home controller 100 (S4211).
然后,家庭控制器100的显示控制单元103根据控制结果更新显示画面(S4212)。Then, the display control unit 103 of the home controller 100 updates the display screen according to the control result (S4212).
接着,使用图47对在家庭控制器100以1次操作控制多台设备200的情况下家庭控制器100经由服务器300控制设备200的处理流程进行说明。在此,以家庭控制器100控制设备A200和设备B200的情况为例进行说明。另外,设为设备A200、B200由一个设备图标501来表示,并通过一个设备控制画面502来进行控制。Next, when the home controller 100 controls a plurality of devices 200 with one operation, the flow of processing in which the home controller 100 controls the devices 200 via the server 300 will be described using FIG. 47 . Here, the case where the home controller 100 controls the device A200 and the device B200 will be described as an example. In addition, it is assumed that the devices A200 and B200 are represented by one device icon 501 and controlled through one device control screen 502 .
首先,家庭控制器100的触摸面板控制单元102检测用户对设备控制画面502的操作(S4301)。First, the touch panel control unit 102 of the home controller 100 detects a user's operation on the device control screen 502 (S4301).
接着,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106根据用户的操作生成设备A200及设备B200的控制命令,并发送给服务器300(S4302)。Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates a control command for the device A200 and the device B200 according to the user's operation, and sends it to the server 300 (S4302).
接收到控制命令的服务器300将控制命令发送给设备A200(S4303)。接收到控制命令的设备A200执行控制命令(S4304),将控制结果发送给服务器300(S4305)。The server 300 having received the control command transmits the control command to the device A200 (S4303). The device A200 having received the control command executes the control command (S4304), and transmits the control result to the server 300 (S4305).
同样,服务器300将控制命令发送给设备B200(S4306)。接收到控制命令的设备B200执行控制命令(S4307),将控制结果发送给服务器300(S4308)。接收到设备A200及设备B200的控制结果的服务器300将该控制结果发送给家庭控制器100(S4309)。Also, the server 300 sends a control command to the device B200 (S4306). The device B200 having received the control command executes the control command (S4307), and transmits the control result to the server 300 (S4308). The server 300 having received the control result of the device A200 and the device B200 transmits the control result to the home controller 100 (S4309).
然后,家庭控制器100的显示控制单元103根据控制结果更新显示画面(S4310)。Then, the display control unit 103 of the home controller 100 updates the display screen according to the control result (S4310).
接着,使用图48对在家庭控制器100中使设备图标501移动时的处理流程进行说明。在此,作为用户拥有2台家庭控制器A100、A200的情况来进行说明。Next, the flow of processing when the device icon 501 is moved in the home controller 100 will be described using FIG. 48 . Here, a case where a user owns two home controllers A100 and A200 will be described.
家庭控制器A100的触摸面板控制单元102检测到设备图标501的移动时(S4801),显示控制单元103更新显示画面(S4802)。在此,显示控制单元103根据用户对设备图标501的拖拽量使设备图标501移动并显示。When the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller A100 detects the movement of the device icon 501 (S4801), the display control section 103 updates the display screen (S4802). Here, the display control section 103 moves and displays the device icon 501 according to the drag amount of the device icon 501 by the user.
家庭控制器A100的设备管理单元105将包含拖拽后的布局图500上的坐标的设备列表更新通知发送给服务器300(S4803)。在此,家庭控制器A100的设备管理单元105利用拖拽后的坐标更新本身管理的设备列表3100的相应设备200的配置3104的内容。The device management section 105 of the home controller A100 transmits to the server 300 an update notification of the device list including the coordinates on the floor plan 500 after dragging (S4803). Here, the device management unit 105 of the home controller A100 updates the content of the configuration 3104 of the corresponding device 200 in the device list 3100 managed by itself using the dragged coordinates.
接收到设备列表更新通知的服务器300更新设备列表4700(S4804)。在该情况下,服务器300的家庭信息管理单元301在设备列表4700中利用设备列表更新通知所包含的坐标来更新相应设备200的配置4704的内容。The server 300 having received the device list update notification updates the device list 4700 (S4804). In this case, the family information management unit 301 of the server 300 updates the content of the configuration 4704 of the corresponding device 200 in the device list 4700 using the coordinates included in the device list update notification.
接着,服务器300将设备列表更新通知发送给家庭控制器B100(S4805)。接收到设备列表更新通知的家庭控制器B100更新显示画面(S4806)。在此,家庭控制器B100的设备管理单元105利用设备列表更新通知所包含的坐标来更新本身管理的设备列表3100的相应设备200的配置3104的内容。Next, the server 300 transmits a device list update notification to the home controller B100 (S4805). The home controller B100 that has received the device list update notification updates the display screen (S4806). Here, the device management unit 105 of the home controller B100 updates the content of the configuration 3104 of the corresponding device 200 in the device list 3100 managed by itself using the coordinates included in the device list update notification.
如上所述,设备图标501被配置到布局图500上的适当位置。由家庭控制器A100进行的设备图标501的配置位置的更新经由服务器300通知给家庭控制器B100,因此更新后的设备图标501的配置位置在家庭控制器A100、B100以及服务器300间共有。因此,能够避免在家庭控制器A100和家庭控制器B100中设备图标501的配置位置不同这样的故障。As described above, the device icons 501 are arranged at appropriate positions on the floor plan 500 . Since home controller A100 notifies home controller B100 via server 300 of the update of the arrangement position of device icon 501 , the updated arrangement position of device icon 501 is shared between home controllers A100 , B100 and server 300 . Therefore, it is possible to avoid a failure that the arrangement positions of the device icons 501 are different between the home controller A100 and the home controller B100.
接着,使用图49对家庭控制器100和服务器300更新设备列表的处理的一例进行说明。设备200将表示自身的当前状态的设备状态发送给服务器300(S4901)。在此,设备200可以定期发送设备状态,也可以在状态发生变化时发送设备状态。服务器300根据接收到的设备状态的内容来更新设备列表4700(S4902)。在此,在设备列表4700中不存在设备200的信息的情况下,服务器300将设备200的信息作为新设备来添加。然后,服务器300将设备列表更新通知发送给家庭控制器100(S4903)。家庭控制器100的设备管理单元105根据接收到的设备列表更新通知的内容来更新设备列表3100(S4904)。在此,在设备列表3100中不存在设备200的信息的情况下,设备管理单元105将设备200的信息作为新设备来添加。然后,家庭控制器100的显示控制单元103更新显示画面(S4905)。Next, an example of processing for updating the device list by the home controller 100 and the server 300 will be described using FIG. 49 . The device 200 transmits a device state indicating its current state to the server 300 (S4901). Here, the device 200 may send the device status periodically, or may send the device status when the status changes. The server 300 updates the device list 4700 according to the received content of the device state (S4902). Here, when the information of the device 200 does not exist in the device list 4700, the server 300 adds the information of the device 200 as a new device. Then, the server 300 transmits a device list update notification to the home controller 100 (S4903). The device management unit 105 of the home controller 100 updates the device list 3100 according to the received content of the device list update notification (S4904). Here, when the information of the device 200 does not exist in the device list 3100, the device management section 105 adds the information of the device 200 as a new device. Then, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100 updates the display screen (S4905).
如此,因为设备200在状态发生变化时将这一情况通知给服务器300,所以服务器300能够监视设备200的状态的变化。另外,因为被从设备200发送了设备状态的服务器300将该状态变化通知给家庭控制器100,所以家庭控制器100能够识别设备200的当前状态。另外,在新设备200连接于家庭网络的情况下,服务器300和家庭控制器100能够添加新设备。由此,能够防止设备200的实际状态和家庭控制器100识别到的设备200的状态发生偏差。In this way, since the device 200 notifies the server 300 of the change of state, the server 300 can monitor the change of the state of the device 200 . In addition, since the server 300 to which the device status is transmitted from the device 200 notifies the home controller 100 of the status change, the home controller 100 can recognize the current status of the device 200 . In addition, in the case where a new device 200 is connected to the home network, the server 300 and the home controller 100 can add the new device. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a deviation between the actual state of the device 200 and the state of the device 200 recognized by the home controller 100 .
接着,使用图50对家庭控制器100和服务器300更新设备列表的处理的另一例子进行说明。设备200将设备状态发送给家庭控制器100(S5001)。在此,设备200可以定期发送设备状态,也可以在状态发生变化时发送设备状态。Next, another example of the process of updating the device list by the home controller 100 and the server 300 will be described using FIG. 50 . The device 200 transmits the device status to the home controller 100 (S5001). Here, the device 200 may send the device status periodically, or may send the device status when the status changes.
家庭控制器100的设备管理单元105根据接收到的设备状态的内容来更新设备列表3100(S5002)。在此,在设备列表3100中不存在设备200的信息的情况下,设备管理单元105将设备200的信息作为新设备来添加。然后,显示控制单元103更新显示画面(S5003)。然后,家庭控制器100的设备管理单元105将设备列表更新通知发送给服务器300(S5004)。服务器300根据接收到的设备列表更新通知来更新设备列表4700(S5005)。在此,在设备列表4700中不存在设备200的信息的情况下,服务器300将设备200的信息作为新设备来添加。The device management unit 105 of the home controller 100 updates the device list 3100 according to the received content of the device status (S5002). Here, when the information of the device 200 does not exist in the device list 3100, the device management section 105 adds the information of the device 200 as a new device. Then, the display control unit 103 updates the display screen (S5003). Then, the device management unit 105 of the home controller 100 transmits a device list update notification to the server 300 (S5004). The server 300 updates the device list 4700 according to the received device list update notification (S5005). Here, when the information of the device 200 does not exist in the device list 4700, the server 300 adds the information of the device 200 as a new device.
接着,使用图51对家庭控制器100和服务器300更新设备列表的处理的又一例子进行说明。在图51中,以用户拥有宅内的家庭控制器100和宅外的家庭控制器100这两台家庭控制器100的情况为例进行说明。在此,宅外的家庭控制器100是用户带到外出目的地的家庭控制器100,宅内的家庭控制器100是用户放在宅内的家庭控制器100。Next, still another example of the process of updating the device list by the home controller 100 and the server 300 will be described using FIG. 51 . In FIG. 51 , a case where the user owns two home controllers 100 , the home controller 100 inside the house and the home controller 100 outside the house, will be described as an example. Here, the home controller 100 outside the home is the home controller 100 that the user takes to the destination, and the home controller 100 inside the home is the home controller 100 that the user puts in the house.
设备200将设备状态发送给宅内的家庭控制器100(S5101)。宅内的家庭控制器100根据接收到的设备状态的内容来更新设备列表3100(S5102)。在此,在设备列表3100中不存在设备200的信息的情况下,设备管理单元105将设备200的信息作为新设备来添加。然后更新显示画面(S5103)。然后,宅内的家庭控制器100将设备列表更新通知发送给服务器300(S5104)。The device 200 transmits the device status to the home controller 100 in the house (S5101). The home controller 100 in the house updates the device list 3100 based on the received content of the device status (S5102). Here, when the information of the device 200 does not exist in the device list 3100, the device management section 105 adds the information of the device 200 as a new device. Then the display screen is updated (S5103). Then, the home controller 100 in the house transmits a device list update notification to the server 300 (S5104).
服务器300根据接收到的设备列表更新通知的内容来更新设备列表4700(S5105)。在此,在设备列表4700中不存在设备200的信息的情况下,服务器300将设备200的信息作为新设备来添加。然后,服务器300将设备列表更新通知发送给宅外的家庭控制器100(S5106)。宅外的家庭控制器100根据接收到的设备列表更新通知的内容来更新设备列表3100(S5107)。在此,在设备列表3100中不存在设备200的信息的情况下,宅外的家庭控制器100的设备管理单元105将设备200的信息作为新设备来添加。然后更新显示画面(S5108)。The server 300 updates the device list 4700 according to the content of the received device list update notification (S5105). Here, when the information of the device 200 does not exist in the device list 4700, the server 300 adds the information of the device 200 as a new device. Then, the server 300 transmits a device list update notification to the home controller 100 outside the house (S5106). The outdoor home controller 100 updates the device list 3100 based on the received device list update notification (S5107). Here, when the information of the device 200 does not exist in the device list 3100, the device management section 105 of the remote home controller 100 adds the information of the device 200 as a new device. Then the display screen is updated (S5108).
根据该例子,即使在一个家庭控制器100位于宅外、另一个家庭控制器100位于宅内的情况下,也能够防止两个家庭控制器100识别到的设备200的状态发生偏差。According to this example, even when one home controller 100 is located outside the home and the other home controller 100 is located inside the home, it is possible to prevent the states of the devices 200 recognized by the two home controllers 100 from being different from each other.
此外,上述说明的程序、处理流程是一个例子,只要能够实现作为目的的处理,也可以更换步骤的顺序,还可以省略一部分步骤。例如,对设备A200和设备B200发送控制命令也可以非同步地实现。In addition, the programs and processing flows described above are examples, and as long as the intended processing can be realized, the order of the steps may be changed, and some steps may be omitted. For example, sending control commands to device A200 and device B200 may also be implemented asynchronously.
在上述说明中,作为布局图500,采用了以平面方式表示构成各楼层的房间的位置和形状的俯视图作为布局图,但本实施方式不限定于此,也可以采用概略表示在各楼层何种房间有几个的图来作为布局图。In the above description, as the floor plan 500, a plan view showing the positions and shapes of the rooms constituting each floor in a planar manner was used as the floor plan, but the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and may be used to schematically show what kind of room is on each floor. There are several pictures of the room as a layout picture.
以下,对布局图的另一方式进行具体说明。图52是表示另一模式的布局图5200的图。在布局图5200中,构成1层楼层的一个房间由四边形的一个区块来表示,在1层楼层中各房间配置成矩阵状。另外,各区块的尺寸相同,在各区块记载有房间的名称。Hereinafter, another form of the layout diagram will be specifically described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a floor plan 5200 of another mode. In floor plan 5200 , one room constituting one floor is represented by one square block, and each room is arranged in a matrix on one floor. In addition, the size of each block is the same, and the name of the room is described in each block.
在该布局图5200中,示出了构成各楼层的房间的名称和个数,但房间的相对尺寸和楼层内的位置却没有表示。在本实施方式中,这种图也作为布局图5200来处理。即,在本实施方式中,只要是至少表示在各楼层包含何种房间的图,则作为布局图来处理。In this floor plan 5200, the names and numbers of the rooms constituting each floor are shown, but the relative sizes of the rooms and the positions in the floors are not shown. In this embodiment, such a diagram is also handled as the floor plan 5200 . That is, in the present embodiment, as long as it shows at least what kind of rooms are included in each floor, it is handled as a floor plan.
例如,在第1楼层的布局图5201中,可知包含起居室、厨房、餐厅、浴室、化妆间、卫生间、楼梯以及玄关的各房间。另外,在第2楼层的布局图5202中,可知包含主卧室、卧室1、卧室1、儿童间以及楼梯的各房间。For example, in the floor plan 5201 of the first floor, each room including the living room, kitchen, dining room, bathroom, powder room, toilet, stairs, and entrance can be seen. In addition, in the floor plan 5202 of the second floor, each room including the master bedroom, bedroom 1, bedroom 1, children's room, and stairs can be seen.
此外,在布局图5200中,用户通过拖拽任意的房间使其移动,能够对该房间的布局图5200上的位置进行更换。另外,在房间内配置有许多设备200,在布局图5200中,在默认的房间尺寸无法在房间内显示完全部设备图标501的情况下,显示控制单元103也可以放大房间的尺寸以使全部设备图标501都能收进房间内。In addition, in the floor plan 5200 , the user can change the position of the room on the floor plan 5200 by dragging and moving an arbitrary room. In addition, there are many devices 200 arranged in the room. In the layout diagram 5200, if the default room size cannot display all the device icons 501 in the room, the display control unit 103 can also enlarge the size of the room so that all devices The icon 501 can be received in the room.
图53是表示采用了布局图5200的基本画面的构成的图。在基本画面上显示布局图5200。另外,在各房间内显示实际配置的设备200的设备图标501。FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen using a floor plan 5200 . A floor plan 5200 is displayed on the basic screen. In addition, the device icon 501 of the device 200 actually placed is displayed in each room.
例如,在起居室中,由于显示有电视机和照明设备的设备图标501,所以可知设置有电视机和照明设备。For example, in the living room, since the device icons 501 of the television and the lighting are displayed, it can be known that the television and the lighting are installed.
设备一览显示变更按钮503是用于从基本画面向前述的设备一览显示画面(参照图24)切换画面显示的按钮。The device list display change button 503 is a button for switching the screen display from the basic screen to the above-mentioned device list display screen (see FIG. 24 ).
图54是表示在采用了图52所示的布局图5200的情况下设备控制画面502的显示状态的图。在图53所示的基本画面中,触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户选择了设备图标501时,显示控制单元103将与所选择的设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502显示于显示器101。在图54中,由于选择了空调机的设备图标501,所以空调机的设备控制画面502被重叠显示在布局图5200上。FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a display state of the device control screen 502 when the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 52 is used. In the basic screen shown in FIG. 53 , when touch panel control section 102 detects that the user has selected device icon 501 , display control section 103 displays device control screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501 on display 101 . In FIG. 54 , since the device icon 501 of the air conditioner is selected, the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner is displayed superimposed on the floor plan 5200 .
另外,显示控制单元103在显示设备控制画面502时,使显示于布局图5200的设备图标501配置在设备控制画面502的显示区域外。在图54的例子中,全部设备图标501以一纵列配置在布局图5200的左侧。Also, when displaying the device control screen 502 , the display control section 103 arranges the device icon 501 displayed on the floor plan 5200 outside the display area of the device control screen 502 . In the example of FIG. 54 , all device icons 501 are arranged in a single column on the left side of the floor plan 5200 .
此外,在使设备图标501以一纵列配置在布局图5200的左侧时,显示控制单元103也可以根据特定的条件对设备图标501进行分组。例如,设备图标501可以按房间进行分组,也可以按设备200的种类进行分组,还可以按基于种类的类目对设备200进行分组。In addition, when the device icons 501 are arranged in a column on the left side of the floor plan 5200, the display control unit 103 may also group the device icons 501 according to specific conditions. For example, the device icons 501 may be grouped by rooms, may be grouped by types of devices 200 , or may be grouped by categories based on types.
在图54的例子中,设备图标501被配置在布局图5200的左侧,但也可以以一纵列配置在布局图5200的右侧,还可以以一横排配置在布局图5200的上侧或下侧。In the example in FIG. 54 , the device icons 501 are arranged on the left side of the floor plan 5200 , but they may also be arranged in a vertical row on the right side of the floor plan 5200 , or may be arranged in a horizontal row on the upper side of the floor plan 5200 or underside.
另外,在无法将全部设备图标501显示在布局图5200的左侧的情况下,当向上方或下方对以一列配置在左侧的设备图标501进行划动操作时,显示控制单元103根据该划动操作使设备图标501向上方或下方滚动,使非显示的设备图标501显示在显示器101内即可。In addition, when all the device icons 501 cannot be displayed on the left side of the floor plan 5200, when the device icons 501 arranged in a row on the left side are swiped up or down, the display control section 103 The device icon 501 may be scrolled upward or downward by the motion operation, and the non-displayed device icon 501 may be displayed on the display 101 .
另外,在将设备图标501以一纵列配置在布局图5200的左侧时,显示控制单元103也可以将用户选择的设备图标501以与没被选择的设备图标501不用的显示方式来显示。例如,所选择的设备图标501可以以与没被的设备图标501不同的颜色来显示,也可以比没被选择的设备图标501亮来显示,还可以以比没被选择的设备图标501浓的浓度来显示,另外可以按一定的周期进行闪烁。Also, when arranging device icons 501 in a single column on the left side of floor plan 5200 , display control section 103 may display device icons 501 selected by the user in a different display format from device icons 501 not selected. For example, the selected device icon 501 may be displayed in a color different from that of the unselected device icon 501, or may be displayed brighter than the unselected device icon 501, or may be displayed in a darker color than the unselected device icon 501. Concentration to display, in addition, it can flash according to a certain period.
另外,显示控制单元103也可以使设备图标501的排列滚动,以使由用户选择的设备图标501位于图标列的显眼位置(例如,最上、中央、最下)。In addition, the display control section 103 may scroll the arrangement of the device icons 501 so that the device icon 501 selected by the user is located at a conspicuous position (for example, the top, the center, or the bottom) of the icon row.
另外,在显示设备控制画面502时,显示控制单元103也可以如图12所示将全部设备图标501配置在椭圆的外周上。In addition, when the device control screen 502 is displayed, the display control section 103 may arrange all the device icons 501 on the outer periphery of the ellipse as shown in FIG. 12 .
接着,使用图55对基本画面的显示状态与设备控制画面502的显示状态的转换进行说明。Next, transition between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the device control screen 502 will be described using FIG. 55 .
在图55的左图所示的基本画面中,用户选择要控制的设备200(在此为空调机)的设备图标501,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该选择。于是,如图55的右图所示,显示控制单元103将与所选择的设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502重叠显示在布局图5200上。由此,基本画面的显示状态转换到设备控制画面502的显示状态。In the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 55 , the user selects a device icon 501 of a device 200 (here, an air conditioner) to be controlled, and touch panel control section 102 detects the selection. Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 55 , the display control section 103 superimposes and displays the device control screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501 on the floor plan 5200 . Thereby, the display state of the basic screen transitions to the display state of the device control screen 502 .
另一方面,如图55的右图所示,在设备控制画面502的显示状态下,用户选择与设备控制画面502对应的空调机的设备图标501、或设备控制画面502的显示区域外(例如,位于设备控制画面502的显示区域外的布局图5200的显示区域),触摸面板控制单元102检测到该选择。于是,如图55的左图所示,显示控制单元103消除设备控制画面502,从设备控制画面502的显示状态返回到基本画面的显示状态。On the other hand, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 55, in the display state of the device control screen 502, the user selects the device icon 501 of the air conditioner corresponding to the device control screen 502, or outside the display area of the device control screen 502 (such as , the display area of the floor plan 5200 located outside the display area of the device control screen 502 ), the touch panel control unit 102 detects the selection. Then, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 55 , the display control section 103 erases the device control screen 502 and returns from the display state of the device control screen 502 to the display state of the basic screen.
图56是表示在图52所示的布局图5200中根据实际的房间尺寸改变各区块的尺寸时的布局图5600的构成的图。FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the configuration of a floor plan 5600 when the size of each block is changed according to the actual room size in the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 52 .
在图56的左图中示出了第1楼层的布局图5601,在图56的右图中示出了第2楼层的布局图5602。The floor plan 5601 of the first floor is shown in the left diagram of FIG. 56 , and the floor plan 5602 of the second floor is shown in the right diagram of FIG. 56 .
在第1楼层的布局图5601中,对于各房间的尺寸,起居室最大,接着是厨房,接着是浴室和楼梯。因此,以该顺序显示各房间的尺寸。另外,在第2楼层的布局图5602中,也根据实际的房间的尺寸来显示各房间。在该情况下,将表示房间的实际尺寸的信息预先登记在房间信息6800中,显示控制单元103按照该信息来决定各房间的尺寸即可。In the floor plan 5601 of the first floor, the living room is the largest in size of each room, followed by the kitchen, followed by the bathroom and the stairs. Therefore, the dimensions of each room are displayed in that order. Also, in the floor plan 5602 on the second floor, each room is displayed based on the actual size of the room. In this case, information indicating the actual size of the room may be registered in room information 6800 in advance, and display control section 103 may determine the size of each room based on the information.
图57是表示采用了图56所示的布局图5600的基本画面的构成的图。在布局图5600中,各房间以与实际尺寸相应的尺寸来显示。另外,在各房间中显示有实际配置的设备200的设备图标501。FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen using the floor plan 5600 shown in FIG. 56 . In floor plan 5600, each room is displayed in a size corresponding to the actual size. In addition, a device icon 501 of the device 200 actually placed is displayed in each room.
如此,在布局图5600采用了将各房间由与实际的房间尺寸相应的尺寸来显示的方式的情况下,当使全部房间显示在显示器101内时,有可能会导致各房间被较小地显示、用户的操作会变得困难。因此,在图57中,设置有记为“显示另外的房间”的房间显示按钮5603。In this way, when floor plan 5600 adopts a method in which each room is displayed in a size corresponding to the actual room size, when all rooms are displayed on display 101, each room may be displayed smaller. , The user's operation will become difficult. Therefore, in FIG. 57, a room display button 5603 described as "display another room" is provided.
用户选择该房间显示按钮,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该选择时,显示控制单元103将画面显示切换到显示剩余房间的布局图5600。When the user selects the room display button and touch panel control section 102 detects the selection, display control section 103 switches the screen display to display floor plan 5600 of the remaining rooms.
在图57的例子中,布局图5600分成第1楼层的布局图5601和第2楼层的布局图5602。因此,当选择了房间显示按钮5603时,显示控制单元103将显示器101的显示切换为第2楼层的布局图5602。另外,该情况下,在第2楼层的布局图5602中也设置有房间显示按钮5603,因此当选择了该房间显示按钮5603时,显示控制单元103将显示器101的显示切换为第1楼层的布局图5601。In the example of FIG. 57 , the floor plan 5600 is divided into a floor plan 5601 for the first floor and a floor plan 5602 for the second floor. Therefore, when room display button 5603 is selected, display control section 103 switches the display on display 101 to floor plan 5602 of the second floor. In this case, the room display button 5603 is also provided on the floor plan 5602 of the second floor, so when the room display button 5603 is selected, the display control section 103 switches the display on the display 101 to the layout of the first floor. Figure 5601.
此外,在图57的例子中按楼层分开布局图,但本实施方式不限定于此。例如,在无法将第1楼层的布局图5601同时显示于显示器101的情况下,显示控制单元103也可以将第1楼层的布局图5601分割显示于显示器101。该情况下,当选择了房间显示按钮5603时,可以显示第1楼层的没被显示的那部分的布局图5601。In addition, in the example of FIG. 57, although the floor plan is divided into each floor, this embodiment is not limited to this. For example, when the floor plan 5601 of the first floor cannot be simultaneously displayed on the display 101 , the display control section 103 may divide and display the floor plan 5601 of the first floor on the display 101 . In this case, when the room display button 5603 is selected, the floor plan 5601 of the part of the first floor that is not displayed can be displayed.
另外,在能够将第1楼层的布局图5601和第2楼层的布局图5602同时显示于显示器101的情况下,显示控制单元103将第1楼层的布局图5601和第2楼层的布局图5602同时显示于显示器101即可。该情况下,房间显示按钮5603可从布局图5600中省略。In addition, when the floor plan 5601 of the first floor and the floor plan 5602 of the second floor can be simultaneously displayed on the display 101, the display control section 103 simultaneously displays the floor plan 5601 of the first floor and the floor plan 5602 of the second floor. It only needs to be displayed on the display 101 . In this case, the room display button 5603 may be omitted from the floor plan 5600 .
此外,在布局图5600中,轻敲了楼梯的情况下,显示控制单元103也可以使第1楼层的布局图5601和第2楼层的布局图5602相互切换。In addition, in the floor plan 5600, when the stairs are tapped, the display control section 103 may switch the floor plan 5601 of the first floor and the floor plan 5602 of the second floor.
图58是表示在作为布局图采用了图56所示的布局图5600的情况下设备控制画面502的显示状态的图。在图58中,与图54同样,显示了空调机的设备控制画面502。除此以外的内容与图54相同,因此省略说明。FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a display state of the device control screen 502 when the floor plan 5600 shown in FIG. 56 is adopted as the floor plan. In FIG. 58 , the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner is displayed similarly to FIG. 54 . The other contents are the same as those in FIG. 54 , and therefore description thereof will be omitted.
图59是在本发明的一个实施方式中表示又一模式的布局图5900的图。在图59的布局图5900中,将各房间由同一尺寸的区块来表示,这一点与布局图5200相同,但房间的配置方式不同。具体而言,在布局图5900中,在纵向上显示楼层序号,构成同一楼层的房间排列成一横排。在图59的例子中,因为家由第1楼层~第3楼层这3层楼层构成,因此在第1行配置有构成第3楼层的房间,在第2行配置有构成第2楼层的房间,在第3行配置有构成第1楼层的房间。另外,在各行的左端以1F、2F、3F的方式示出楼层序号。在布局图5900中,各房间位于哪一楼层一目了然。FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a floor plan 5900 of still another mode in one embodiment of the present invention. In the floor plan 5900 of FIG. 59 , each room is represented by blocks of the same size, which is the same as the floor plan 5200 , but the layout of the rooms is different. Specifically, in floor plan 5900 , floor numbers are displayed vertically, and rooms constituting the same floor are arranged in a horizontal row. In the example of FIG. 59, since the home is composed of three floors, the first floor to the third floor, the rooms constituting the third floor are arranged in the first row, and the rooms constituting the second floor are arranged in the second row. Rooms constituting the first floor are arranged in the third row. In addition, floor numbers are shown in the form of 1F, 2F, and 3F at the left end of each row. In the floor plan 5900, it is clear at a glance which floor each room is located on.
此外,在布局图5900中,也可以根据实际的房间尺寸来改变各房间的尺寸。另外,在布局图5900中无法将全部房间显示在显示器101的显示区域内的情况下,可以使布局图5900在横向上滚动,使得所希望的房间能够显示于显示器101。In addition, in the floor plan 5900, the size of each room may be changed according to the actual size of the room. Also, when all the rooms cannot be displayed on the floor plan 5900 within the display area of the display 101 , the floor plan 5900 can be scrolled in the horizontal direction so that desired rooms can be displayed on the display 101 .
例如,在第2楼层中还有另外的房间的情况下,触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户从左向右进行了划动操作时,显示控制单元103根据划动操作的量使构成第2楼层的房间或构成第1楼层~第3楼层的房间从左向右滚动即可。For example, if there is another room on the second floor, when the touch panel control section 102 detects that the user has swipe from left to right, the display control section 103 will display the display control section 103 to make the room on the second floor according to the amount of the swipe operation. or the rooms that make up the first to third floors can be scrolled from left to right.
图60是表示采用了图59所示的布局图5900的基本画面的构成的图。在基本画面中显示布局图5900。另外,在各房间内显示实际配置的设备200的设备图标501。设备一览显示变更按钮503是用于从基本画面向前述的设备一览显示画面(参照图24)切换画面显示的按钮。FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen using the floor plan 5900 shown in FIG. 59 . A floor plan 5900 is displayed on the basic screen. In addition, the device icon 501 of the device 200 actually placed is displayed in each room. The device list display change button 503 is a button for switching the screen display from the basic screen to the above-mentioned device list display screen (see FIG. 24 ).
图61是在采用了图59所示的布局图5900的情况下表示设备控制画面502的显示状态的图。在图60所示的基本画面中,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到用户选择了设备图标501时,显示控制单元103将与所选择的设备图标501对应的设备控制画面502显示于显示器101。在图61中,因为选择了空调机的设备图标501,所以空调机的设备控制画面502被重叠显示在布局图5900上。另外,显示控制单元103在显示设备控制画面502时,使显示于布局图5900的设备图标501配置在设备控制画面502的显示区域外。在图61的例子中,全部设备图标501以一横排配置在布局图5900的下侧。FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a display state of the device control screen 502 when the floor plan 5900 shown in FIG. 59 is used. In the basic screen shown in FIG. 60 , when touch panel control section 102 detects that the user has selected device icon 501 , display control section 103 displays device control screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501 on display 101 . In FIG. 61 , since the device icon 501 of the air conditioner is selected, the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner is displayed superimposed on the floor plan 5900 . Also, when displaying the device control screen 502 , the display control section 103 arranges the device icon 501 displayed on the floor plan 5900 outside the display area of the device control screen 502 . In the example shown in FIG. 61 , all device icons 501 are arranged in a row below the floor plan 5900 .
此外,在将设备图标501以一纵列配置在布局图5900的下侧时,显示控制单元103也可以根据特定的条件对设备图标501进行分组。例如,设备图标501可以按房间进行分组,也可以按设备200的种类进行分组,还可以按基于设备200种类的类目进行分组。In addition, when the device icons 501 are arranged in a column on the lower side of the floor plan 5900, the display control section 103 may also group the device icons 501 according to specific conditions. For example, the device icons 501 may be grouped by room, may be grouped by type of device 200 , or may be grouped by category based on the type of device 200 .
在图61的例子中,设备图标501配置在了布局图5900的下侧,但也可以以一横排配置在布局图5900的上侧,还可以以一纵列配置在布局图5900的左侧或右侧。In the example in FIG. 61 , the device icons 501 are arranged on the lower side of the floor plan 5900 , but they may also be arranged on the upper side of the floor plan 5900 in a horizontal row, or on the left side of the floor plan 5900 in a vertical row. or right side.
另外,在无法将全部设备图标501显示在布局图500的下侧的情况下,当向左方或右方对以一横排配置在下侧的设备图标501进行划动操作时,显示控制单元103根据该划动操作使设备图标501向左方或右方滚动,使非显示的设备图标501显示于显示器101内即可。In addition, when all the device icons 501 cannot be displayed on the lower side of the floor plan 500, when the device icons 501 arranged in a horizontal row on the lower side are swiped to the left or right, the display control section 103 The device icon 501 may be scrolled leftward or rightward according to the swipe operation, and the non-displayed device icon 501 may be displayed on the display 101 .
另外,在将设备图标501以一横排配置在布局图5900的下侧时,显示控制单元103也可以将用户选择的设备图标501以与没被选择的设备图标501不同的显示方式来显示。例如,所选择的设备图标501可以以与没被选择的设备图标501不同的颜色来显示,也可以比没被选择的设备图标501亮来显示,还可以以比没被选择的设备图标501浓的浓度来显示,另外可以按一定的周期进行闪烁。In addition, when the device icons 501 are arranged in a row below the floor plan 5900 , the display control section 103 may display the device icons 501 selected by the user in a different display form from the device icons 501 not selected. For example, the selected device icon 501 may be displayed in a color different from that of the non-selected device icon 501, or may be displayed brighter than the non-selected device icon 501, or may be displayed in a darker color than the non-selected device icon 501. In addition, it can flash according to a certain cycle.
另外,显示控制单元103也可以使设备图标501的排列滚动,以使由用户选择的设备图标501位于图标列的显眼的位置(例如,最左、中央、最右)。In addition, the display control section 103 may scroll the arrangement of the device icons 501 so that the device icon 501 selected by the user is located at a conspicuous position (for example, the leftmost, the center, or the rightmost) of the icon row.
另外,在显示设备控制画面502时,显示控制单元103也可以如图12所示将全部设备图标501配置在椭圆的外周上。In addition, when the device control screen 502 is displayed, the display control section 103 may arrange all the device icons 501 on the outer periphery of the ellipse as shown in FIG. 12 .
此外,在布局图5900中,因为全部楼层的房间同时显示于显示器101,所以有可能会导致各房间被较小地显示、用户的操作会变得困难。因此,显示控制单元103也可以根据用户的操作来放大显示布局图5900。具体而言,用户进行在布局图5900中放大某房间的操作,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该操作时,显示控制单元103以与放大的量相应的放大率将该房间放大显示在显示器101上即可。Also, in the floor plan 5900 , since rooms on all floors are simultaneously displayed on the display 101 , each room may be displayed in a small size, which may make the user's operation difficult. Therefore, the display control unit 103 can also enlarge and display the layout diagram 5900 according to the user's operation. Specifically, when the user performs an operation of enlarging a certain room in floor plan 5900 , and touch panel control unit 102 detects this operation, display control unit 103 displays the room on display 101 in an enlarged manner at a magnification rate corresponding to the enlarged amount. That's it.
图62是表示在布局图5900中放大显示了某房间的布局图的图。如图62所示,显示控制单元103也可以将以平面方式表示该房间的形状的俯视图重叠显示于布局图5900。或者也可以切换为俯视图来显示。由此,用户能够在图60所示的布局图5900中把握家内的房间的构成和配置于各房间的设备200,能够在图62所示的布局图5900中把握放大了的房间中的设备200的实际配置位置。FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a floor plan of a certain room enlarged and displayed in the floor plan 5900 . As shown in FIG. 62 , display control section 103 may superimpose and display a plan view showing the shape of the room in a planar manner on floor plan 5900 . Or you can switch to a top view to display it. Thus, the user can grasp the configuration of the rooms in the home and the devices 200 arranged in each room in the floor plan 5900 shown in FIG. The actual configuration location.
此外,在图60所示的没被放大显示的布局图5900中,显示控制单元103无需使配置在房间内的全部设备200的设备图标501显示,可以仅使一部分设备图标501显示。In addition, in the floor plan 5900 shown in FIG. 60 which is not enlarged and displayed, the display control section 103 does not need to display the device icons 501 of all the devices 200 arranged in the room, and may display only a part of the device icons 501 .
在该情况下,显示控制单元103将用户频繁使用的一个或多个(例如两个)设备图标501显示于布局图5900即可。或者,显示控制单元103也可以在没被放大显示的布局图5900中不显示设备图标501。由此,能够防止在没被放大显示的布局图5900中显示的设备图标501的个数增多、布局图5900的视觉识别性降低。In this case, the display control unit 103 may display one or more (for example, two) device icons 501 frequently used by the user on the floor plan 5900 . Alternatively, display control section 103 may not display device icon 501 in floor plan 5900 that is not enlarged and displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the number of device icons 501 displayed on the floor plan 5900 that is not enlarged and displayed from increasing and the visibility of the floor plan 5900 from being reduced.
图63是在图62所示的放大显示的布局图5900中表示设备控制画面502的显示状态的图。在图63中,与图54同样,显示了空调机的设备控制画面502。另外,在图63中,在俯视图的左侧且起居室的区块内仅显示了配置在放大显示的房间(起居室)的设备图标501。在图62的例子中,在俯视图内的起居室中显示有空调机、照明设备以及电视机的设备图标501,由用户选择了空调机的设备图标501。因此,这些设备图标501以一纵列显示在俯视图的左侧。FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the display state of the device control screen 502 in the enlarged-display floor plan 5900 shown in FIG. 62 . In FIG. 63 , the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner is displayed similarly to FIG. 54 . In addition, in FIG. 63 , only the device icons 501 placed in the enlargedly displayed room (living room) are displayed on the left side of the plan view and within the living room block. In the example of FIG. 62 , device icons 501 of an air conditioner, a lighting device, and a television are displayed in the living room in the top view, and the device icon 501 of the air conditioner is selected by the user. Therefore, these device icons 501 are displayed in a column on the left side of the top view.
在放大显示了某房间的情况下,用户对配置在该房间内的设备200进行操作的可能性高。另外,在放大显示了某房间的情况下,该房间以外的设备图标501不显示于显示器101。因此,若在用户选择了某设备图标501时使配置在其他房间的设备图标501显示在俯视图的左侧,则会让用户产生不适感。When a certain room is enlarged and displayed, there is a high possibility that the user operates the device 200 placed in the room. In addition, when a certain room is enlarged and displayed, the device icons 501 other than the room are not displayed on the display 101 . Therefore, if a device icon 501 arranged in another room is displayed on the left side of the plan view when the user selects a certain device icon 501 , the user will feel uncomfortable.
因此,在放大显示了某房间的情况下,显示控制单元103仅使配置在该房间的设备200的设备图标501以一纵列显示在俯视图的左侧。此外,在图64的例子中,设备图标501显示在了俯视图的左侧,但也可以以一纵列显示在俯视图的右侧,还可以以一横排显示在俯视图的上侧或下侧。Therefore, when a certain room is enlarged and displayed, display control section 103 displays only device icons 501 of devices 200 arranged in the room in a single column on the left side of the plan view. In addition, in the example of FIG. 64 , the device icon 501 is displayed on the left side of the top view, but it may also be displayed on the right side of the top view in a vertical row, or may be displayed in a horizontal row on the upper or lower side of the top view.
图64是表示从基本画面的显示状态向设备控制画面502的显示状态的画面转换的图。如图64的左上图所示,在显示了没被放大显示的布局图5900的基本画面中,设为由用户轻敲了例如空调机的设备图标501。于是,如图64的右上图所示,显示控制单元103使空调机的设备控制画面502重叠显示在该基本画面上。另一方面,在图64的右上图所示的画面中,由用户轻敲设备控制画面502以外的布局图5900上的区域、或者轻敲空调机的设备图标501时,显示控制单元103使画面显示返回到图64的左上图所示的基本画面。FIG. 64 is a diagram showing screen transition from the display state of the basic screen to the display state of the device control screen 502 . As shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 64 , it is assumed that the user taps, for example, an equipment icon 501 of an air conditioner on a basic screen displaying a floor plan 5900 that is not enlarged. Then, as shown in the upper right diagram of FIG. 64 , the display control section 103 superimposes and displays the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner on the basic screen. On the other hand, in the screen shown in the upper right diagram of FIG. The display returns to the basic screen shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 64 .
另外,假设在图64的左上图所示的基本画面中由用户放大操作了起居室。于是,如图64的左下图所示,显示控制单元103在使起居室的区块放大的同时在被放大的区块内重叠显示具有与放大后的区块的尺寸相应的尺寸的起居室的俯视图。另外,假设在图64的左下图中由用户缩小操作了起居室。于是,显示控制单元103使画面显示返回到图64的左上图所示的基本画面。In addition, it is assumed that the user zooms in on the living room on the basic screen shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 64 . Then, as shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 64 , the display control section 103 enlarges the block of the living room and superimposes and displays the area of the living room having a size corresponding to the size of the enlarged block in the enlarged block. top view. In addition, it is assumed that the living room is zoomed out by the user in the lower left diagram of FIG. 64 . Then, the display control section 103 returns the screen display to the basic screen shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 64 .
另外,在图64的左下图所示的基本画面中,当选择了例如空调机的设备图标501时,如图64的右下图所示,显示控制单元103使空调机的设备控制画面502重叠显示在俯视图上。另外,在图64的右下图中,由用户轻敲设备控制画面502以外的布局图5900上的区域、或轻敲空调机的设备图标501时,显示控制单元103使画面显示返回到图64的左下图所示的画面。In addition, in the basic screen shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 64, when the device icon 501 of an air conditioner is selected, for example, as shown in the lower right diagram of FIG. displayed on top view. In addition, in the lower right diagram of FIG. 64 , when the user taps an area on the floor plan 5900 other than the device control screen 502 or taps the device icon 501 of the air conditioner, the display control section 103 returns the screen display to that shown in FIG. 64 . screen shown in the lower left figure of .
图65是在采用了图59所示的布局图5900的基本画面中表示采用不显示设备图标501的方式时的基本画面的构成的图。在图65所示的方式中,仅显示构成各楼层的房间,省略了设备图标501的显示。FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the configuration of the basic screen when the device icon 501 is not displayed among the basic screens using the floor plan 5900 shown in FIG. 59 . In the form shown in FIG. 65, only the rooms constituting each floor are displayed, and the display of the device icons 501 is omitted.
图66是在采用了不显示设备图标501的基本画面的情况下表示从基本画面的显示状态向设备控制画面502的显示状态的画面转换的图。假设在图66的左上图所示的基本画面中用户放大操作了例如起居室。于是,如图66的左下图所示,显示控制单元103放大显示起居室的区块,并且将起居室的俯视图重叠显示于被放大显示的区块。假设在图66的左下图所示的画面中由用户轻敲了例如空调机的设备图标501。于是,如图66的右下图所示,显示控制单元103使空调机的设备控制画面502重叠显示于起居室的俯视图,将起居室的设备图标501以一纵列配置在起居室的俯视图的左侧。另外,在图66的右下图中,由用户轻敲设备控制画面502的显示区域外且布局图5900上的区域时,显示控制单元103使画面显示返回到图66的左下图所示的画面。FIG. 66 is a diagram showing screen transition from the display state of the basic screen to the display state of the device control screen 502 when the basic screen not displaying the device icon 501 is adopted. Assume that the user has zoomed in on, for example, the living room on the basic screen shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 66 . Then, as shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 66 , the display control unit 103 enlarges and displays the block of the living room, and superimposes and displays the top view of the living room on the enlarged and displayed block. Assume that the user taps, for example, the device icon 501 of an air conditioner on the screen shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 66 . Then, as shown in the lower right diagram of FIG. 66 , the display control unit 103 superimposes and displays the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner on the top view of the living room, and arranges the device icons 501 of the living room in a vertical row on the top view of the living room. left side. In addition, in the lower right diagram of FIG. 66 , when the user taps an area on the floor plan 5900 outside the display area of the device control screen 502 , the display control unit 103 returns the screen display to the screen shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 66 . .
图67是表示采用了图52所示的布局图5200的情况下的家庭信息2700的构成的图。如图67所示,家庭信息6400具备布局图5200、房间信息6800以及服务器管理的设备列表4700。因为在布局图5200中事先决定了房间的显示位置,因此在家庭信息6400中省略了设于家庭信息2700中的顶点信息2800。FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the structure of household information 2700 when the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 52 is adopted. As shown in FIG. 67 , home information 6400 includes floor plan 5200 , room information 6800 , and device list 4700 managed by the server. Since the display positions of the rooms are determined in advance in the floor plan 5200 , the apex information 2800 provided in the home information 2700 is omitted from the home information 6400 .
布局图5200是以例如位图形式表示图52所示的布局图5200的图像数据。或者,也可以是规定用于表示布局图5200的颜色、形状、大小等的信息。房间信息6800是用于根据布局图5200来决定房间的区域的信息。The floor plan 5200 is, for example, image data representing the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 52 in the form of a bitmap. Alternatively, it may be information specifying the color, shape, size, etc. for displaying floor plan 5200 . Room information 6800 is information for determining the area of a room based on floor plan 5200 .
图68是表示图67所示的房间信息6800的构成的图。如图68所示,房间信息6800具备房间ID6801、房间类型6802、楼层6803以及显示位置6804。房间ID6801是用于识别布局图5200上的房间的标识符。房间类型6802表示房间的种类。楼层6803表示配置房间的楼层。显示位置6804表示布局图5200上的房间的配置位置。Fig. 68 is a diagram showing the structure of room information 6800 shown in Fig. 67 . As shown in FIG. 68 , room information 6800 includes room ID 6801 , room type 6802 , floor 6803 , and display position 6804 . Room ID 6801 is an identifier for identifying a room on floor plan 5200 . The room type 6802 indicates the type of room. A floor 6803 indicates a floor on which a room is arranged. Display position 6804 indicates the arrangement position of the room on floor plan 5200 .
图69是表示房间信息6800中的显示位置6804与布局图5200的对应例的图。如图69所示,布局图5200的各区块例如按第1行第1列的区块为第1区(mass)、第1行第2列的区块为第2区、第1行第3列的区块为第3区,第2行第1列目的区块为第4区、…规定了顺序。FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of correspondence between display positions 6804 in room information 6800 and floor plans 5200 . As shown in FIG. 69 , for each block of the floor plan 5200, for example, the block in the first row and the first column is the first block (mass), the block in the first row and the second column is the second block, and the block in the first row and the third column is the mass. The block in the column is the third area, the target block in the second row and the first column is the fourth area, . . . The sequence is prescribed.
例如,房间ID6801为A的房间是显示位置6804为“1层的第1区”。因此,如图69所示,显示控制单元103解析为第1楼层的布局图5201的第1区(第1行第1列)的区块是起居室。For example, a room whose room ID 6801 is A has a display position 6804 of "the first area on the first floor". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69 , the display control section 103 analyzes that the block in the first area (the first row and the first column) of the floor plan 5201 on the first floor is the living room.
此外,在图69的例子中,在横向上配置了3列区块,因此第2行第1列成为第4区,第3行第1列目成为第7区。但是,这只不过是一个例子,例如,在横向上排列了4列的区块的情况下,可根据横向的区块的个数来适当变更区号的顺序与区块的配置位置的对应关系,以使得第2行第1列成为第5区,第3行第1列成为第9区。In addition, in the example of FIG. 69 , three columns of blocks are arranged in the lateral direction, so the second row, first column is the fourth area, and the third row, first column is the seventh area. However, this is only an example. For example, in the case of horizontally arranging blocks in four columns, the corresponding relationship between the order of the block codes and the arrangement positions of the blocks can be appropriately changed according to the number of horizontal blocks. So that row 2, column 1 becomes area 5, row 3, column 1 becomes area 9.
图70是表示采用了图52所示的布局图5200的情况下的服务器300管理的设备列表4700的构成的图。布局图5200不需要表示设备200在房间中的配置位置。因此,在图70所示的设备列表4700中,与图34不同,在配置4704中登记有房间类型6802。除此以外,图70所示的设备列表4700与图34所示的设备列表4700相同。例如,设备ID4701为A的空调机配置在起居室,因此在配置4704中登记有“起居室”。此外,在图70的例子中,作为配置4704采用了房间类型6802,但只要房间是确定的,则也可以登记其他信息。例如,作为配置4704也可以采用房间ID6801。FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list 4700 managed by the server 300 when the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 52 is adopted. The floor plan 5200 does not need to represent the arrangement position of the device 200 in the room. Therefore, in device list 4700 shown in FIG. 70 , unlike FIG. 34 , room type 6802 is registered in configuration 4704 . Except for this, the device list 4700 shown in FIG. 70 is the same as the device list 4700 shown in FIG. 34 . For example, since the air conditioner whose device ID 4701 is A is arranged in a living room, "living room" is registered in the arrangement 4704 . In addition, in the example of FIG. 70, the room type 6802 is adopted as the configuration 4704, but other information may be registered as long as the room is determined. For example, room ID 6801 can also be used as configuration 4704 .
图71是在采用了图52所示的布局图5200的情况下表示家庭控制器100管理的设备列表3100的构成的图。因与图70的设备列表4700相同的理由,图71的设备列表3100也登记了房间类型6802来作为配置3104,其他与图35所示的设备列表3100相同。此外,在图71中,作为配置3104也可以采用房间ID6801。FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the structure of the device list 3100 managed by the home controller 100 when the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 52 is adopted. For the same reason as the device list 4700 of FIG. 70 , the device list 3100 of FIG. 71 also registers the room type 6802 as the configuration 3104 , and is otherwise the same as the device list 3100 shown in FIG. 35 . In addition, in FIG. 71 , a room ID 6801 can also be used as the arrangement 3104 .
接着,如图62所示,在布局图5900的基本画面中放大操作了某房间的情况下,对采用了表示该房间的俯视图的方式的情况下的设备列表3100进行说明。该情况下,在图68所示的房间信息6800中,设置房间的俯视图的项目即可。而且,在房间的俯视图的项目中登记相应房间的俯视图的图像数据即可。另外,对于房间的俯视图,如图33所示,在房间的例如左端设置原点,在横向设定X轴,在纵向设定Y轴,将房间的各位置由X、Y的坐标来表示即可。Next, as shown in FIG. 62 , when a certain room is zoomed in on the basic screen of the floor plan 5900 , the device list 3100 in the case where a plan view of the room is used will be described. In this case, the item of the plan view of the room may be provided in the room information 6800 shown in FIG. 68 . Furthermore, it is only necessary to register the image data of the bird's-eye view of the corresponding room in the item of the bird's-eye view of the room. In addition, for the top view of the room, as shown in FIG. 33, the origin is set at the left end of the room, the X axis is set in the horizontal direction, and the Y axis is set in the vertical direction, and each position of the room can be expressed by X and Y coordinates .
另一方面,在图71所示的设备列表3100的配置3104中,除了房间类型6802以外,还登记房间的坐标。由此,显示控制单元103根据配置3104的内容,能够判别应该将设备图标501配置在表示房间的俯视图上的哪个位置。On the other hand, in the arrangement 3104 of the device list 3100 shown in FIG. 71 , in addition to the room type 6802, the coordinates of the room are also registered. In this way, display control section 103 can determine at which position on the plan view showing the room the device icon 501 should be placed based on the content of arrangement 3104 .
此外,在本实施方式中,服务器300不是必须的构成要素,也可以由家庭控制器100来管理服务器300所管理的各种信息(家庭信息2700和/或设备200的状态等)。由此,即使没有服务器300,也能够实现上述的实施方式。在该情况下,家庭控制器100不需要管理所有家的信息,仅管理家庭控制器100控制的设备200和与配置这些设备200的家有关的信息即可。In addition, in this embodiment, the server 300 is not an essential component, and various information managed by the server 300 (family information 2700 and/or status of the device 200, etc.) may be managed by the home controller 100 . Accordingly, the above-described embodiment can be realized without the server 300 . In this case, the home controller 100 does not need to manage information on all the homes, but only the devices 200 controlled by the home controller 100 and the information on the homes where these devices 200 are placed.
(空调机的控制)(control of air conditioner)
以上,说明了不限定对象设备的种类的技术方案的实施方式。以下,详述对象设备为空调机(空调器)的技术方案的实施方式。In the above, the embodiment of the technical solution that does not limit the type of the target device has been described. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the technical solution in which the target device is an air conditioner (air conditioner) will be described in detail.
如图2所示,空调机201是设备200的一例。在空调机201的控制例中,家庭控制器100和服务器300使用图101所示的房间信息33100来替代图32所示的房间信息2900。另外,家庭控制器使用图102所示的设备列表33200A、33200B来替代图35所示的设备列表3100。As shown in FIG. 2 , the air conditioner 201 is an example of the equipment 200 . In the control example of the air conditioner 201, the home controller 100 and the server 300 use the room information 33100 shown in FIG. 101 instead of the room information 2900 shown in FIG. 32 . In addition, the home controller uses device lists 33200A, 33200B shown in FIG. 102 instead of device list 3100 shown in FIG. 35 .
空调机201的控制执行单元211从家庭控制器100和/或服务器300接收空调机201的控制命令,按照所接收到的控制命令来控制空调机201。作为控制命令,采用设定空调机201的风量、风向、工作模式(冷风或暖风)以及设定温度等的命令。另外,控制执行单元211将控制命令的执行结果和/或空调机201的状态发送到家庭控制器100和/或服务器300。The control execution unit 211 of the air conditioner 201 receives a control command of the air conditioner 201 from the home controller 100 and/or the server 300, and controls the air conditioner 201 according to the received control command. As the control commands, commands for setting the air volume, air direction, operation mode (cold air or warm air), set temperature, and the like of the air conditioner 201 are used. In addition, the control execution unit 211 transmits the execution result of the control command and/or the state of the air conditioner 201 to the home controller 100 and/or the server 300 .
状态管理单元212管理空调机201的状态。在此,状态管理单元212管理例如空调机201的开启、关闭、设定温度、风向、风量、工作模式(例如暖风、冷风、送风、除湿等)等来作为空调机201的状态。存储单元214存储关于状态管理单元212管理的空调机201的状态的信息。通信控制单元217控制空调机201和家庭控制器100间的通信、设备200和服务器300间的通信。State management unit 212 manages the state of air conditioner 201 . Here, the status management unit 212 manages the status of the air conditioner 201 such as on, off, set temperature, wind direction, air volume, and operation mode (such as heating, cooling, blowing, dehumidifying, etc.) of the air conditioner 201 . The storage unit 214 stores information on the status of the air conditioner 201 managed by the status management unit 212 . Communication control unit 217 controls communication between air conditioner 201 and home controller 100 and communication between device 200 and server 300 .
图72是表示基本画面的显示状态与作为空调机201的设备控制画面502的空调机控制画面30102的显示状态的转换的图。图72的左图表示基本画面。基本画面与用图5示出的基本画面是同样的。在图72的左图所示的基本画面中,用户轻敲作为空调机201的设备图标501的空调机图标30101,触摸面板控制单元102检测该轻敲。于是,显示控制单元103如图72的右图所示将空调机控制画面30102重叠显示于布局图500。FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a transition between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the air conditioner control screen 30102 which is the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner 201 . The left diagram of Fig. 72 shows the basic screen. The basic screen is the same as the basic screen shown in FIG. 5 . On the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 72 , the user taps the air conditioner icon 30101 which is the device icon 501 of the air conditioner 201 , and the touch panel control section 102 detects the tap. Then, the display control section 103 superimposes and displays the air conditioner control screen 30102 on the floor plan 500 as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 72 .
另外,显示控制单元103将表示当前所设定的空调机201的左右风向的风向标记30105重叠地显示在控制对象区域30103。在此,左右风向是指从正上方观看控制对象区域30103时的空调机201的风向。In addition, display control section 103 superimposes and displays wind direction mark 30105 indicating the left and right wind direction of air conditioner 201 currently set in control target area 30103 . Here, the horizontal wind direction refers to the wind direction of the air conditioner 201 when the control target area 30103 is viewed from directly above.
在图72的右图的例子中,由于空调机201的左右风向为右斜下方向,所以显示了朝着右斜下侧的箭头的图形来作为风向标记30105。由此,用户能够直观地识别当前所设定的空调机201的左右风向。In the example of the right diagram in FIG. 72 , since the left and right airflow direction of the air conditioner 201 is obliquely downward to the right, a graphic of an arrow pointing obliquely downward to the right is displayed as an airflow direction mark 30105 . Thus, the user can intuitively recognize the currently set left and right wind direction of the air conditioner 201 .
另外,显示控制单元103在控制对象区域30103以外的布局图500上的区域重叠地显示灰色层。由此,控制对象区域30103显示得比其他区域亮,能够使用户明显地意识到控制对象区域30103的布局,能实现具有临场感的操作。In addition, display control section 103 displays gray layers superimposed on areas on floor plan 500 other than control target area 30103 . As a result, the control target area 30103 is displayed brighter than other areas, the user can be clearly aware of the layout of the control target area 30103 , and operations with a sense of presence can be realized.
进而,显示控制单元103在控制对象区域30103以外的布局图500上的区域重叠地显示空调机控制画面30102。由此,能够防止风向标记30105被空调机控制画面30102盖住。其结果,能够防止用户无法确认空调机201的左右风向而发生误操作。Furthermore, display control section 103 displays air conditioner control screen 30102 superimposed on areas on floor plan 500 other than control target area 30103 . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the wind direction mark 30105 from being covered by the air conditioner control screen 30102 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from being unable to confirm the left and right wind direction of the air conditioner 201 and thereby preventing erroneous operations from occurring.
另外,显示控制单元103在使空调机控制画面30102显示时,使在图72的左图中配置在布局图500上的全部设备图标501退避到布局图500的区域外、显示器101的显示区域内。在图72的例子中,设备图标501以一纵列显示在布局图500的左侧。由此,能防止设备图标501隐藏到空调机控制画面30102之下,能够减少选择接下来的设备图标501时的操作数和处理步骤数。Also, when displaying the air conditioner control screen 30102, the display control section 103 retracts all the device icons 501 arranged on the floor plan 500 in the left diagram of FIG. . In the example of FIG. 72 , device icons 501 are displayed in a column on the left side of the floor plan 500 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the device icon 501 from being hidden under the air conditioner control screen 30102, and it is possible to reduce the number of operations and the number of processing steps when selecting the next device icon 501.
此外,在图72的右图的例子中,所选择的空调机图标30101显示在最上方,配置在用户容易视觉识别的位置。In addition, in the example of the right figure of FIG. 72, the selected air conditioner icon 30101 is displayed at the top, and it arrange|positions in the position which a user can visually recognize easily.
另一方面,在图72的右图中,当用户轻敲空调机控制画面30102以外的布局图500上的区域,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲时,显示控制单元103从图72的右图的显示画面切换到图72的左图的基本画面。或者,在图72的右图中,当用户轻敲空调机图标30101,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲时,显示控制单元103从图72的右图的显示画面切换到图72的左图的基本画面。On the other hand, in the right diagram of FIG. 72, when the user taps an area on the floor plan 500 other than the air conditioner control screen 30102, and the touch panel control section 102 detects the tap, the display control section 103 changes the display control section 103 from the screen shown in FIG. The display screen shown on the right is switched to the basic screen shown on the left in FIG. 72 . Alternatively, in the right diagram of FIG. 72, when the user taps the air conditioner icon 30101 and the touch panel control unit 102 detects the tap, the display control unit 103 switches from the display screen of the right diagram of FIG. 72 to the left diagram of FIG. The base screen of the graph.
图73是表示输入了变更空调机201的左右风向的操作时的画面转换的图。图73的左图与图72的右图相同。设为用户操作空调机控制画面30102而输入使空调机201的左右风向变更的操作,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该操作。于是,显示控制单元103根据操作量使风向标记30105的方向变更。并且,设备控制单元106生成用于将左右风向变更为与操作量相应的方向的控制命令,并发送到网络。FIG. 73 is a diagram showing screen transition when an operation to change the left and right wind direction of the air conditioner 201 is input. The left diagram of FIG. 73 is the same as the right diagram of FIG. 72 . It is assumed that the user operates the air conditioner control screen 30102 to input an operation to change the left and right wind direction of the air conditioner 201 , and the touch panel control section 102 detects the operation. Then, display control section 103 changes the direction of wind direction mark 30105 according to the amount of operation. Then, the device control unit 106 generates a control command for changing the left and right wind direction to a direction corresponding to the operation amount, and sends it to the network.
在图73的右图的例子中,在控制对象区域30103中,空调机201的左右风向从右斜下方向变更为右斜上方向。因此,显示控制单元103将风向标记30105的朝向变更为右斜上方向。In the example shown in the right diagram of FIG. 73 , in the control target area 30103 , the left and right wind direction of the air conditioner 201 is changed from a right-down direction to a right-up direction. Therefore, display control section 103 changes the orientation of wind direction mark 30105 to an upward oblique direction.
另一方面,当控制对象区域30103中的空调机201的左右风向从右斜上方向变更为右斜下方向时,显示控制单元103如图73的左图所示将风向标记30105的朝向变更为右斜下方向。On the other hand, when the left and right wind direction of the air conditioner 201 in the control target area 30103 is changed from obliquely upward to downward obliquely to the right, the display control unit 103 changes the direction of the wind direction mark 30105 as shown in the left diagram of FIG. Diagonally down to the right.
如此,表示空调机201的左右风向的风向标记30105显示在控制对象区域30103,因此能够防止用户错误地操作设置在与控制对象区域30103不同的房间中的设备。In this way, since the wind direction mark 30105 indicating the left and right wind direction of the air conditioner 201 is displayed in the control target area 30103 , it is possible to prevent the user from erroneously operating a device installed in a room different from the control target area 30103 .
如图102所示,在设备列表33200B中预先登记有空调机201的正面方向33209。在此,正面方向33209表示在布局图500中空调机的正面朝着哪个方向。在设备列表33200B的例子中,正面方向33209通过在布局图500中水平方向(X轴)与空调机201的正面的法线所成的角度来规定。当由触摸面板控制单元102检测到变更左右风向的操作时,设备控制单元106根据操作量确定左右风向的变更量,生成用于使当前所设定的左右风向变更所确定的变更量的控制命令,并发送到网络。As shown in FIG. 102 , the front direction 33209 of the air conditioner 201 is registered in advance in the device list 33200B. Here, the front direction 33209 shows which direction the front of the air conditioner faces in the floor plan 500 . In the example of the device list 33200B, the front direction 33209 is specified by the angle formed by the horizontal direction (X-axis) and the normal line of the front of the air conditioner 201 in the floor plan 500 . When an operation to change the left and right wind direction is detected by the touch panel control unit 102, the device control unit 106 determines the change amount of the left and right wind direction according to the operation amount, and generates a control command for changing the currently set left and right wind direction by the determined change amount , and send to the network.
另一方面,设备管理单元105将由设备控制单元106变更后的左右风向登记到设备列表33200B的风向方向33210。并且,显示控制单元103使风向标记30105的方向变更为所登记的风向方向33210。On the other hand, device management section 105 registers the left and right wind directions changed by device control section 106 in wind direction 33210 of device list 33200B. Then, display control section 103 changes the direction of wind direction mark 30105 to registered wind direction 33210 .
例如,在图73的左图所示的控制对象区域30103中,空调机201的正面方向为0度(与水平方向平行),当前的左右风向被设定为-45度。并且,设为由用户输入了将空调机201的左右风向变更为+45度的操作。在此,左右风向设为随着相对于X轴的逆时针旋转的角度增大而正向增大,随着相对于X轴的顺时针旋转的角度增大而负向增大。于是,显示控制单元103如图73的右图所示使风向标记30105的方向变更到+45度的方向。For example, in the control target area 30103 shown in the left diagram of FIG. 73 , the front direction of the air conditioner 201 is 0 degrees (parallel to the horizontal direction), and the current left and right wind direction is set to -45 degrees. In addition, it is assumed that the user inputs an operation to change the left-right airflow direction of the air conditioner 201 to +45 degrees. Here, the horizontal wind direction increases positively as the angle of counterclockwise rotation with respect to the X-axis increases, and increases negatively as the angle of clockwise rotation with respect to the X-axis increases. Then, display control section 103 changes the direction of wind direction mark 30105 to the direction of +45 degrees as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 73 .
此外,显示控制单元103除了左右风向之外,还可以使风向标记30105具有报知风量的功能。在图73的例子中,风向标记30105各自的长度相同,通过朝着相同方向的平行的3根箭头来表示。因此,显示控制单元103采用例如随着空调机201的风量增大而使箭头的根数阶段性增加、随着风量减小而使箭头的根数阶段性减少的显示方式即可。In addition, the display control unit 103 can make the wind direction mark 30105 have the function of notifying the air volume in addition to the left and right wind directions. In the example of FIG. 73, each wind direction mark 30105 has the same length and is represented by three parallel arrows pointing in the same direction. Therefore, the display control section 103 may adopt a display method in which, for example, the number of arrows increases stepwise as the air volume of the air conditioner 201 increases, and the number of arrows decreases stepwise as the air volume decreases.
由此,用户通过风向标记30105,不仅能够识别左右风向,还能够快速地识别风量。另外,通过使风向标记30105具有风量的报知功能,不需要在显示画面显示与风向标记30105不同的报知风量的标记,能够在使显示画面的视觉识别性提高的同时减少显示控制的处理步骤。As a result, the user can quickly recognize not only the left and right wind directions but also the air volume through the wind direction mark 30105 . In addition, by providing the wind direction mark 30105 with the air volume reporting function, it is not necessary to display a different wind direction mark 30105 on the display screen to report the air flow rate, and the display control processing steps can be reduced while improving the visibility of the display screen. .
图74是表示在采用了将关于空调机201的工作状态的信息显示在控制对象区域30103的方式的情况下的基本画面的显示状态与空调机控制画面30102的显示状态的画面转换的图。在图74的左图所示的基本画面中,当用户选择空调机图标30101,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该选择时,显示控制单元103将画面显示切换为图74的右图所示的空调机控制画面30102的显示状态。74 is a diagram showing screen transitions between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the air conditioner control screen 30102 when a method of displaying information on the operating state of the air conditioner 201 in the control target area 30103 is adopted. In the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 74 , when the user selects the air conditioner icon 30101 and the touch panel control unit 102 detects the selection, the display control unit 103 switches the screen display to the air conditioner icon shown in the right diagram of FIG. 74 . Display status of machine control screen 30102.
在该情况下,显示控制单元103使与空调机201的工作状态相应的信息显示在控制对象区域30103。在此,作为工作状态,例如采用空调机的设定温度。并且,显示控制单元103通过以与设定温度相应的颜色来显示控制对象区域30103,从而显示关于工作状态的信息。In this case, display control section 103 displays information corresponding to the operating state of air conditioner 201 in control target area 30103 . Here, as the operating state, for example, the set temperature of the air conditioner is used. And, the display control unit 103 displays the information on the working state by displaying the control object area 30103 in a color corresponding to the set temperature.
另一方面,在图74的右图中,当由用户选择空调机控制画面30102以外的布局图500上的区域时,显示控制单元103从图74的右图所示的空调机控制画面30102的显示状态切换到图74的左图所示的基本画面的显示状态。或者,在图74的右图中,当用户轻敲空调机图标30101,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲时,显示控制单元103从图74的右图的显示画面切换到图74的左图的基本画面。On the other hand, in the right diagram of FIG. 74 , when the user selects an area on the floor plan 500 other than the air conditioner control screen 30102 , the display control unit 103 selects from the air conditioner control screen 30102 shown in the right diagram of FIG. 74 . The display state switches to the display state of the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 74 . Alternatively, in the right diagram of FIG. 74, when the user taps the air conditioner icon 30101 and the touch panel control unit 102 detects the tap, the display control unit 103 switches from the display screen of the right diagram of FIG. 74 to the left diagram of FIG. The base screen of the graph.
图75是表示高温设定时的空调机控制画面30102的显示状态的构成的图。图76是表示低温设定时的空调机控制画面30102的显示状态的构成的图。FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the configuration of the display state of the air conditioner control screen 30102 at the time of high temperature setting. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the configuration of the display state of the air conditioner control screen 30102 at the time of low temperature setting.
如图75、图76所示,显示控制单元103在空调机201的设定温度为高温的情况下和空调机201的设定温度为低温的情况下用不同的颜色显示控制对象区域30103。As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 , the display control unit 103 displays the control target area 30103 in different colors when the set temperature of the air conditioner 201 is high and when the set temperature of the air conditioner 201 is low.
在此,显示控制单元103变更控制对象区域30103的颜色以使得随着设定温度变高而暖色系的颜色(例如红色、橙色)的程度变强即可。并且,当设定温度低于某温度时,显示控制单元103将控制对象区域30103切换到冷色系的颜色(例如蓝色、淡蓝色),变更控制对象区域30103的颜色以使得随着设定温度变低而冷色系的颜色的程度变强即可。Here, the display control section 103 may change the color of the control target area 30103 so that the warm color (for example, red, orange) becomes stronger as the set temperature increases. And, when the set temperature is lower than a certain temperature, the display control unit 103 switches the control target area 30103 to a cool color (such as blue, light blue), and changes the color of the control target area 30103 so that as the setting The temperature becomes lower and the degree of the color of the cool color system becomes stronger.
或者,显示控制单元103也可以在空调机201的工作模式被设定为暖风的情况下用暖色系的颜色显示控制对象区域30103,在工作模式被设定为冷风的情况下用冷色系的颜色显示控制对象区域30103,在空调机201的工作模式被设定为通常的情况下用暖色系与冷色系的中间色系的颜色(例如绿色)显示控制对象区域30103。Alternatively, the display control unit 103 may also display the control object area 30103 in a warm color when the operating mode of the air conditioner 201 is set to warm air, and display the control object area 30103 in a cool color when the operating mode is set to cool. The control target area 30103 is displayed in color, and the control target area 30103 is displayed in a color (for example, green) intermediate between warm and cool colors when the operation mode of the air conditioner 201 is set to normal.
或者,显示控制单元103也可以在空调机201的工作模式被设定为暖风的情况下在控制对象区域30103重叠地显示半透明的暖色系层,随着设定温度变高而将暖色系层的透明度设定为变低,随着设定温度变低而将暖色系层的透明度设定为变高。另外,显示控制单元103也可以在空调机201的工作模式被设定为冷风的情况下在控制对象区域30103重叠地显示半透明的冷色系层,随着设定温度变高而将冷色系层的透明度设定为变高,随着设定温度变低而将冷色系层的透明度设定为变低。Alternatively, the display control unit 103 may also display a translucent layer of warm colors in an overlapping manner in the control object area 30103 when the operating mode of the air conditioner 201 is set to warm air, and the warm color layers will be displayed as the set temperature increases. The transparency of the layer is set to be lower, and the transparency of the warm color layer is set to be higher as the set temperature becomes lower. In addition, the display control unit 103 may also display a translucent cool color layer in an overlapping manner in the control object area 30103 when the operating mode of the air conditioner 201 is set to cool air, and the cool color layer will be displayed as the set temperature increases. The transparency of is set higher, and the transparency of the cool color layer is set lower as the set temperature becomes lower.
另外,显示控制单元103也可以针对通常模式而将半透明的绿色系层重叠显示在控制对象区域30103,随着设定温度变高而将绿色系层的透明度设定为变低,随着设定温度变低而将绿色系层的透明度设定为变高。在此,通常模式是仅进行送风的模式。In addition, the display control unit 103 may superimpose and display a semi-transparent green-based layer on the control target area 30103 for the normal mode, and set the transparency of the green-based layer to be lower as the set temperature becomes higher. The lower the constant temperature, the higher the transparency of the green-based layer. Here, the normal mode is a mode for performing only air blowing.
如此,由于根据工作模式和设定温度来切换控制对象区域30103的颜色,所以用户不用为了确认空调机201的工作模式和设定温度的切换而特意前往空调机201的吹出口附近感受输出的风,就能够确认工作模式和设定温度的切换。In this way, since the color of the control object area 30103 is switched according to the operating mode and the set temperature, the user does not need to go to the vicinity of the air outlet of the air conditioner 201 to feel the output wind in order to confirm the switching of the operating mode and the set temperature of the air conditioner 201. , you can confirm the switching of the working mode and the set temperature.
图77是表示使用了空调机控制画面30102的空调机201的上下风向的操作例的图。空调机控制画面30102具备表示上下风向的画面30701。在此,上下风向是指从空调机201的侧面看的风向。FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an operation example of the vertical airflow direction of the air conditioner 201 using the air conditioner control screen 30102 . The air conditioner control screen 30102 includes a screen 30701 showing the up and down wind direction. Here, the up and down wind direction refers to the wind direction seen from the side of the air conditioner 201 .
在画面30701中显示有相对于正面方向从大致侧方观看空调机201时的空调机201的图像。另外,在画面30701中显示有风向指示标志(indicator)30702。风向指示标志30702具有将空调机的吹出口的附近作为起点而稍微呈放射状变宽的细长的形状。并且,风向指示标志30702通过长度方向的朝向来表示当前所设定的空调机201的上下风向。On screen 30701 , an image of air conditioner 201 when air conditioner 201 is viewed from approximately sideways with respect to the front direction is displayed. In addition, a wind direction indicator (indicator) 30702 is displayed on the screen 30701 . The wind direction indicator mark 30702 has an elongated shape that expands slightly radially from the vicinity of the air outlet of the air conditioner as a starting point. In addition, the wind direction indication mark 30702 indicates the currently set up and down wind direction of the air conditioner 201 by the orientation in the longitudinal direction.
当用户用接触物30603(例如手指)在画面30701内向上下方向划动时,显示控制单元103根据划动的移动量来使风向指示标志30702的朝向变化。在此,作为划动的移动量,例如可采用划动中的某测量定时的接触物30603在显示器101上的位置、与开始划动时的接触物30603在显示器101上的位置之间的距离。在此,根据移动量是指随着移动量增大而风向的变更量变大、随着移动量减小而风向的变更量变小的意思。When the user flicks the screen 30701 up and down with the contact object 30603 (for example, a finger), the display control unit 103 changes the orientation of the wind direction indicator 30702 according to the movement amount of the flick. Here, as the movement amount of the swipe, for example, the distance between the position of the contact object 30603 on the display 101 at a certain measurement timing during the swipe and the position of the contact object 30603 on the display 101 at the start of the swipe can be used. . Here, depending on the amount of movement means that as the amount of movement increases, the amount of change in the wind direction becomes larger, and as the amount of movement decreases, the amount of change in the wind direction becomes smaller.
在图77的例子中,在画面30701内接触物30603向下侧划动为(A)→(B)→(C)→(D),根据该划动的移动量,风向指示标志30702顺时针方向转动,其朝向向下变化。In the example of FIG. 77 , the touch object 30603 is swiped downward in the screen 30701 as (A)→(B)→(C)→(D). The direction is turned and its orientation changes downwards.
另外,当用户使用接触物30603在画面30701内开始划动时,如图77(B)所示,显示控制单元103在画面30701中显示风向可调整范围30703。可调整范围30703包含上限线和下限线。上限线表示上下风向的上侧的调整界限。下限线表示上下风向的下侧的调整界限。在图77(B)的例子中,上限线朝着水平方向,下限线朝着大致垂直方向。并且,以吹出口位于上限线与下限线的交点的方式显示可调整范围30703,且风向指示标志30702的起点位于上限线与下限线的交点。另外,风向指示标志30702显示在上限线与下限线之间。In addition, when the user starts to flick in the screen 30701 using the touch object 30603, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the display control section 103 displays the wind direction adjustable range 30703 on the screen 30701. The adjustable range 30703 includes an upper limit line and a lower limit line. The upper limit line shows an adjustment limit on the upper side of the up and down wind direction. The lower limit line shows an adjustment limit on the lower side of the up and down airflow direction. In the example of FIG. 77(B), the upper limit line faces the horizontal direction, and the lower limit line faces the substantially vertical direction. Furthermore, the adjustable range 30703 is displayed so that the air outlet is located at the intersection of the upper limit line and the lower limit line, and the starting point of the wind direction indicator mark 30702 is located at the intersection of the upper limit line and the lower limit line. In addition, the wind direction indicator mark 30702 is displayed between the upper limit line and the lower limit line.
通过显示可调整范围30703,用户能够直观地识别能将上下风向调整到哪种程度。另外,由于仅在划动风向指示标志30702时显示可调整范围30703,因此通过显示了可调整范围30703,能够给予用户一种正在操作上下风向的真实感。此外,在上述说明中显示了可调整范围30703,但在本实施方式中也可以将可调整范围30703设为不显示。By displaying the adjustable range 30703, the user can intuitively recognize to what extent the up and down wind direction can be adjusted. In addition, since the adjustable range 30703 is displayed only when the wind direction indicator 30702 is swiped, the display of the adjustable range 30703 can give the user a real sense of operating the up and down wind direction. In addition, in the above description, the adjustable range 30703 is displayed, but in this embodiment, the adjustable range 30703 may not be displayed.
在图77(B)中,当用户用接触物30603在画面30701内进一步向下方划动时,如图77(C)所示,根据划动的移动量,风向指示标志30702进一步向顺时针方向转动,其朝向进一步朝向下方。然后,当用户使接触物30603从画面30701离开时,上下风向确定,设备控制单元106根据从开始时到结束时的划动的移动量来确定上下风向的变更量,生成用于将当前所设定的上下风向变更所确定的变更量的控制命令,并发送到网络。In Fig. 77(B), when the user uses the touch object 30603 to further swipe downward in the screen 30701, as shown in Fig. 77(C), according to the amount of movement of the swipe, the wind direction indicator 30702 further moves clockwise. Turn, its orientation is further down. Then, when the user moves the contact object 30603 away from the screen 30701, the up and down wind direction is determined, and the device control unit 106 determines the change amount of the up and down wind direction according to the movement amount of the swipe from the start to the end, and generates an The control order of the determined amount of change in the determined up and down wind direction is sent to the network.
在此,为了管理上下风向,也可以在图102所示的设备列表33200B中设置上下倾斜度的登记栏。并且,当由设备控制单元106决定上下风向时,设备管理单元105将该上下倾斜度登记到上下倾斜度的登记栏中即可。作为上下风向,例如采用将下侧或上侧的调整界限作为基准时的上下风向的角度即可。Here, in order to manage the vertical wind direction, a registration column for the vertical inclination may be provided in the device list 33200B shown in FIG. 102 . Furthermore, when the vertical wind direction is determined by the equipment control section 106, the equipment management section 105 only needs to register the vertical inclination in the registration column of the vertical inclination. As the vertical wind direction, for example, the angle of the vertical wind direction when the adjustment limit on the lower side or the upper side is used as a reference may be used.
图78是表示使用了空调机控制画面30102的空调机201的左右风向的操作例的图。空调机控制画面30102具备表示左右风向的画面30801。在画面30801中显示有从正面方向观察时的空调机201的图像。另外,在画面30801中显示有风向指示标志30802。风向指示标志30802由将空调机201的吹出口作为起点而向下方延伸的多条(例如3条)曲线来表示。在图78(A)中,空调机201的左右风向被设定为正面观看空调机201时的左方,因此风向指示标志30802朝着左方。FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an operation example of the left and right wind directions of the air conditioner 201 using the air conditioner control screen 30102 . The air conditioner control screen 30102 includes a screen 30801 showing left and right wind directions. An image of the air conditioner 201 viewed from the front is displayed on the screen 30801 . In addition, a wind direction indication mark 30802 is displayed on the screen 30801 . Wind direction indicator mark 30802 is represented by a plurality of (for example, three) curved lines extending downward from the outlet of air conditioner 201 . In FIG. 78(A), the left and right wind direction of the air conditioner 201 is set to the left when the air conditioner 201 is viewed from the front, so the wind direction indicator 30802 faces left.
当用户用接触物30603在画面30801内向左方或右方划动时,显示控制单元103根据划动的移动量变更风向指示标志30802的朝向。在图78的例子中,在画面30801内接触物30603从左向右划动为(A)→(B)→(C)→(D),根据该划动,风向指示标志30802以空调机201的图像的吹出口作为起点而逆时针方向转动,其朝向从左向右变化。When the user flicks the touch object 30603 to the left or right on the screen 30801 , the display control unit 103 changes the direction of the wind direction indicator 30802 according to the movement amount of the flick. In the example of FIG. 78 , the touch object 30603 is swiped from left to right in the screen 30801 as (A)→(B)→(C)→(D). The outlet of the image of the image is used as the starting point and rotates counterclockwise, and its orientation changes from left to right.
另外,当用户使用接触物30603在画面30801内开始划动时,如图78(B)所示,显示控制单元103在画面30801显示设定状态显示单元30803。设定状态显示单元30803是显示在画面30801的下方的与水平方向平行的线,向用户报知受理了变更左右风向的操作。此外,设定状态显示单元30803的显示也可以省略。Also, when the user starts flicking on the screen 30801 using the touch object 30603 , as shown in FIG. 78(B) , the display control section 103 displays the setting state display section 30803 on the screen 30801 . The setting status display section 30803 is a line parallel to the horizontal direction displayed at the bottom of the screen 30801, and notifies the user that an operation to change the left and right wind direction has been accepted. In addition, the display of the setting status display section 30803 may also be omitted.
在图78(B)中,当用户用接触物30603在画面30801内进一步向右划动时,如图78(C)所示,根据划动的量,风向指示标志30802以空调机201的图像的吹出口作为起点而进一步向逆时针方向转动,其朝向进一步向右侧变化。然后,当用户使接触物30603从画面30801离开时,确定与从划动开始时到结束时的划动的移动量相应的左右风向的变更量,设备控制单元106生成用于将当前的左右风向变更所确定的变更量的控制命令,并发送到网络。In FIG. 78(B), when the user uses the touch object 30603 to further swipe to the right in the screen 30801, as shown in FIG. 78(C), according to the amount of swipe, the wind direction indicator 30802 takes the form of the image of the air conditioner 201 As the starting point, the blower outlet is further rotated counterclockwise, and its direction is further changed to the right. Then, when the user removes the contact object 30603 from the screen 30801, the change amount of the left and right wind direction corresponding to the movement amount of the swipe from the start to the end of the swipe is specified, and the device control section 106 generates A control command for changing the determined amount of change is sent to the network.
图79是表示使用了空调机控制画面30102的空调机201的风量的操作例的图。空调机控制画面30102具备表示风量的画面30901。在画面30901中显示有从正面方向观察时的空调机201的图像。另外,在画面30901中显示有风量指示标志30902。风量指示标志30902由以空调机201的吹出口作为起点而向下方延伸的多条(例如3条)平缓的曲线来表示。FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an operation example of the air volume of the air conditioner 201 using the air conditioner control screen 30102 . The air conditioner control screen 30102 includes a screen 30901 showing the air volume. An image of the air conditioner 201 viewed from the front is displayed on the screen 30901 . In addition, an air volume indication mark 30902 is displayed on the screen 30901 . The air volume indicator mark 30902 is represented by a plurality of (for example, three) gentle curved lines extending downward from the outlet of the air conditioner 201 .
当用户用接触物30603在画面30901内进行放大时,显示控制单元103根据放大的量来阶段性增加风量指示标志30902的条数。另一方面,当用户用2根接触物30603在画面30901内进行缩小时,显示控制单元103根据缩小的量来阶段性减少风量指示标志30902的条数。在此,根据缩小或放大的量是指随着该量增大而风量的变更量变大、随着该量减小而风量的变更量变小的意思。When the user uses the touch object 30603 to zoom in on the screen 30901, the display control unit 103 increases the number of air volume indication marks 30902 in stages according to the zoomed-in amount. On the other hand, when the user uses two touch objects 30603 to zoom out in the screen 30901, the display control unit 103 gradually reduces the number of air volume indication marks 30902 according to the amount of zooming out. Here, the amount of reduction or enlargement means that as the amount increases, the amount of change in the air volume becomes larger, and as the amount decreases, the amount of change in the air volume becomes smaller.
在图79的例子中,在画面30901内接触物30603放大为(A)→(B)→(C),根据该放大的量,风量指示标志30902的条数阶段性增加为2条→3条→5条。在此,作为放大的量,例如可采用放大中的某测量定时的2根接触物30603在显示器101上的距离、与开始放大时的2根接触物30603在显示器101上的距离之间的差量。In the example in Fig. 79, the contact object 30603 in the screen 30901 is enlarged as (A)→(B)→(C), and according to the enlarged amount, the number of the air flow indication signs 30902 increases step by step to 2→3 → 5 items. Here, as the amount of enlargement, for example, the difference between the distance between the two contact objects 30603 on the display 101 at a certain measurement timing during the enlargement and the distance between the two contact objects 30603 on the display 101 at the start of the enlargement can be used. quantity.
然后,当用户使2根接触物30603从画面30901离开时,设备控制单元106根据开始时到结束时的放大的量来确定风量的变更量,生成用于将当前的风量变更所确定的变更量的控制命令,并发送到网络。Then, when the user removes the two touch objects 30603 from the screen 30901, the device control section 106 determines the change amount of the air volume based on the zoom-in amount from the start time to the end time, and generates the determined change amount for changing the current air volume control commands and send them to the network.
另一方面,在图79(C)中,当画面30901由接触物30603进行缩小时,如(C)→(B)→(A)所示,根据缩小的量,风量指示标志30902的条数阶段性减少为5条→3条→2条。在此,作为缩小的量,例如可采用缩小中的某测量定时的2根接触物30603在显示器101上的距离、与开始缩小时的2根接触物30603在显示器101上的距离之间的差量。On the other hand, in FIG. 79(C), when the screen 30901 is reduced by the contact object 30603, as shown in (C)→(B)→(A), according to the amount of reduction, the number of air volume indication marks 30902 The phased reduction is 5 → 3 → 2. Here, as the amount of reduction, for example, the difference between the distance between the two objects 30603 on the display 101 at a certain measurement timing during reduction and the distance between the two objects 30603 on the display 101 at the start of reduction can be used. quantity.
此外,在上述说明中,根据放大而风量增加,根据缩小而风量减少,但本实施方式不限于此,也可以根据放大而风量减少、根据缩小而风量增大。在该情况下,显示控制单元103是随着放大的量增大而使风量指示标志30902的条数阶段性减少、随着缩小的量增大而使风量指示标志30902的条数阶段性增加即可。In addition, in the above description, the air volume is increased by zooming out and the air volume is decreased by zooming out. However, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the air volume may be decreased by zooming in and increased by zooming out. In this case, the display control unit 103 decreases the number of air flow indication marks 30902 in steps as the zoom-in amount increases, and increases the number of air flow indication marks 30902 in steps as the zoom-out amount increases. Can.
另外,也可以使风量指示标志30902具有风向指示标志30802的功能。即,当风量指示标志30902被从左向右或者从右向左划动时,显示控制单元103根据该划动的移动量而使风量指示标志30902的朝向从左向右或者从右向左变化即可。In addition, the air volume indicator 30902 may have the function of the wind direction indicator 30802 . That is, when the air volume indicator mark 30902 is swiped from left to right or from right to left, the display control unit 103 changes the direction of the air volume indicator mark 30902 from left to right or from right to left according to the movement amount of the swipe. That's it.
由此,风量指示标志30902和风向指示标志30802被集约为一个指示标志,不需要从风量指示标志30902切换到风向指示标志30802的操作或者从风向指示标志30802切换到风量指示标志30902的操作,能够节省操作数和处理步骤数。Thus, the air volume indicator 30902 and the wind direction indicator 30802 are integrated into one indicator, and the operation of switching from the air volume indicator 30902 to the wind direction indicator 30802 or from the wind direction indicator 30802 to the air volume indicator 30902 is not required. Saves the number of operations and processing steps.
图80A、80B是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器100控制设备200的处理流程的流程图。80A and 80B are flowcharts showing the flow of processing in which the home controller 100 controls the device 200 in one embodiment of the present invention.
首先,触摸面板控制单元102在基本画面中检测由用户选择了表示某个设备200的设备图标501(S31001)。在此,设为选择了空调机图标30101。接着,显示控制单元103使全部的设备图标501从设备控制画面502的显示区域退避(S31002)。在此,如图72所示,全部的设备图标501退避到布局图500的显示区域外。First, the touch panel control section 102 detects that the user has selected the device icon 501 representing a certain device 200 on the basic screen ( S31001 ). Here, it is assumed that the air conditioner icon 30101 is selected. Next, the display control section 103 retracts all the device icons 501 from the display area of the device control screen 502 (S31002). Here, as shown in FIG. 72 , all the device icons 501 are retracted out of the display area of the floor plan 500 .
接着,显示控制单元103调整退避后的设备图标501的显示位置(S31003)。例如,调整退避后的设备图标501的显示位置,使得如图72所示,所选择的空调机图标30101显示在特定的位置。此外,设备图标501也可以如图12所示那样退避为包围设备控制画面502。在该情况下,显示控制单元103将空调机图标30101配置在椭圆的外周上的特定位置(例如最上端、最下端、最右端、或最左端)的位置即可。Next, the display control section 103 adjusts the display position of the retracted device icon 501 (S31003). For example, the display position of the retreated device icon 501 is adjusted so that the selected air conditioner icon 30101 is displayed at a specific position as shown in FIG. 72 . In addition, the device icon 501 may retreat to surround the device control screen 502 as shown in FIG. 12 . In this case, display control section 103 may place air conditioner icon 30101 at a specific position (for example, the uppermost, lowermost, rightmost, or leftmost) position on the outer circumference of the ellipse.
接着,显示控制单元103显示所选择的设备200的设备控制画面502(S31004)。在此,如图72所示,空调机控制画面30102作为设备控制画面502而显示。Next, the display control section 103 displays the device control screen 502 of the selected device 200 (S31004). Here, as shown in FIG. 72 , an air conditioner control screen 30102 is displayed as the device control screen 502 .
接着,显示控制单元103使属于配置有所选择的设备图标501的房间区域的设备200的工作状态进行显示(S31005)。在此,如图72所示,在控制对象区域30103中,风向标记30105作为工作状态而被显示。Next, the display control section 103 displays the operating states of the devices 200 belonging to the room area where the selected device icon 501 is placed (S31005). Here, as shown in FIG. 72 , in the control target area 30103 , a wind direction mark 30105 is displayed as an operating state.
接着,触摸面板控制单元102对接触物30603开始接触显示器101进行检测(S31006)。接着,触摸面板控制单元102判定接触物30603的接触对象是否为设备图标501(S31007)。Next, the touch panel control section 102 detects that the touch object 30603 starts to touch the display 101 (S31006). Next, touch panel control section 102 determines whether or not the contact object of touch object 30603 is device icon 501 (S31007).
然后,如果接触对象是设备图标501(在S31007中为“是”),则触摸面板控制单元102判定接触对象的设备图标501是否为与当前的控制对象的设备200相同的设备图标501(空调机图标30101)(S31008)。然后,如果接触对象的设备图标501是与当前的控制对象的设备200相同的设备图标501时(在S31008中为“是”),则显示控制单元103使设备控制画面502(空调机控制画面30102)不显示,而显示基本画面(S31011)。Then, if the contact object is the device icon 501 (YES in S31007), the touch panel control unit 102 determines whether the device icon 501 of the contact object is the same device icon 501 as the current control object device 200 (air conditioner icon 30101) (S31008). Then, if the device icon 501 to be touched is the same device icon 501 as the device 200 currently being controlled (YES in S31008), the display control unit 103 displays the device control screen 502 (the air conditioner control screen 30102 ) is not displayed, but the basic screen is displayed (S31011).
另一方面,在接触对象的设备图标501不是与当前的控制对象的设备200相同的设备图标501(空调机图标30101)的情况下(在S31008中为“否”),处理返回到S31003。在该情况下,显示控制单元103调整退避后的全部设备图标501的配置位置,使得接触对象的设备图标501配置在特定位置,并显示与接触对象的设备图标501对应的设备200的设备控制画面502。On the other hand, when the device icon 501 to be touched is not the same device icon 501 (air conditioner icon 30101) as the device 200 currently being controlled (NO in S31008), the process returns to S31003. In this case, the display control section 103 adjusts the arrangement positions of all the device icons 501 after retreating so that the device icon 501 of the contact object is arranged at a specific position, and displays the device control screen of the device 200 corresponding to the device icon 501 of the contact object. 502.
另一方面,在接触对象不是设备图标501的情况下(在S31007中为“否”),触摸面板控制单元102判定接触对象是否为设备控制画面502(S31009)。然后,如果接触对象是设备控制画面502(在S31009中为“是”),则执行设备控制画面502的控制流程(S31010),处理返回到S31006。On the other hand, when the contact target is not the device icon 501 (NO in S31007), touch panel control section 102 determines whether the contact target is the device control screen 502 (S31009). Then, if the contact object is the device control screen 502 (YES in S31009), the control flow of the device control screen 502 is executed (S31010), and the process returns to S31006.
另一方面,如果接触对象不是设备控制画面502(在S31009中为“否”),则显示控制单元103使设备控制画面502不显示,而显示基本画面(S31011)。例如,当在图72的右图中轻敲空调机控制画面30102的显示区域外的布局图500上的区域时,在S31009中判定为“否”,显示器101的显示被切换到图72的左图所示的基本画面。On the other hand, if the contact object is not the device control screen 502 (NO in S31009), the display control section 103 hides the device control screen 502 and displays the basic screen (S31011). For example, when an area on the floor plan 500 outside the display area of the air conditioner control screen 30102 is tapped in the right figure of FIG. The basic screen shown in the figure.
图81是表示图80B所示的S31010的设备控制画面502的控制流程的流程图。图81是在设备控制画面502中调整风向或风量的情况下的流程图。首先,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到对表示风向或者风量的画面的操作时(在S31101中为“是”),处理进入S31102,在没有检测到该操作的情况下(在S31101中为“否”),结束处理。例如,在显示了图77~图79中任意一个空调机控制画面30102的状态下,在触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物30603在画面30701、30801、30901内向上下或者左右划动的操作、或进行缩小或者放大的操作的情况下,在S31101中判定为“是”。FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a control flow of the device control screen 502 in S31010 shown in FIG. 80B . FIG. 81 is a flowchart in the case of adjusting the wind direction or air volume on the device control screen 502 . First, when the touch panel control section 102 detects an operation on the screen indicating the wind direction or air volume ("YES" in S31101), the process proceeds to S31102, and if the operation is not detected ("No in S31101") ”) to end processing. For example, in the state where any one of the air conditioner control screens 30102 in FIGS. When the zoom-in or zoom-in operation is performed, it is determined as "YES" in S31101.
接着,在检测到的操作是使接触物30603向上下移动的操作的情况下(在S31102中为“是”),显示控制单元103显示表示上下风向的画面30701(S31103)。例如,当接触物30603在表示左右风向的画面30801或表示风量的画面30901中向上下划动时,显示控制单元103使画面显示从表示左右风向的画面30801或表示风量的画面30901切换到表示上下风向的画面30701。此外,在从最初开始显示着表示上下风向的画面30701的情况下,即使接触物30603向上下划动,显示控制单元103也维持表示上下风向的画面30701的显示。Next, when the detected operation is an operation to move the contact object 30603 up and down (YES in S31102), display control section 103 displays screen 30701 showing the up and down wind direction (S31103). For example, when the touch object 30603 is swiped up and down on the screen 30801 showing the left and right wind direction or the screen 30901 showing the air volume, the display control unit 103 switches the screen display from the screen 30801 showing the left and right wind direction or the screen 30901 showing the air volume to the screen showing up and down. Wind direction screen 30701. Also, when the screen 30701 showing the up and down wind direction is displayed from the beginning, the display control section 103 maintains the display of the screen 30701 showing the up and down wind direction even if the touch object 30603 is swiped up and down.
另一方面,在检测到的操作是使接触物30603向左右移动的操作的情况下(在S31102中为“否”,且在S31105中为“是”),显示控制单元103使表示左右风向的画面30801进行显示(S31106)。例如,当在表示上下风向的画面30701或表示风量的画面30901中接触物30603向左右划动时,显示控制单元103使画面显示从表示上下风向的画面30701或表示风量的画面30901切换到表示左右风向的画面30801。此外,在从最初开始显示着表示左右风向的画面30801的情况下,即使接触物30603向左右划动,显示控制单元103也维持表示左右风向的画面30801的显示。On the other hand, when the detected operation is an operation to move the contact object 30603 left and right ("No" in S31102 and "Yes" in S31105), display control section 103 makes the left and right wind direction A screen 30801 is displayed (S31106). For example, when the touch object 30603 is swiped left and right on the screen 30701 representing the up and down wind direction or the screen 30901 representing the air volume, the display control unit 103 switches the screen display from the screen 30701 representing the up and down wind direction or the screen 30901 representing the air volume to the screen displaying left and right. Wind direction screen 30801. Also, when the screen 30801 showing the left and right wind directions is displayed from the beginning, the display control section 103 maintains the display of the screen 30801 showing the left and right wind directions even if the touch object 30603 is swiped left and right.
另一方面,在检测到的操作是缩小或放大的情况下(在S31102中为“否”,在S31105中为“否”,且在S31108中为“是”),显示控制单元103使表示风量的画面30901进行显示(S31109)。例如,当在表示上下风向的画面30701或表示左右风向的画面30901中接触物30603进行缩小或放大时,显示控制单元103使画面显示从表示上下风向的画面30701或表示左右风向的画面30801切换到表示风量的画面30901。此外,在从最初开始显示着表示风量的画面30901的情况下,即使接触物30603进行缩小或放大,显示控制单元103也维持表示风量的画面30901的显示。On the other hand, when the detected operation is zooming out or zooming in (NO in S31102, NO in S31105, and YES in S31108), the display control section 103 makes the display air volume The screen 30901 is displayed (S31109). For example, when the contact object 30603 is reduced or enlarged on the screen 30701 showing the up and down wind direction or the screen 30901 showing the left and right wind direction, the display control unit 103 switches the screen display from the screen 30701 showing the up and down wind direction or the screen 30801 showing the left and right wind direction to Screen 30901 showing air volume. Also, when the screen 30901 indicating the air volume is displayed from the beginning, the display control section 103 maintains the display of the screen 30901 indicating the air volume even if the contact object 30603 is reduced or enlarged.
另一方面,在检测到的操作不属于使接触物向上下或左右移动的操作、以及缩小和放大的情况下(在S31108中为“否”),结束处理。On the other hand, when the detected operation does not belong to the operation of moving the contact object up, down, left and right, or zooming in and out ("No" in S31108), the process ends.
在S31104中,当触摸面板控制单元102检测接触物30603在表示上下风向的画面30701上的上下的操作量时,设备控制单元106决定与该操作量相应的上下风向的控制内容。In S31104, when the touch panel control section 102 detects the vertical operation amount of the touch object 30603 on the screen 30701 indicating the vertical air direction, the device control section 106 determines the control content of the vertical air direction according to the operation amount.
在S31107中,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物30603在表示左右风向的画面30801上的左右的操作量时,设备控制单元106决定与该操作量相应的左右风向的控制内容。In S31107, when the touch panel control unit 102 detects the left and right operation amount of the touch object 30603 on the screen 30801 indicating the left and right wind direction, the device control unit 106 determines the control content of the left and right wind direction corresponding to the operation amount.
在S31110中,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物30603在表示风量的画面30901上的缩小或放大的操作量时,设备控制单元106决定与该操作量相应的风量的控制内容。In S31110, when touch panel control section 102 detects the operation amount of shrinking or enlarging touch object 30603 on screen 30901 indicating the air volume, device control section 106 determines the air volume control content corresponding to the operation amount.
接着,显示控制单元103在控制对象区域30103实施与设定对应的显示(S31111)。例如,如图73所示,在变更了左右风向的情况下,显示控制单元103使风向标记30105朝向变更后的左右风向的方向。另外,在变更了风量的情况下,显示控制单元103根据变更后的风量来改变风向标记30105的条数。此外,在图73的例子中,在控制对象区域30103中仅显示有表示左右风向的风向标记30105,但也可以另外显示表示上下风向的风向标记。在该情况下,当变更上下风向时,显示控制单元103使表示上下风向的风向标记朝向变更后的上下风向的方向。在此,作为表示上下风向的风向标记,例如采用表示上下风向的方向的1根箭头即可。Next, the display control section 103 implements a display corresponding to the setting in the control target area 30103 (S31111). For example, as shown in FIG. 73 , when the horizontal wind direction is changed, display control section 103 orients wind direction mark 30105 in the direction of the changed horizontal wind direction. Also, when the air volume is changed, display control section 103 changes the number of wind direction marks 30105 according to the changed air volume. In addition, in the example of FIG. 73, only the wind direction mark 30105 which shows the left and right wind direction is displayed in the control object area 30103, However, the wind direction mark which shows the up and down wind direction may be displayed separately. In this case, when changing the up and down wind direction, display control section 103 orients the wind direction mark indicating the up and down wind direction in the direction of the changed up and down wind direction. Here, as the wind direction mark indicating the up and down wind direction, for example, one arrow indicating the direction of the up and down wind direction may be used.
在S31112中,设备控制单元106生成与所决定的控制内容对应的控制命令。接着,执行控制命令发送流程(参照图41)(S31113)。In S31112, the device control section 106 generates a control command corresponding to the determined control content. Next, the control command transmission flow (refer to FIG. 41) is executed (S31113).
图82是表示使用了空调机控制画面30102的空调机201的设定温度31203的操作例的图。空调机控制画面30102具备温度设定画面31201。在图82的例子中,温度设定画面31201被设置在空调机控制画面30102的左半部分的区域。在温度设定画面31201的中央显示有空调机201的设定温度31203,在设定温度31203的左侧显示有运转模式31202。在图82(A)、(B)中,空调机201的运转模式被设定为暖风,因此运转模式31202显示为暖风。FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an operation example of the set temperature 31203 of the air conditioner 201 using the air conditioner control screen 30102 . The air conditioner control screen 30102 includes a temperature setting screen 31201 . In the example of FIG. 82 , the temperature setting screen 31201 is provided in the left half area of the air conditioner control screen 30102 . A set temperature 31203 of the air conditioner 201 is displayed in the center of the temperature setting screen 31201 , and an operation mode 31202 is displayed on the left side of the set temperature 31203 . In FIGS. 82(A) and (B), since the operation mode of the air conditioner 201 is set to warm air, the operation mode 31202 is displayed as warm air.
在图82的例子中,当基于温度设定画面31201的操作设定空调机201的设定温度31203时,空调机201切换到与设定温度31203对应的工作模式。In the example of FIG. 82 , when the set temperature 31203 of the air conditioner 201 is set based on the operation on the temperature setting screen 31201 , the air conditioner 201 switches to the operation mode corresponding to the set temperature 31203 .
在图82的例子中,随着按照(A)→(B)→(C)→(D)来转换而降低空调机201的设定温度。在(B)→(C)中,设定温度31203从26度降低到23度。例如,设为预先确定成:在设定温度31203大于25度的情况下运转模式31202设定为暖风,在设定温度31203为25度以下的情况下运转模式31202设定为通常模式。由此,设备控制单元106将如下的控制命令发送到网络,所述控制命令用于将设定温度31203设定为23度且将空调机201的运转模式31202从暖风切换到通常。In the example of FIG. 82, the set temperature of the air conditioner 201 is lowered as (A)→(B)→(C)→(D) is changed. In (B)→(C), the set temperature 31203 is lowered from 26 degrees to 23 degrees. For example, it is assumed that the operation mode 31202 is set to warm air when the set temperature 31203 is higher than 25 degrees, and the operation mode 31202 is set to the normal mode when the set temperature 31203 is 25 degrees or less. Thus, the device control unit 106 transmits to the network a control command for setting the set temperature 31203 to 23 degrees and switching the operation mode 31202 of the air conditioner 201 from heating to normal.
在图82(C)→(D)中,设定温度31203从23度切换到19度。在此,例如设为预先确定成:在设定温度31203大于20度的情况下运转模式31202设定为通常,在设定温度为20度以下的情况下运转模式31202设定为冷风。由此,设备控制单元106将如下的控制命令发送到网络,所述控制命令用于将设定温度31203设定为19度且将空调机201的运转模式31202切换到冷风。In Fig. 82(C)→(D), the set temperature 31203 is switched from 23 degrees to 19 degrees. Here, for example, it is predetermined that the operation mode 31202 is set to normal when the set temperature 31203 is higher than 20 degrees, and the operation mode 31202 is set to cool air when the set temperature is 20 degrees or less. Thus, the device control unit 106 transmits to the network a control command for setting the set temperature 31203 to 19 degrees and switching the operation mode 31202 of the air conditioner 201 to cool air.
此外,与设定温度31203相应的运转模式31202的变更不限于该例子。例如,设备控制单元106也可以通过比较设定温度31203和室外或室内的温度来决定工作模式。例如,设备控制单元106也可以求出室外或室内的温度(T1)与设定温度(T2)的差量(ΔT=T1-T2),在ΔT>+n1的情况下将运转模式31202设定为冷风,在-n2≦ΔT≦+n1的情况下将运转模式31202设定为通常,在ΔT<-n2的情况下将工作模式设定为暖风。在此,n1、n2是预先确定的常数。In addition, the change of the operation mode 31202 according to the set temperature 31203 is not limited to this example. For example, the device control unit 106 can also determine the working mode by comparing the set temperature 31203 with the outdoor or indoor temperature. For example, the device control unit 106 can also calculate the difference between the outdoor or indoor temperature (T1) and the set temperature (T2) (ΔT=T1-T2), and set the operation mode 31202 in the case of ΔT>+n1 For cold air, when -n2≦ΔT≦+n1, the operation mode 31202 is set to normal, and when ΔT<-n2, the operation mode is set to warm air. Here, n1 and n2 are predetermined constants.
设备控制单元106在变更设定温度31203时通过使空调机201发送室外或室内的温度来取得室外或室内的温度即可。一般而言,空调机201在室外机等中设置有用于测定室外的温度的温度传感器,或在室内机等中设置有用于测定室内的温度的温度传感器。因此,空调机201使用该温度传感器来测定室外或室内的温度即可。The device control section 106 may obtain the outdoor or indoor temperature by causing the air conditioner 201 to transmit the outdoor or indoor temperature when changing the set temperature 31203 . In general, the air conditioner 201 is provided with a temperature sensor for measuring an outdoor temperature in an outdoor unit or the like, or is provided with a temperature sensor for measuring an indoor temperature in an indoor unit or the like. Therefore, the air conditioner 201 may measure the outdoor or indoor temperature using this temperature sensor.
接着,对设定温度31203的操作的详细情况进行说明。在图82(A)的例子中,在温度设定画面31201中接触物30603向下方划动。因此,如图82(B)所示,显示控制单元103根据向下方划动的移动量来降低设定温度31203。在图82(B)的例子中,设定温度31203从27度降低到26度,因此设定温度31203显示为26度。在此,根据移动量是指随着移动量增大而设定温度的变更量变大、随着移动量减少而设定温度的变更量变小的意思。Next, details of the operation of the temperature setting 31203 will be described. In the example of FIG. 82(A) , the touch object 30603 is swiped downward on the temperature setting screen 31201 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 82(B), the display control unit 103 lowers the set temperature 31203 according to the movement amount of the downward flick. In the example of FIG. 82(B), the set temperature 31203 is lowered from 27 degrees to 26 degrees, so the set temperature 31203 is displayed as 26 degrees. Here, depending on the amount of movement means that as the amount of movement increases, the amount of change in the set temperature becomes larger, and as the amount of movement decreases, the amount of change in the set temperature becomes smaller.
在图82(B)中,在温度设定画面31201中接触物30603进一步向下方划动。因此,如图82(C)所示,显示控制单元103根据向下方划动的移动量而将设定温度31203从26度降低到23度。In FIG. 82(B), the touch object 30603 is swiped further downward on the temperature setting screen 31201. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 82(C), the display control unit 103 lowers the set temperature 31203 from 26 degrees to 23 degrees according to the movement amount of the downward swipe.
同样地,在图82(C)→(D)中,根据向下方划动的移动量,设定温度31203从23度降低到19度。Similarly, in FIG. 82(C)→(D), the set temperature 31203 decreases from 23 degrees to 19 degrees according to the movement amount of the downward stroke.
另一方面,当设为接触物30603向上方划动时,显示控制单元103根据向上方划动的移动量来使设定温度31203上升。On the other hand, when the contact object 30603 is swiped upward, the display control section 103 raises the set temperature 31203 according to the movement amount of the upward flick.
在此,触摸面板控制单元102在温度设定画面31201中划动的开始点的垂直方向的坐标位于划动中的某测定定时的接触物30603的接触点的垂直方向的坐标的下方的情况下判定为向上方划动即可。另一方面,触摸面板控制单元102在划动的开始点的垂直方向的坐标位于划动中的某测定定时的接触物30603的接触点的垂直方向的坐标的上方的情况下,判定为向下方划动即可。Here, when the coordinates in the vertical direction of the start point of the touch panel control section 102's flicking on the temperature setting screen 31201 is below the coordinates in the vertical direction of the contact point of the contact object 30603 at a certain measurement timing during the flicking It is judged to be swipe up. On the other hand, touch panel control section 102 determines that it is downward when the coordinates in the vertical direction of the start point of the swipe are above the coordinates in the vertical direction of the contact point of contact object 30603 at a certain measurement timing during the swipe. Just swipe.
另外,当由触摸面板控制单元102检测到向上方的划动的结束时,设备控制单元106根据从开始点到结束点的划动的移动量来确定设定温度31203的变更量,生成用于将当前的设定温度31203增大所确定的变更量的控制命令,并发送到网络。In addition, when touch panel control section 102 detects the end of the upward swipe, device control section 106 determines the change amount of set temperature 31203 based on the movement amount of the swipe from the start point to the end point, and generates A control command to increase the current set temperature 31203 by the determined change amount is sent to the network.
当由触摸面板控制单元102检测到向下方的划动的结束时,设备控制单元106根据从开始点到结束点的划动的移动量来确定设定温度31203的变更量,生成用于将当前的设定温度31203减少所确定的变更量的控制命令,并发送到网络。When the touch panel control unit 102 detects the end of the downward swipe, the device control unit 106 determines the change amount of the set temperature 31203 according to the movement amount of the swipe from the start point to the end point, and generates The set temperature 31203 is reduced by the change amount determined by the control command and sent to the network.
此外,在接触物30603划动到温度设定画面31201的区域外的情况下,显示控制单元103和设备控制单元106既可以将温度设定画面31201与划动的接触物30603的轨迹的交点作为划动的结束点来处理,也可以将温度设定画面31201的区域外的实际的划动的结束点作为划动的结束点来处理。In addition, when the contact object 30603 is swiped out of the area of the temperature setting screen 31201, the display control unit 103 and the device control unit 106 can regard the intersection point of the temperature setting screen 31201 and the track of the swiped contact object 30603 as The end point of the swipe is processed, and the actual end point of the swipe outside the area of the temperature setting screen 31201 may be processed as the end point of the swipe.
用户在大幅度变更设定温度31203的情况下,反复进行多次接触物30603的划动即可。因此,即使由接触物30603进行的划动结束,设备控制单元106也不立刻判定为设定温度31203已确定,如果从划动结束时起到经过一定期间为止没有接下来的划动,则作为设定温度31203已确定而生成控制命令即可。由此,能防止每次划动结束都发送控制命令,能够减少通信流量的增大、家庭控制器100和空调机201的处理负担。When the user changes the set temperature 31203 significantly, the user may repeatedly swipe the contact object 30603 a plurality of times. Therefore, even if the swipe by the contact object 30603 ends, the device control unit 106 does not immediately determine that the set temperature 31203 has been determined. The set temperature 31203 has been determined and a control command can be generated. This prevents the control command from being sent every time the swipe ends, and reduces the increase in communication traffic and the processing load on the home controller 100 and the air conditioner 201 .
另一方面,显示控制单元103不管设定温度31203有无确定,都根据划动随时变更设定温度31203的显示即可。由此,用户能够得知与划动相应的设定温度31203的变化量。On the other hand, the display control unit 103 may change the display of the set temperature 31203 at any time by swiping regardless of whether the set temperature 31203 is determined or not. Thus, the user can know the amount of change in the set temperature 31203 corresponding to the flick.
如此,在图82的例子中,兼作设定温度31203的操作和工作模式的操作,因此能够减轻家庭控制器100的处理步骤数和用户的操作数。In this way, in the example of FIG. 82 , since the operation of setting temperature 31203 and the operation of the operation mode are both used, the number of processing steps of the home controller 100 and the number of operations of the user can be reduced.
此外,在图82的例子中,根据划动量变更了设定温度31203,但本实施方式不限于此,也可以根据划动的方向来变更设定温度31203。例如,在图82(A)中,在温度设定画面31201为由接触物30603向上方划动的情况下,显示控制单元103使设定温度31203上升预定温度。另一方面,在温度设定画面31201为由接触物30603向下方划动的情况下,显示控制单元103使设定温度31203下降预定温度。In addition, in the example of FIG. 82 , the set temperature 31203 is changed according to the amount of flicking, but this embodiment is not limited thereto, and the set temperature 31203 may be changed according to the direction of the flick. For example, in FIG. 82(A) , when the temperature setting screen 31201 is swiped upward by the touch object 30603 , the display control section 103 raises the set temperature 31203 by a predetermined temperature. On the other hand, when the touch object 30603 is swiped downward on the temperature setting screen 31201 , the display control section 103 lowers the set temperature 31203 by a predetermined temperature.
在此,设为通过一次划动而设定温度31203被变更例如0.5度。在该情况下,当在图82(A)的温度设定画面31201中接触物30603向下方划动了2次时,如图82(B)所示,设定温度31203从27度变更到26度。另一方面,在图82(B)中,当接触物30603向上方划动了2次时,如图82(A)所示,设定温度31203从26度变更到27度。Here, it is assumed that the set temperature 31203 is changed by, for example, 0.5 degrees by one swipe. In this case, when the contact object 30603 is swiped downward twice in the temperature setting screen 31201 of FIG. 82(A), as shown in FIG. 82(B), the set temperature 31203 is changed from 27 degrees to 26 degrees. Spend. On the other hand, in FIG. 82(B), when the contact object 30603 is swiped upward twice, as shown in FIG. 82(A), the set temperature 31203 is changed from 26 degrees to 27 degrees.
并且,在从最后输入接触物30603向上方或下方的划动开始在一定时间内未输入接下来的划动的情况下,设备控制单元106根据划动的次数来确定设定温度31203的变更量,生成用于将当前的设定温度31203变更所确定的变更量的控制命令,并发送到网络。In addition, when no next swipe is input within a certain period of time after the last upward or downward swipe of the touch object 30603 is input, the device control unit 106 determines the change amount of the set temperature 31203 according to the number of times of swipe. , generate a control command for changing the current set temperature 31203 by the determined change amount, and send it to the network.
此外,作为由1次划动变更的温度的变更量的0.5度只不过是一个例子,也可以采用1度、2度等的0.5度以外的值。In addition, 0.5 degrees, which is the change amount of the temperature changed by one swipe, is just an example, and a value other than 0.5 degrees, such as 1 degree or 2 degrees, may be adopted.
另外,在通过划动的方向使设定温度变化的情况下,也可以考虑划动的方向和移动量来决定设定温度31203的变更量。在该情况下,在划动的方向为上方的情况下,升高设定温度31203,在划动的方向为下方的情况下,降低设定温度31203。并且,也可以根据划动的移动量来决定设定温度31203的变更量。In addition, when the set temperature is changed by the direction of the swipe, the change amount of the set temperature 31203 may be determined in consideration of the direction of the swipe and the amount of movement. In this case, when the direction of the swipe is upward, the set temperature 31203 is raised, and when the direction of the swipe is downward, the set temperature 31203 is lowered. Also, the change amount of the set temperature 31203 may be determined according to the movement amount of the swipe.
进而,在该情况下,在接触物30603超出温度设定画面31201的情况下,既可以也包含超出的部分来决定设定温度31203的变更量,还可以不包含超出的部分而决定设定温度31203的变更量。Furthermore, in this case, when the contact object 30603 exceeds the temperature setting screen 31201, the change amount of the set temperature 31203 may be determined including the exceeding part, or may be determined without including the exceeding part. The amount of change of 31203.
图83是表示图80B的S31010所示的设备控制画面502的控制流程的流程图。此外,图83是在设备控制画面502中调整温度的情况下的流程图。FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a control flow of the device control screen 502 shown in S31010 of FIG. 80B . In addition, FIG. 83 is a flowchart in the case of adjusting temperature on the device control screen 502 .
首先,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到对于温度设定画面31201的操作时(在S31301中为“是”),处理进入S31302,在没有检测到该操作的情况下(在S31301中为“否”),结束处理。First, when the touch panel control section 102 detects an operation on the temperature setting screen 31201 (YES in S31301), the process proceeds to S31302, and if the operation is not detected (NO in S31301 ) to end processing.
例如,在显示有图82所示的空调机控制画面30102的状态下,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物30603在温度设定画面31201上的接触时,在S31301中判定为“是”。For example, when the touch panel control section 102 detects contact of the contact object 30603 on the temperature setting screen 31201 while the air conditioner control screen 30102 shown in FIG.
接着,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到使接触物30603向上下移动的操作时(在S31302中为“是”),设备控制单元106根据接触物30603的上下的移动量来决定设定温度31203的控制内容(S31303)。例如,当在图82所示的温度设定画面31201中接触物30603向上方或下方划动时,设备控制单元106根据划动的移动量和划动的方向来决定变更后的设定温度。Next, when the touch panel control section 102 detects an operation to move the contact object 30603 up and down (YES in S31302), the device control section 106 determines the value of the set temperature 31203 according to the vertical movement amount of the contact object 30603. Control content (S31303). For example, when the contact object 30603 is swiped upwards or downwards on the temperature setting screen 31201 shown in FIG. 82 , the device control unit 106 determines the changed set temperature according to the movement amount and direction of the swiping.
另一方面,在由触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物30603向上下移动的操作以外的操作的情况下(在S31302中为“否”),结束处理。例如,在由触摸面板控制单元102检测到轻敲、缩小、或放大的操作的情况下,在S31302中判定为“否”。On the other hand, when touch panel control section 102 detects an operation other than the operation of moving contact object 30603 up and down ("No" in S31302), the process ends. For example, in the case where a tap, zoom-out, or zoom-in operation is detected by touch panel control section 102, it is determined as "No" in S31302.
接着,显示控制单元103在控制对象区域30103实施与设定对应的显示(S31304)。例如,设为在伴随设定温度31203的变更而工作模式从暖风切换到冷风时,如图75所示,显示控制单元103将控制对象区域30103从暖色系的颜色变更到冷色系的颜色,且用与设定温度31203相应的冷色系的颜色来显示。Next, the display control section 103 implements a display corresponding to the setting in the control target area 30103 (S31304). For example, it is assumed that when the operation mode is switched from warm air to cold air with the change of the set temperature 31203, as shown in FIG. And it is displayed in a cool color corresponding to the set temperature 31203.
接着,设备控制单元106生成与控制内容对应的控制命令(S31305)。例如,如图82所示,在由于设定温度从26度下降到19度而工作模式从暖风切换到冷风的情况下,设备控制单元106生成将工作模式设定为冷风且使设定温度成为19度的控制命令。接着,执行控制命令发送流程(参照图41)(S31306)。Next, the device control section 106 generates a control command corresponding to the control content (S31305). For example, as shown in FIG. 82, when the operating mode is switched from warm air to cold air due to the set temperature dropping from 26 degrees to 19 degrees, the device control unit 106 generates Become a control command of 19 degrees. Next, the control command transmission flow (see FIG. 41) is executed (S31306).
图84是表示基本画面的显示状态与空调机控制画面31400的显示状态的转换的另一例的图。图84的左图表示基本画面。基本画面与图5中示出的基本画面是同样的。在图84的左图所示的基本画面中,用户轻敲空调机图标30101,触摸面板控制单元102检测该轻敲。于是,如图84的右图所示,显示控制单元103切换到空调机控制画面31400的显示状态。空调机控制画面31400是由布局图500构成、将调整区域31401作为空调机201的设备控制画面502来使用的画面。调整区域31401是与设置有成为调整对象的空调机201的房间对应的布局图500上的区域,被用于调整空调机201的设定温度。FIG. 84 is a diagram showing another example of transition between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the air conditioner control screen 31400 . The left figure in Fig. 84 shows the basic screen. The basic screen is the same as the basic screen shown in FIG. 5 . On the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 84 , the user taps the air conditioner icon 30101 , and touch panel control section 102 detects the tap. Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 84 , the display control section 103 switches to the display state of the air conditioner control screen 31400 . The air conditioner control screen 31400 is constituted by the floor plan 500 and uses the adjustment area 31401 as the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner 201 . The adjustment area 31401 is an area on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the room in which the air conditioner 201 to be adjusted is installed, and is used to adjust the set temperature of the air conditioner 201 .
此外,在图84中也与图72同样地,在基本画面中显示在布局图500上的全部的设备图标501退避到布局图500的显示区域外。Also in FIG. 84 , all the device icons 501 displayed on the floor plan 500 on the basic screen are retracted outside the display area of the floor plan 500 in the same manner as in FIG. 72 .
图85是表示调整区域31401的显示状态的构成的图。显示控制单元103在调整区域31401以外的布局图500上的区域显示灰色层,将调整区域31401显示得比其他区域亮。由此,能够使用户明显地意识到设置有空调机201的房间的区域。此外,在图85的例子中,示出了在调整区域31401以外的区域显示灰色层、且将调整区域31401显示得比其他区域亮的方式,但不限于此,也可以将调整区域31401的辉度设定得比其他区域高,明亮地显示调整区域31401。FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the configuration of the display state of the adjustment area 31401 . Display control section 103 displays a gray layer in areas on floor plan 500 other than adjustment area 31401 , and displays adjustment area 31401 brighter than other areas. This enables the user to clearly recognize the area of the room where the air conditioner 201 is installed. In addition, in the example of FIG. 85 , a gray layer is displayed in the area other than the adjustment area 31401, and the adjustment area 31401 is displayed brighter than other areas. If the degree is set higher than other areas, the adjustment area 31401 is displayed brightly.
图86是表示使用了调整区域31401的空调机201的设定温度的操作例的图。在调整区域31401中显示有设定温度31601。设为由触摸面板控制单元102检测到调整区域31401中的接触物30603向上方的划动。于是,显示控制单元103根据向上方划动的移动量而使设定温度31601上升。在图86的左上图→右上图的例子中,根据向上方划动的移动量,设定温度31601从19度上升到21度。以下同样地,按照图86的右上图→右下图→左下图的顺序,设定温度31601上升为21度→23度→24度。FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an operation example of the set temperature of the air conditioner 201 using the adjustment area 31401 . A set temperature 31601 is displayed in the adjustment area 31401 . Assume that the touch panel control section 102 detects that the touch object 30603 in the adjustment area 31401 is flicked upward. Then, the display control section 103 raises the set temperature 31601 according to the movement amount of the upward flick. In the example of the upper left diagram → upper right diagram in FIG. 86 , the set temperature 31601 rises from 19 degrees to 21 degrees according to the movement amount of the upward swipe. In the same manner, the set temperature 31601 rises to 21 degrees → 23 degrees → 24 degrees in the order of the upper right diagram → the lower right diagram → the lower left diagram of Fig. 86 .
另一方面,当在调整区域31401中接触物30603向下方划动时,例如如图86的左下图→右下图→右上图→左上图所示,设定温度31601下降为24度→23度→21度→19度。On the other hand, when the contact object 30603 is swiped downward in the adjustment area 31401, for example, as shown in the lower left diagram → lower right diagram → upper right diagram → upper left diagram in Figure 86, the set temperature 31601 drops to 24 degrees → 23 degrees → 21 degrees → 19 degrees.
此外,在图86的例子中,根据调整区域31401中的接触物30603的划动量来变更了设定温度31601,但本实施方式不限于此,也可以根据调整区域31401中的接触物30603的划动的方向来变更设定温度31601。对于与划动的方向相应的设定温度31601的变更的详细情况,已用图82进行了说明,因而在此省略说明。In addition, in the example of FIG. 86 , the set temperature 31601 is changed according to the amount of the touch object 30603 in the adjustment area 31401. Change the set temperature 31601 in the moving direction. The details of changing the set temperature 31601 according to the direction of the swipe have already been described with reference to FIG. 82 , so the description is omitted here.
有时也在与调整区域31401对应的房间中设置有2台以上的空调机201。在该情况下,如果能够一并地调整多台空调机201的设定温度31601,则对用户而言是便利的。因此,在本实施方式中,在与调整区域31401对应的房间中设置有多台空调机201的情况下,调整区域31401作为用于一并地调整这些多台空调机201的设定温度31601的设备控制画面502来使用。In some cases, two or more air conditioners 201 are installed in a room corresponding to the adjustment area 31401 . In this case, it is convenient for the user if the preset temperatures 31601 of the plurality of air conditioners 201 can be adjusted collectively. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of air conditioners 201 are installed in a room corresponding to the adjustment area 31401 , the adjustment area 31401 serves as a place for collectively adjusting the set temperatures 31601 of the plurality of air conditioners 201 . Device control screen 502 to use.
图87是表示在与调整区域31401对应的房间中设置有多台空调机201的情况下的设备控制时序的图。此外,在图87中,将成为控制对象的空调机设为空调机A31701、空调机B31702。FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an equipment control sequence when a plurality of air conditioners 201 are installed in a room corresponding to an adjustment area 31401 . In addition, in FIG. 87 , the air conditioners to be controlled are the air conditioner A31701 and the air conditioner B31702 .
首先,家庭控制器100的触摸面板控制单元102受理设备控制画面502的操作(S31701)。在此,触摸面板控制单元102受理在调整区域31401中划动接触物30603的操作。First, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100 accepts an operation on the device control screen 502 (S31701). Here, touch panel control section 102 accepts an operation of swiping contact object 30603 in adjustment area 31401 .
接着,设备控制单元106向空调机A31701发送控制命令(S31702)。在此,设备控制单元106将变更空调机A31701的设定温度31601的命令作为控制命令来发送。Next, the device control section 106 sends a control command to the air conditioner A31701 (S31702). Here, the device control section 106 transmits a command to change the set temperature 31601 of the air conditioner A31701 as a control command.
接着,接收到控制命令的空调机A31701执行控制命令(S31703)。在该情况下,空调机A31701根据控制命令变更设定温度31601。接着,空调机A31701将控制结果发送到家庭控制器100(S31704)。Next, the air conditioner A31701 having received the control command executes the control command (S31703). In this case, the air conditioner A31701 changes the set temperature 31601 according to the control command. Next, the air conditioner A31701 transmits the control result to the home controller 100 (S31704).
接着,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106对于空调机B31702也与空调机A31701同样地发送控制命令(S31705),执行S31706和S1707的处理。Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 transmits a control command to the air conditioner B31702 similarly to the air conditioner A31701 (S31705), and executes the processes of S31706 and S1707.
接着,显示控制单元103更新显示画面(S31708)。在此,如图86所示,当设为设定温度31601从19度变更到21度时,显示在调整区域31401的设定温度31601从19度变更到21度。Next, the display control section 103 updates the display screen (S31708). Here, as shown in FIG. 86 , when the set temperature 31601 is changed from 19 degrees to 21 degrees, the set temperature 31601 displayed in the adjustment area 31401 is changed from 19 degrees to 21 degrees.
图88是表示在与调整区域31401对应的房间中设置有多台空调机201的情况下的设备控制时序的又一例的图。在图88中,控制命令经由服务器300被发送到空调机A31701、空调机B31702。FIG. 88 is a diagram showing still another example of an equipment control sequence when a plurality of air conditioners 201 are installed in a room corresponding to an adjustment area 31401 . In FIG. 88 , the control command is sent to the air conditioner A31701 and the air conditioner B31702 via the server 300 .
S31801与图87的S31701相同。接着,家庭控制器100的设备控制单元106将控制命令发送到服务器300(S31802)。接收到控制命令的服务器300将控制命令发送到空调机A31701(S31803)。接着,空调机A31701执行所接收到的控制命令(S31804)。接着,空调机A31701将控制结果发送到服务器300(S31805)。接收到控制结果的服务器300继续向空调机B31702发送控制命令(S31806)。接收到控制命令的空调机B31702执行控制命令(S31807)。接着,空调机B31702将控制结果发送到服务器300(S31808)。接着,服务器300将所接收到的控制结果发送到家庭控制器100(S31809)。接着,显示控制单元103与图87的S31708同样地更新显示画面(S31810)。S31801 is the same as S31701 of FIG. 87 . Next, the device control unit 106 of the home controller 100 transmits a control command to the server 300 (S31802). The server 300 having received the control command transmits the control command to the air conditioner A31701 (S31803). Next, the air conditioner A31701 executes the received control command (S31804). Next, the air conditioner A31701 transmits the control result to the server 300 (S31805). The server 300 having received the control result continues to transmit the control command to the air conditioner B31702 (S31806). The air conditioner B31702 that has received the control command executes the control command (S31807). Next, the air conditioner B31702 transmits the control result to the server 300 (S31808). Next, the server 300 transmits the received control result to the home controller 100 (S31809). Next, display control section 103 updates the display screen in the same manner as S31708 in FIG. 87 (S31810).
如此,在与调整区域31401对应的房间中设置有多台空调机201的情况下,调整区域31401成为多台空调机201共用的设备控制画面502。因此,用户能够一并地变更多台空调机201的设定温度。In this way, when a plurality of air conditioners 201 are installed in a room corresponding to the adjustment area 31401 , the adjustment area 31401 becomes the device control screen 502 shared by the plurality of air conditioners 201 . Therefore, the user can change the preset temperatures of a plurality of air conditioners 201 at a time.
图89是表示使用了调整区域31401的空调机201的设定温度31601的操作例的图。在图89的例子中,经过左上图→右上图→右下图,接触物30603在调整区域31401内向上方划动。在右上图中,接触物30603位于调整区域31401的区域内,但在右下图中,接触物30603位于调整区域31401的区域外。在图89的例子中,即使接触物30603划动到调整区域31401的区域外,也包含超出的部分的划动的移动量来决定设定温度31601的变更量。由此,在右上图→右下图中,设定温度31601上升为24度→26度。FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an operation example of the set temperature 31601 of the air conditioner 201 using the adjustment area 31401 . In the example of FIG. 89 , the touch object 30603 slides upward in the adjustment area 31401 through the upper left diagram→the upper right diagram→the lower right diagram. In the upper right image, the contact object 30603 is located within the area of the adjustment area 31401 , but in the lower right image, the contact object 30603 is located outside the area of the adjustment area 31401 . In the example of FIG. 89 , even if the touch object 30603 is swiped outside the adjustment area 31401 , the amount of change of the set temperature 31601 is determined by the swiped movement amount including the excess portion. Thus, in the upper right diagram→the lower right diagram, the set temperature 31601 rises to 24 degrees→26 degrees.
具体而言,如果划动的开始点在调整区域31401内,则触摸面板控制单元102判定为接触物30603开始向调整区域31401划动。并且,即使划动超出调整区域31401,显示控制单元103和设备控制单元106也使调整区域31401的区域外的划动的移动量为有效而决定设定温度31601的变更量。Specifically, if the swipe start point is within the adjustment area 31401 , touch panel control section 102 determines that the touch object 30603 has started to swipe to the adjustment area 31401 . Furthermore, even if the swipe exceeds the adjustment area 31401, the display control section 103 and the device control section 106 enable the movement amount of the swipe outside the adjustment area 31401 to determine the change amount of the set temperature 31601.
此外,在图89的例子中示出了使温度上升的情况,但使温度下降的情况也与使温度上升的情况同样,触摸面板控制单元102包含超出调整区域31401的部分的划动的移动量而使温度下降。此外,在调整区域31401中接触物30603向上方划动的情况下,设定温度31601被升高,在接触物30603向下方划动的情况下,设定温度31601被降低,这一点与图86相同。In addition, in the example of FIG. 89 , the case of raising the temperature is shown, but the case of lowering the temperature is also the same as the case of raising the temperature. to lower the temperature. In addition, when the contact object 30603 is swiped upward in the adjustment area 31401, the set temperature 31601 is raised, and when the contact object 30603 is swiped downward, the set temperature 31601 is lowered, which is the same as that in Fig. 86 same.
图90是表示使用了调整区域31401的空调机201的设定温度的操作例的图。与图89的不同点在于,对于接触物30603超出调整区域31401的部分,不被考虑为使设定温度31601变更的操作。FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an operation example of the set temperature of the air conditioner 201 using the adjustment area 31401 . The difference from FIG. 89 is that the part where the contact object 30603 exceeds the adjustment area 31401 is not considered as an operation to change the set temperature 31601 .
在图90的右上图中,接触物30603位于调整区域31401的区域内,但在右下图中,接触物30603位于调整区域31401的区域外。在图90的例子中,接触物30603超出了调整区域31401的部分的划动的移动量不被考虑为用于变更设定温度31601的划动的移动量。由此,在右上图→右下图中,设定温度31601维持在24度。In the upper right diagram of FIG. 90 , the contact object 30603 is located within the area of the adjustment area 31401 , but in the lower right diagram, the contact object 30603 is located outside the area of the adjustment area 31401 . In the example of FIG. 90 , the flicked movement amount of the part where the contact object 30603 exceeds the adjustment area 31401 is not considered as the flicked movement amount for changing the set temperature 31601 . Thus, in the upper right diagram→lower right diagram, the set temperature 31601 is maintained at 24 degrees.
具体而言,显示控制单元103和设备控制单元106在划动超出了调整区域31401的情况下,求出划动的轨迹和调整区域31401的外周的交点与划动的开始点之间的距离来作为划动的移动量,根据该划动的移动量来决定设定温度31601的变化量。此外,在图90中,示出了设定温度31601被升高的情况,但在设定温度31601被降低的情况下也与被升高的情况同样地,不考虑超出调整区域31401的部分而变更设定温度31601。Specifically, display control section 103 and device control section 106 obtain the distance between the intersection point of the trajectory of the flick and the outer circumference of adjustment area 31401 and the start point of flicking when the flick exceeds the adjustment area 31401. As the movement amount of the swipe, the amount of change in the set temperature 31601 is determined based on the movement amount of the swipe. In addition, in FIG. 90 , the case where the set temperature 31601 is raised is shown, but when the set temperature 31601 is lowered, similarly to the case where it is raised, the portion beyond the adjustment area 31401 is not considered. Change the set temperature 31601.
图91A、图91B是表示在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器100控制设备200的处理的另一例的流程图。91A and 91B are flowcharts showing another example of processing by the home controller 100 to control the device 200 in one embodiment of the present invention.
S32101~S32103与图80A的S31001~S31003相同。在S32104中,显示控制单元103将布局图500作为设备控制画面502来显示(S32104)。在该情况下,如图85所示,与设置有被选择为操作对象的空调机201的房间相当的布局图500上的区域被作为调整区域31401,该布局图500被作为空调机控制画面31400来加以显示。S32101 to S32103 are the same as S31001 to S31003 in FIG. 80A . In S32104, the display control section 103 displays the floor plan 500 as the device control screen 502 (S32104). In this case, as shown in FIG. 85 , an area on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the room in which the air conditioner 201 selected as the operation target is installed is taken as an adjustment area 31401 , and this floor plan 500 is taken as an air conditioner control screen 31400 . to display.
接着,显示控制单元103在配置有所选择的设备图标501的房间区域中显示相应的设备200的工作状态(S32105)。在此,如图86所示,在调整区域31401中显示设定温度31601。Next, the display control unit 103 displays the operation status of the corresponding device 200 in the room area where the selected device icon 501 is arranged (S32105). Here, as shown in FIG. 86 , set temperature 31601 is displayed in adjustment area 31401 .
S32106~S32108与图80B的S31006~S3108相同。在S32109中,如果接触对象是设备控制画面502(在S32109中为“是”),则执行设备控制画面502的控制流程(参照图41)(S32110),处理返回到S32106。在此,在图86中,在用接触物30603接触到调整区域31401的情况下,在S32109中判定为“是”,在用接触物30603没有接触调整区域31401的情况下,在S32109中判定为“否”。S32111与图80B的S31011相同。S32106 to S32108 are the same as S31006 to S3108 in FIG. 80B . In S32109, if the contact object is the device control screen 502 (YES in S32109), the control flow of the device control screen 502 (see FIG. 41 ) is executed (S32110), and the process returns to S32106. Here, in FIG. 86, when the contact object 30603 touches the adjustment area 31401, it is determined as "Yes" in S32109, and when the contact object 30603 does not contact the adjustment area 31401, it is determined as "Yes" in S32109. "no". S32111 is the same as S31011 in Fig. 80B.
图92是图91B的S32110所示的设备控制画面502的控制流程的流程图。首先,触摸面板控制单元102在检测到针对与配置有空调机图标30101的房间对应的布局图500上的区域(调整区域31401)的操作的情况下(在S32201中为“是”),使处理进入S32202,在没有检测到该操作的情况下(在S32201中为“否”),结束处理。FIG. 92 is a flowchart of a control flow of the device control screen 502 shown in S32110 of FIG. 91B . First, when touch panel control section 102 detects an operation on an area (adjustment area 31401) on floor plan 500 corresponding to the room in which air conditioner icon 30101 is placed (YES in S32201), it causes the processing The process proceeds to S32202, and when the operation is not detected ("No" in S32201), the process ends.
接着,在触摸面板控制单元102检测到的操作是使接触物向上下移动的操作的情况下(在S32202中为“是”),处理进入S32203,在触摸面板控制单元102检测到的操作是使接触物30603向上下移动以外的操作的情况下(在S32202中为“否”),结束处理。在此,在调整区域31401中接触物30603向上方或下方划动的情况下,在S32202中判定为“是”。Next, when the operation detected by touch panel control section 102 is an operation to move the contact object up and down (YES in S32202), the process proceeds to S32203, and if the operation detected by touch panel control section 102 is to move In the case of an operation other than moving the contact object 30603 up and down ("No" in S32202), the process ends. Here, in the case where the contact object 30603 is swiped upward or downward in the adjustment area 31401, it is determined as "YES" in S32202.
接着,设备控制单元106决定设定温度31601的控制内容(S32203)。在此,在调整区域31401中接触物30603向上方划动的情况下,设备控制单元106将用与划动的移动量相应的设定温度31601的变更量来变更当前的设定温度31601这一内容决定为控制内容。Next, the device control section 106 determines the control content of the set temperature 31601 (S32203). Here, when the contact object 30603 is swiped upward in the adjustment area 31401, the device control section 106 changes the current set temperature 31601 by the change amount of the set temperature 31601 corresponding to the movement amount of the swipe. Content is determined as controlling content.
接着,显示控制单元103在调整区域31401中实施与设定对应的显示(S32204)。在此,如图86所示,在调整区域31401中显示设定温度31601。Next, the display control section 103 implements a display corresponding to the setting in the adjustment area 31401 (S32204). Here, as shown in FIG. 86 , set temperature 31601 is displayed in adjustment area 31401 .
接着,设备控制单元106生成与控制内容对应的控制命令(S32205)。在此,如图86所示,生成用于通过与调整区域31401中的接触物30603的划动的移动量相应的变更量来变更当前所设定的设定温度31601的控制命令。接着,执行控制命令发送流程(参照图41)(S32206)。Next, the device control section 106 generates a control command corresponding to the control content (S32205). Here, as shown in FIG. 86 , a control command for changing the currently set set temperature 31601 is generated by a change amount corresponding to the movement amount of the touch object 30603 swiped in the adjustment area 31401 . Next, the control command transmission flow (refer to FIG. 41) is executed (S32206).
图93、图94是表示基本画面的显示状态与空调机控制画面30102的显示状态的转换的另一例的图。在图93的左图所示的基本画面中,用户轻敲空调机图标30101,触摸面板控制单元102检测该轻敲。于是,显示控制单元103将布局图500切换到空调机控制画面31000。空调机控制画面31000与图84所示的空调机控制画面31400相同,包含用于调整空调机201的设定温度的调整区域31401。在此,由于配置有空调机图标30101的布局图500上的房间区域的面积大于一定尺寸,所以显示控制单元103将布局图500切换到空调机控制画面31000。93 and 94 are diagrams showing another example of transition between the display state of the basic screen and the display state of the air conditioner control screen 30102 . On the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 93 , the user taps the air conditioner icon 30101 , and touch panel control section 102 detects the tap. Then, display control section 103 switches floor plan 500 to air conditioner control screen 31000 . The air conditioner control screen 31000 is the same as the air conditioner control screen 31400 shown in FIG. 84 , and includes an adjustment area 31401 for adjusting the set temperature of the air conditioner 201 . Here, since the area of the room area on floor plan 500 on which air conditioner icon 30101 is placed is larger than a certain size, display control section 103 switches floor plan 500 to air conditioner control screen 31000 .
另一方面,当用户轻敲图94所示的空调机图标30104,触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲时,显示控制单元103将空调机控制画面30102(调整画面的一例)重叠地显示在布局图500上。空调机控制画面30102是与布局图500不同地准备的用于控制空调机201的专用画面。On the other hand, when the user taps the air conditioner icon 30104 shown in FIG. 94 and touch panel control section 102 detects the tap, display control section 103 superimposes and displays air conditioner control screen 30102 (an example of an adjustment screen). Layout plan 500 on. The air conditioner control screen 30102 is a dedicated screen for controlling the air conditioner 201 prepared separately from the floor plan 500 .
由于配置有空调机图标30104的房间区域的面积为一定尺寸以下,所以显示控制单元103不是使空调机控制画面31000进行显示,而使空调机控制画面30102进行显示。控制对象区域30604是配置有空调机图标30104的房间区域。Since the area of the room area where the air conditioner icon 30104 is arranged is less than a certain size, the display control section 103 displays the air conditioner control screen 30102 instead of the air conditioner control screen 31000 . The control target area 30604 is the room area where the air conditioner icon 30104 is placed.
如此,如果与设置有成为操作对象的空调机201的房间对应的房间区域的面积大于一定尺寸,则如图93所示,该房间区域被设定为调整区域31401。因此,能够将已经显示的布局图500挪用为空调机201的调整画面,能够尽可能地抑制个别(单独)的操作画面的使用。In this way, if the area of the room area corresponding to the room in which the air conditioner 201 to be operated is installed is larger than a certain size, the room area is set as adjustment area 31401 as shown in FIG. 93 . Therefore, the floor plan 500 already displayed can be used as the adjustment screen of the air conditioner 201, and the use of a separate (independent) operation screen can be suppressed as much as possible.
另一方面,在与设置有空调机201的房间对应的房间区域的面积为一定尺寸以下的情况下,当将该房间区域设为调整区域31401时,由于调整区域31401的面积小,所以用户的操作变得困难。因此,在图94的例子中,在与设置有空调机201的房间对应的房间区域的面积为一定尺寸以下的情况下,显示空调机控制画面30102。在此,鉴于用户的操作性,空调机控制画面30102具有一定的尺寸。因此,防止了操作性的恶化。此外,作为一定尺寸,采用如果小于等于该一定尺寸、则用户无法充分地进行划动操作的面积即可。On the other hand, when the area of the room area corresponding to the room where the air conditioner 201 is installed is less than a certain size, if the room area is set as the adjustment area 31401, since the area of the adjustment area 31401 is small, the user's Operation becomes difficult. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 94 , when the area of the room region corresponding to the room in which the air conditioner 201 is installed is less than or equal to a certain size, the air conditioner control screen 30102 is displayed. Here, the air conditioner control screen 30102 has a certain size in consideration of the user's operability. Therefore, deterioration of operability is prevented. In addition, as the fixed size, it is sufficient to use an area where the user cannot sufficiently perform the flicking operation if the fixed size is smaller than or equal to the fixed size.
在此,显示控制单元103参照图102所示的设备列表33200A和图101所示的房间信息33100来计算配置有被用户选择的空调机图标30101的房间的布局图500上的面积即可。例如,当设为与空调机图标30101对应的空调机201的设备ID33201为“A”时,显示控制单元103从配置33204中确定空调机图标30101的配置位置(X10、Y80、Z1)。接着,显示控制单元103参照图101所示的房间信息33100和图31所示的顶点信息2800,确定所确定的配置位置(X10、Y80、Z1)所属的房间区域。在此,设为确定为起居室的房间区域。于是,显示控制单元103根据所确定的房间区域的面积33104来决定配置有空调机图标30101的房间区域的面积。在此,在面积33104中登记有实际的房间面积,因此,作为起居室的房间区域的面积,决定为24.3平方米。此外,在房间信息33100中没有登记面积33104的情况下,显示控制单元103也可以根据登记在空间坐标33103中的房间区域的顶点来计算房间区域的面积。在图101的例子中,起居室被F、G、H、I、L、O、N的顶点包围,因此显示控制单元103根据图31所示的顶点信息2800确定这些各顶点的坐标,使用所确定的各顶点的坐标求出起居室的房间区域的面积即可。Here, display control section 103 may refer to device list 33200A shown in FIG. 102 and room information 33100 shown in FIG. For example, when the device ID 33201 of the air conditioner 201 corresponding to the air conditioner icon 30101 is "A", the display control section 103 specifies the arrangement position (X10, Y80, Z1) of the air conditioner icon 30101 from the arrangement 33204 . Next, display control section 103 refers to room information 33100 shown in FIG. 101 and vertex information 2800 shown in FIG. 31 to specify the room area to which the specified arrangement position (X10, Y80, Z1) belongs. Here, it is assumed that the room area specified as the living room is assumed. Then, display control section 103 determines the area of the room area in which the air conditioner icon 30101 is arranged based on the identified area 33104 of the room area. Here, since the actual room area is registered in the area 33104, the area of the room area as the living room is determined to be 24.3 square meters. Also, when the area 33104 is not registered in the room information 33100 , the display control section 103 may calculate the area of the room area from the vertices of the room area registered in the space coordinates 33103 . In the example of FIG. 101, the living room is surrounded by the vertices of F, G, H, I, L, O, and N. Therefore, the display control unit 103 determines the coordinates of these vertices according to the vertex information 2800 shown in FIG. The area of the room area of the living room may be obtained from the determined coordinates of each vertex.
在图101中,作为面积33104,采用房间的实际面积。在该情况下,显示控制单元103也可以将实际面积换算为布局图500上的面积,判断所属的房间区域是否为一定尺寸以下。或者,显示控制单元103也可以预先存储与实际的房间对应的面积来作为一定尺寸,通过比较该一定尺寸和面积33104,判断相应的房间区域是否为一定尺寸以下。In FIG. 101 , the actual area of the room is used as the area 33104 . In this case, display control section 103 may convert the actual area into the area on floor plan 500 and determine whether or not the room area to which it belongs is smaller than a certain size. Alternatively, the display control unit 103 may prestore an area corresponding to an actual room as a certain size, and compare the certain size with the area 33104 to determine whether the corresponding room area is below a certain size.
图95是表示在选择了配置在一定尺寸以下的房间区域的空调机图标30104的情况下所显示的调整区域32502的另一例的图。FIG. 95 is a diagram showing another example of an adjustment area 32502 displayed when an air conditioner icon 30104 placed in a room area of a certain size or less is selected.
在图95的例子中,不是空调机控制画面30102,而是放大显示了的布局图32501所包含的控制对象区域30604被作为用于调整空调机201的调整区域32502。在该情况下,即使在房间区域的面积为一定尺寸以下的情况下,用户也能够通过与大于一定尺寸的情况相同的操作来操作空调机201。In the example of FIG. 95 , instead of the air conditioner control screen 30102 , the control target area 30604 included in the enlarged and displayed floor plan 32501 is used as the adjustment area 32502 for adjusting the air conditioner 201 . In this case, even when the area of the room area is less than a certain size, the user can operate the air conditioner 201 by the same operations as when the area is larger than a certain size.
在此,显示控制单元103设定布局图500的放大率,使得控制对象区域30604被放大到用户能充分地进行划动操作的面积。并且,显示控制单元103求出用所设定的放大率放大了布局图500的画面来作为被放大显示的布局图32501,显示在显示器101上。Here, display control section 103 sets the enlargement factor of floor plan 500 so that control target region 30604 is enlarged to an area where the user can sufficiently perform a flick operation. Then, display control section 103 obtains a screen in which floor plan 500 is enlarged with the set magnification factor as enlarged floor plan 32501 , and displays it on display 101 .
此外,作为放大率,例如采用控制对象区域30604被放大到用户能充分地进行划动操作的预定尺寸的值即可。In addition, as the magnification factor, for example, a value at which the control target region 30604 is magnified to a predetermined size that allows the user to perform a sufficient flick operation may be used.
图96是表示在选择了图94所示的一定尺寸以下的房间区域所配置的空调机图标30104的情况下所显示的调整区域32601的又一例子的图。FIG. 96 is a diagram showing still another example of the adjustment area 32601 displayed when the air conditioner icon 30104 arranged in the room area of a certain size or less shown in FIG. 94 is selected.
在图96的情况下,显示控制单元103切取配置有空调机图标30104的房间区域,生成以预定的放大率使该房间区域放大后的区域来作为调整区域32601,将所生成的调整区域32601重叠地显示在布局图500上。在图96的例子中,调整区域32601显示在与对应的房间区域不重叠的位置。因而,作为生成调整区域32601时的放大率,例如采用使得在控制在布局图500内的范围内尽量大地显示调整区域32601、且与配置有空调机图标30104的房间区域不重叠的值即可。或者,作为生成调整区域32601时的放大率,例如也可以采用配置有空调机图标30104的房间区域的面积被放大到预定尺寸的值。In the case of FIG. 96 , the display control section 103 cuts out the room area in which the air conditioner icon 30104 is arranged, generates an area in which the room area is enlarged at a predetermined magnification factor as an adjustment area 32601 , and overlaps the generated adjustment area 32601 is displayed on the layout diagram 500. In the example of FIG. 96, the adjustment area 32601 is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the corresponding room area. Therefore, as the magnification factor when generating adjustment area 32601 , for example, a value such that adjustment area 32601 is displayed as large as possible within floor plan 500 and does not overlap with the room area where air conditioner icon 30104 is arranged may be used. Alternatively, as the magnification factor when generating the adjustment area 32601 , for example, a value in which the area of the room area in which the air conditioner icon 30104 is placed is enlarged to a predetermined size may be used.
在此,调整区域32601例如既可以显示为其中心位于显示器101的显示区域的中心,也可以显示为其中心位于布局图500的中心。由此,调整区域32601显示在显示器101的显示区域内的醒目的位置,用户的操作变得容易。Here, for example, the adjustment area 32601 may be displayed with its center located at the center of the display area of the display 101 , or may be displayed with its center located at the center of the floor plan 500 . Thereby, the adjustment area 32601 is displayed at a conspicuous position within the display area of the display 101, and the user's operation becomes easy.
另外,在配置有空调机图标30104的房间区域中,与图75同样地,添加有与设定温度相应的颜色。另外,在配置有空调机图标30104的房间区域以外的布局图500上的区域中显示有灰色层。由此,配置有空调机图标30104的房间区域显示得比其以外的区域醒目,用户能够进行具有临场感的操作。In addition, in the room area where the air conditioner icon 30104 is arranged, the color corresponding to the set temperature is added similarly to FIG. 75 . In addition, a gray layer is displayed on the floor plan 500 other than the room area where the air conditioner icon 30104 is arranged. As a result, the room area where the air conditioner icon 30104 is placed is displayed more prominently than other areas, and the user can perform operations with a sense of presence.
在图96的例子中,调整区域32601的背景用明亮的颜色(例如白色)来显示。该背景具有如从所属的房间区域吹出的气泡框标记这样的形状。由此,用户能够快速地识别调整区域32601表示哪个房间区域。In the example of FIG. 96, the background of the adjustment area 32601 is displayed in a bright color (for example, white). The background has the shape of a bubble mark blown from the associated room area. Thus, the user can quickly recognize which room area is indicated by the adjustment area 32601 .
图97是表示使用了图96所示的调整区域32601的操作例的图。在调整区域32601中显示有设定温度32701。设为触摸面板控制单元102检测到调整区域32601中的接触物30603向上方的划动。于是,显示控制单元103根据向上方的划动的移动量而使设定温度32701上升。在图97的左上图→右上图的例子中,根据向上方的划动的移动量,设定温度32701从20度上升到22度。以下同样地,至图97的右上图→右下图,设定温度32701上升为22度→24度。另外,伴随经过左上图→右上图→右下图的设定温度32701的变更,变更了与调整区域32601对应的房间区域的颜色。在图97的例子中,设定温度32701被升高,因此房间区域的颜色变更为较浓的颜色。FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an operation example using the adjustment area 32601 shown in FIG. 96 . A set temperature 32701 is displayed in the adjustment area 32601 . It is assumed that the touch panel control section 102 detects that the touch object 30603 in the adjustment area 32601 is swiped upward. Then, the display control section 103 raises the set temperature 32701 according to the movement amount of the upward swipe. In the example of the upper left diagram → upper right diagram in FIG. 97 , the set temperature 32701 rises from 20 degrees to 22 degrees according to the movement amount of the upward swipe. Similarly, the set temperature 32701 rises from 22 degrees to 24 degrees from the upper right diagram in Fig. 97 to the lower right diagram. In addition, the color of the room area corresponding to the adjustment area 32601 is changed along with the change of the set temperature 32701 through the upper left diagram→the upper right diagram→the lower right diagram. In the example of FIG. 97, the set temperature 32701 is raised, so the color of the room area is changed to a darker color.
另一方面,当在调整区域32601中接触物30603向下方划动时,如图97的右下图→右上图→左上图所示,设定温度31601下降为24度→22度→20度。On the other hand, when the contact object 30603 is swiped downward in the adjustment area 32601, as shown in the lower right diagram → upper right diagram → upper left diagram of FIG. 97 , the set temperature 31601 drops to 24 degrees → 22 degrees → 20 degrees.
此外,在与调整区域32601对应的房间中设置有2台以上的空调机201的情况下,调整区域32601作为用于一并地调整这些多台空调机201的设定温度32701的设备控制画面502来使用。In addition, when two or more air conditioners 201 are installed in a room corresponding to the adjustment area 32601, the adjustment area 32601 serves as the device control screen 502 for collectively adjusting the set temperature 32701 of these plural air conditioners 201. to use.
另外,显示控制单元103和设备控制单元106在调整区域32601中的接触物30603的划动超出了调整区域32601的情况下,既可以超出的部分也作为有效的划动来加以处理而变更设定温度32701,也可以超出的部分作为无效的划动来加以处理而变更设定温度32701。In addition, when the touch object 30603 in the adjustment area 32601 is swiped beyond the adjustment area 32601 by the display control section 103 and the device control section 106, the excess portion may be treated as a valid swipe to change the setting. For the temperature 32701, the part exceeding the temperature 32701 may be treated as an invalid stroke and the set temperature 32701 may be changed.
另外,在图97的例子中,设定温度32701根据调整区域32601中的接触物30603的划动的移动量而被变更,但本实施方式不限于此,设定温度32701也可以根据调整区域32601中的接触物30603的划动的方向而被变更。由于对于与划动的方向相应的设定温度32701的变更的详细情况,已用图82进行了说明,所以在此省略说明。另外,在根据划动的方向使设定温度32701变化的情况下,既可以包含超出调整区域32601的部分来决定设定温度32701的变更量,也可以不包含超出调整区域32601的部分来决定设定温度32701的变更量。In addition, in the example of FIG. 97, the set temperature 32701 is changed according to the movement amount of the touch object 30603 in the adjustment area 32601, but this embodiment is not limited thereto, and the set temperature 32701 may be changed according to the adjustment area 32601. The direction in which the touch object 30603 is swiped is changed. The details of changing the set temperature 32701 according to the direction of the swipe have already been described with reference to FIG. 82 , so the description is omitted here. In addition, when the set temperature 32701 is changed according to the direction of the swipe, the change amount of the set temperature 32701 may be determined including the part exceeding the adjustment area 32601, or may be determined without including the part exceeding the adjustment area 32601. Set the change amount of temperature 32701.
图98A、图98B是在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器100控制设备200的处理的又一例的流程图。98A and 98B are flowcharts of still another example of processing by the home controller 100 to control the device 200 in one embodiment of the present invention.
S32801~S32803与图80A的S31001~S31003相同。在S32804中,在配置有所选择的设备图标501的房间区域的面积为一定尺寸以下的情况下(在S32804中为“是”),显示控制单元103使设备控制画面502进行显示(S32805)。在此,显示图94的右图所示的空调机控制画面30102。S32801 to S32803 are the same as S31001 to S31003 in FIG. 80A . In S32804, when the area of the room area in which the selected device icon 501 is arranged is less than a certain size (YES in S32804), the display control section 103 displays the device control screen 502 (S32805). Here, the air conditioner control screen 30102 shown in the right diagram of FIG. 94 is displayed.
另一方面,在配置有所选择的设备图标501的房间区域的面积大于一定尺寸的情况下(在S32804中为“否”),显示控制单元103将布局图500作为设备控制画面502来显示(S32806)。On the other hand, when the area of the room area where the selected device icon 501 is placed is larger than a certain size (NO in S32804), the display control section 103 displays the floor plan 500 as the device control screen 502 ( S32806).
在此,包含图93的右图所示的调整区域31401的空调机控制画面31000作为设备控制画面502来显示。S32807~S32809与图80B的S31006~S31008相同。Here, the air conditioner control screen 31000 including the adjustment area 31401 shown in the right diagram of FIG. 93 is displayed as the device control screen 502 . S32807 to S32809 are the same as S31006 to S31008 in FIG. 80B .
在S32810中,如果接触对象是设备控制画面502(在S32810中为“是”),则执行设备固有的控制流程(S32811),处理返回到S32807。在此,在用接触物30603接触到图93的右图所示的调整区域31401或图94的右图所示的空调机控制画面30102的情况下,在S32810中判定为“是”,在用接触物30603没有接触到调整区域31401或空调机控制画面30102的情况下,在S32810中判定为“否”。接着,执行设备固有的控制流程(S32811)。在此,作为S32911,适用图81、图83以及图92的流程。In S32810, if the contact object is the device control screen 502 (YES in S32810), a device-specific control flow is executed (S32811), and the process returns to S32807. Here, when the contact object 30603 touches the adjustment area 31401 shown in the right diagram of FIG. 93 or the air conditioner control screen 30102 shown in the right diagram of FIG. When the contact object 30603 does not contact the adjustment area 31401 or the air conditioner control screen 30102, it is determined as "No" in S32810. Next, a device-specific control flow is executed (S32811). Here, as S32911, the flow of FIG. 81, FIG. 83, and FIG. 92 is applied.
图99A、图99B是在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器100控制设备200的处理的又一例的流程图。99A and 99B are flowcharts of still another example of processing by the home controller 100 to control the device 200 in one embodiment of the present invention.
S32901~S32903与图80A的S31001~S31003相同。在S32904中,在配置有所选择的设备图标501的房间区域的面积为一定尺寸以下的情况下(在S32904中为“是”),显示控制单元103放大房间区域,作为调整区域来显示(S32905)。在此,图95所示的被放大显示的布局图32501、或者图96所示的被放大的房间区域作为调整区域32601,显示重叠有该调整区域32601的布局图500。S32901 to S32903 are the same as S31001 to S31003 in FIG. 80A . In S32904, when the area of the room area in which the selected device icon 501 is placed is less than a certain size (YES in S32904), the display control section 103 enlarges the room area and displays it as an adjustment area (S32905 ). Here, the enlarged floor plan 32501 shown in FIG. 95 or the enlarged room area shown in FIG. 96 is used as the adjustment area 32601 , and the floor plan 500 superimposed on the adjustment area 32601 is displayed.
另一方面,在配置有所选择的设备图标501的房间区域的面积大于一定尺寸的情况下(在S32904中为“否”),显示控制单元103将布局图500作为设备控制画面502来显示(S32906)。在此,显示将图93的右图所示的调整区域31401作为设备控制画面502的空调机控制画面31000。S32907~S32909与图80B的S31006~S3108相同。On the other hand, when the area of the room area where the selected device icon 501 is placed is larger than a certain size (NO in S32904), the display control section 103 displays the floor plan 500 as the device control screen 502 ( S32906). Here, an air conditioner control screen 31000 using an adjustment area 31401 shown in the right diagram of FIG. 93 as a device control screen 502 is displayed. S32907 to S32909 are the same as S31006 to S3108 in FIG. 80B .
在S32910中,如果接触对象不是设备控制画面502(在S32910中为“否”),则处理进入S32912。S32921与图80B所示的S31011相同。在此,在用接触物30603接触到图93的右图所示的调整区域31401、图95所示的调整区域32502、或者图96所示的调整区域32601的情况下,在S32910中判定为“是”,在这些以外的情况下,在S32910中判定为“否”。In S32910, if the contact object is not the device control screen 502 (NO in S32910), the process proceeds to S32912. S32921 is the same as S31011 shown in Fig. 80B. Here, when the contact object 30603 touches the adjustment area 31401 shown in the right diagram of FIG. 93 , the adjustment area 32502 shown in FIG. 95 , or the adjustment area 32601 shown in FIG. 96 , it is determined in S32910 that " Yes", and in other cases, it is determined as "No" in S32910.
接着,执行设备固有的控制流程(S32911)。在此,作为S32911,适用图81、图83以及图92的流程。Next, a device-specific control flow is executed (S32911). Here, as S32911, the flow of FIG. 81, FIG. 83, and FIG. 92 is applied.
图100是表示在控制对象区域30103显示了效果范围33001的空调机控制画面30102的显示状态的构成的图。对于图100所示的显示画面,在图72所示的基本画面中例如轻敲空调机图标30101、由触摸面板控制单元102检测到该轻敲的情况下,由显示控制单元103使显示画面得到显示。在图100中,配置有空调机图标30101的房间区域设定了效果范围33001。FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of an air conditioner control screen 30102 in which an effective range 33001 is displayed in a control target area 30103 . For the display screen shown in FIG. 100 , for example, when the air conditioner icon 30101 is tapped on the basic screen shown in FIG. show. In FIG. 100 , an effect range 33001 is set for the room area where the air conditioner icon 30101 is placed.
效果范围33001重叠地显示在控制对象区域30103,表示成为调整对象的空调机201的工作效果所涉及的范围。具体而言,效果范围33001是简略地表示了从空调机201输出的风的指向性的图像,表示按照当前所设定的空调机201的风量及风向输出的风所到达的范围。The effect range 33001 is displayed superimposed on the control target area 30103 , and indicates the range of the operation effect of the air conditioner 201 to be adjusted. Specifically, the effect area 33001 is an image briefly showing the directivity of the wind output from the air conditioner 201 , and indicates the range where the output wind reaches according to the air volume and air direction of the air conditioner 201 currently set.
此外,显示控制单元103在控制对象区域30103以外的布局图500上的区域中显示灰色层。由此,控制对象区域30103显示得比其他区域亮。另外,显示控制单元103使空调机控制画面30102显示在控制对象区域30103以外的布局图500上的区域。由此,能够防止效果范围33001被空调机控制画面30102盖住。Furthermore, the display control section 103 displays gray layers in areas on the floor plan 500 other than the control target area 30103 . As a result, the control target area 30103 is displayed brighter than other areas. In addition, display control section 103 displays air conditioner control screen 30102 in an area on floor plan 500 other than control target area 30103 . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the effect range 33001 from being covered by the air conditioner control screen 30102 .
另外,显示控制单元103在显示图100所示的显示画面的情况下,使配置在布局图500上的设备图标501退避到布局图500的显示区域外。Also, when displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 100 , display control section 103 retracts device icons 501 arranged on floor plan 500 out of the display area of floor plan 500 .
图101是表示在空调机201的控制例中使用的房间信息33100的构成的图。房间信息33100具备房间ID33101、房间类型33102、空间坐标33103、以及面积33104。房间ID33101、房间类型33102、空间坐标33103与房间信息2900的同一名称的信息相同。面积33104中登记有用房间ID33101表示的房间的面积。在此,作为面积33104,登记有实际的房间的面积,但不限于此,也可以登记布局图500上的房间区域的面积。FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the structure of room information 33100 used in the control example of the air conditioner 201 . Room information 33100 includes room ID 33101 , room type 33102 , space coordinates 33103 , and area 33104 . Room ID 33101 , room type 33102 , and space coordinates 33103 are the same as information of the same name in room information 2900 . The area of the room indicated by the room ID 33101 is registered in the area 33104 . Here, the area of the actual room is registered as the area 33104 , but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area of the room area on the floor plan 500 may be registered.
图102是表示在空调机201的控制例中使用的设备列表33200A、33200B的构成的图。至少家庭控制器100保存着设备列表33200A、33200B。FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the configuration of device lists 33200A and 33200B used in the control example of the air conditioner 201 . At least the home controller 100 holds device lists 33200A, 33200B.
设备列表33200A具备设备ID33201、设备类型33202、型号33203、配置33204、能力信息33205、控制命令发送目标33206、以及对应面积33207。Device list 33200A includes device ID 33201 , device type 33202 , model 33203 , configuration 33204 , capability information 33205 , control command destination 33206 , and corresponding area 33207 .
设备ID33201、设备类型33202、型号33203、配置33204、能力信息33205、以及控制命令发送目标33206与设备列表4700的同一名称的信息相同。对应面积33207表示设备200的输出的效果范围的面积。例如,设备ID33201为“A”的空调机201由于输出的效果达到22.7平方米,所以在对应面积33207中登记有“22.7”。另外,该空调机201的输出能力为4.0kW,因此在对应面积33207中还登记有“4.0kW”。The device ID 33201 , device type 33202 , model 33203 , configuration 33204 , capability information 33205 , and control command destination 33206 are the same as the information of the same name in the device list 4700 . The corresponding area 33207 represents the area of the effective range of the output of the device 200 . For example, since the air conditioner 201 whose device ID 33201 is “A” has an output effect of 22.7 square meters, “22.7” is registered in the corresponding area 33207 . In addition, since the output capacity of this air conditioner 201 is 4.0 kW, "4.0 kW" is also registered in the corresponding area 33207 .
另外,设备ID为“B”的照明设备的输出范围为16.2平方米,所以在对应面积33207中登记有“16.2”。另外,该照明设备具有以73W输出5000lm的光的能力,因此在对应面积33207中还登记有“5000lm、73W”。In addition, since the output range of the lighting device whose device ID is "B" is 16.2 square meters, "16.2" is registered in the corresponding area 33207 . In addition, since this lighting device has the ability to output light of 5000lm at 73W, “5000lm, 73W” is also registered in the corresponding area 33207 .
设备列表33200B具备设备ID33208、正面方向33209以及风向方向33210。设备ID33208是赋予给空调机201的标识符。通过设备ID33208和设备ID33201,设备列表33200B和设备列表33200A相关联。The device list 33200B includes a device ID 33208 , a front direction 33209 , and a wind direction 33210 . The device ID 33208 is an identifier assigned to the air conditioner 201 . The device list 33200B is associated with the device list 33200A by the device ID 33208 and the device ID 33201 .
正面方向33209表示布局图500中的空调机201的正面朝向哪个方向。在此,正面方向33209表示布局图500的水平方向(X轴)与空调机201的正面的法线所成的角度。The front direction 33209 shows which direction the front of the air conditioner 201 in the floor plan 500 faces. Here, the front direction 33209 represents the angle formed by the horizontal direction (X-axis) of the floor plan 500 and the normal line of the front of the air conditioner 201 .
风向方向33210表示将正面方向设为0度时的当前所设定的空调机201的风向的相对角度。Wind direction 33210 represents the relative angle of the wind direction of the air conditioner 201 currently set when the front direction is assumed to be 0 degrees.
图102的右下方的坐标图是表示风向方向与正面方向的关系的坐标图,横轴表示相对于布局图500的X轴的角度为0度,纵轴表示相对于布局图500的X轴的角度为90度。在设备列表33200B的例子中,设备ID为“A”的空调机201是正面方向33209为0度、风向方向33210为45度。由此,如该坐标图所示,该空调机201的布局图500的风向方向被计算为45度(=0度+45度)。The coordinate diagram at the bottom right of FIG. 102 is a coordinate diagram representing the relationship between the wind direction and the frontal direction. The horizontal axis represents that the angle relative to the X-axis of the floor plan 500 is 0 degrees, and the vertical axis represents the angle relative to the X-axis of the floor plan 500. The angle is 90 degrees. In the example of the device list 33200B, the air conditioner 201 whose device ID is "A" has a front direction 33209 of 0 degrees and a wind direction 33210 of 45 degrees. Accordingly, as shown in the graph, the wind direction of the floor plan 500 of the air conditioner 201 is calculated to be 45 degrees (=0 degrees+45 degrees).
图103是表示变更了风向的效果范围33001的图。例如,在显示有图100所示的效果范围33001的状态下,通过操作空调机控制画面30102,风向方向在布局图500上向逆时针的方向变更。于是,如图103所示,显示控制单元103使效果范围33001的形状变形,使得指向性朝向变更后的风向方向。FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an effect range 33001 in which the wind direction is changed. For example, by operating the air conditioner control screen 30102 in a state where the effect range 33001 shown in FIG. 100 is displayed, the wind direction is changed counterclockwise on the floor plan 500 . Then, as shown in FIG. 103 , display control section 103 deforms the shape of effect range 33001 so that the directivity is oriented in the changed wind direction.
另一方面,设为在显示有图103所示的效果范围33001的状态下,通过操作空调机控制画面30102,风向返回到原来的方向。在该情况下,如图100所示,效果范围33001的形状变形为指向性朝向原来的方向。On the other hand, it is assumed that the wind direction returns to the original direction by operating the air conditioner control screen 30102 in a state where the effect range 33001 shown in FIG. 103 is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100 , the shape of the effect area 33001 is deformed so that the directivity faces the original direction.
具体而言,设为触摸面板控制单元102在空调机控制画面30102中检测到风向指示标志向右方的划动操作。在该情况下,显示控制单元103根据向右方划动的移动量来求出风向的变更量,使登记在设备列表33200B中的风向方向33210按照变更量而向逆时针方向转动,并与正面方向33209相加,由此求出布局图500上的变更后的风向。然后,显示控制单元103使效果范围33001变形,使得指向性朝向变更后的风向。此外,在风向指示标志向左方划动的情况下,显示控制单元103使风向方向33210向顺时针方向转动与划动量相应的变更量,并与正面方向33209相加,由此求出布局图500上的变更后的风向即可。Specifically, it is assumed that touch panel control section 102 detects a flick operation of the wind direction indicator mark to the right on air conditioner control screen 30102 . In this case, display control section 103 calculates the change amount of the wind direction based on the movement amount of the right swipe, rotates the wind direction direction 33210 registered in the device list 33200B counterclockwise according to the change amount, and aligns it with the front face. The direction 33209 is added to obtain the changed wind direction on the floor plan 500 . Then, display control section 103 deforms effect range 33001 so that directivity faces the changed wind direction. In addition, when the wind direction indicator mark is swiped to the left, the display control unit 103 rotates the wind direction direction 33210 clockwise by an amount corresponding to the swiped amount, and adds it to the front direction 33209 to obtain the layout diagram. Just change the wind direction on the 500.
如此,通过显示效果范围33001,能够使用户视觉上明确根据当前所设定的空调机201的风向输出的风的效果所涉及的范围。由此,能够向用户提供从当前所在的位置向效果范围33001内的位置移动、或者要变更风向以使得效果范围33001到达当前所在的位置的判断材料。In this way, by displaying the effect range 33001 , the user can visually clarify the range of the effect of the wind output according to the currently set wind direction of the air conditioner 201 . Accordingly, it is possible to provide the user with information for determining whether to move from the current position to a position within the effect range 33001 or to change the wind direction so that the effect range 33001 reaches the current position.
图104是表示消除了空调机控制画面30102的布局图500的图。当在图103的显示画面中轻敲已退避到布局图500的区域外的空调机图标时,如图104所示,显示控制单元103消除空调机控制画面30102。在该情况下,从布局图500中消除空调机控制画面30102,因此能够让用户更明确地意识到效果范围33001的存在。FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a floor plan 500 from which the air conditioner control screen 30102 has been eliminated. When an air conditioner icon that has retreated out of the area of floor plan 500 is tapped on the display screen of FIG. 103 , display control section 103 erases air conditioner control screen 30102 as shown in FIG. 104 . In this case, since the air conditioner control screen 30102 is eliminated from the floor plan 500 , the user can be more clearly aware of the existence of the effect area 33001 .
图105是表示变更了风量时的效果范围33001的图。例如,设为在显示有图100所示的效果范围33001的状态下,通过操作空调机控制画面30102,变更了风量。于是,如图105所示,显示控制单元103改变效果范围33001的形状,使得变为与变更后的风量相应的大小。在图105的例子中,由于增大了风量,所以效果范围33001与所增大的风量相应地以变大的方式变形。在此,在空调机控制画面30102中,为了使风量增大而放大表示风向的画面。因此,风向指示标志的条数增多。另一方面,在使风量减小的情况下,在空调机控制画面30102中缩小表示风向的画面。Fig. 105 is a diagram showing an effect range 33001 when the air volume is changed. For example, it is assumed that the air volume is changed by operating the air conditioner control screen 30102 in a state where the effect range 33001 shown in FIG. 100 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 105 , display control section 103 changes the shape of effect range 33001 so that it becomes a size corresponding to the changed air volume. In the example of FIG. 105 , since the air volume is increased, the effect range 33001 is deformed so as to become larger according to the increased air volume. Here, in the air conditioner control screen 30102, the screen showing the wind direction is enlarged in order to increase the air volume. Therefore, the number of wind direction indicators increases. On the other hand, when reducing the air volume, the screen showing the wind direction is reduced on the air conditioner control screen 30102 .
另外,设为在显示有图105所示的效果范围33001的状态下,通过操作空调机控制画面30102来减小了风量。于是,如图100所示,效果范围31001与所减小的风量相应地以变小的方式变形。In addition, it is assumed that the air volume is decreased by operating the air conditioner control screen 30102 in a state where the effective range 33001 shown in FIG. 105 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 100 , the effective range 31001 is deformed so as to become smaller in accordance with the reduced air volume.
具体而言,设为触摸面板控制单元102检测到风向指示标志的缩小。于是,显示控制单元103求出与缩小的量相应的风量的变更量,从当前所设定的风量减少变更量,求出变更后的风量。然后,显示控制单元103使效果范围33001变形,使得变为与变更后的风量相应的面积。另一方面,在放大了风向指示标志的情况下,显示控制单元103求出与放大的量相应的风量的变更量,在当前所设定的风量加上变更量,求出变更后的风量即可。Specifically, it is assumed that touch panel control section 102 detects the reduction of the wind direction indicator. Then, the display control section 103 obtains the change amount of the air volume corresponding to the reduction amount, decreases the change amount from the currently set air volume, and obtains the changed air volume. Then, display control section 103 deforms effect range 33001 so that it becomes an area corresponding to the changed air volume. On the other hand, when the airflow direction indicator is enlarged, the display control unit 103 obtains the change amount of the air flow corresponding to the enlarged amount, adds the change amount to the currently set air flow, and obtains the changed air flow, that is, Can.
如此,通过显示效果范围33001,能够让用户视觉上明确根据当前所设定的空调机201的风量输出的风的效果所涉及的范围。由此,能够向用户提供从当前所在的位置向效果范围33001内的位置移动、或者变更风量以使得效果范围33001到达当前所在的位置的判断材料。In this way, by displaying the effect range 33001 , the user can visually clarify the range of the effect of the wind output according to the currently set air volume of the air conditioner 201 . In this way, it is possible to provide the user with judgment material for moving from the current position to a position within the effect range 33001 or changing the air volume so that the effect range 33001 reaches the current position.
图106是表示分等级地(阶段性地)表示了效果高低的效果范围33001的图。在图106的例子中,效果范围33001具备内侧区域和包围内侧区域的外侧区域。内侧区域是效果高的区域,外侧区域是效果低的区域。内侧区域与外侧区域相比,例如用较深的颜色来显示,用2个等级来显示了效果高低。由此,用户能够对效果高的区域一目了然。此外,在图106的例子中,效果范围33001用2个等级来显示效果高低,但本实施方式不限于此,也可以如3个等级、4个等级这样用2个等级以外来进行显示。在该情况下,显示控制单元103使效果范围33001显示为越是效果高的区域、则颜色越深即可。在用3个等级以上来表示效果范围33001的情况下,与2个等级的情况同样地,显示控制单元103以外侧区域包围相邻的内侧区域的方式将效果范围33001分割为多个区域,使得越是内侧的区域、颜色越深地显示效果范围33001即可。在此,显示控制单元103也可以对构成效果范围33001的每个区域设定透明度,将效果范围33001表示为越是内侧区域、则透明度越低。或者,显示控制单元103也可以用相同的色调表示全部区域,将效果范围33001表示为越是内侧的区域、则彩度越高。或者,显示控制单元103还可以将各区域的色调决定为越是内侧的区域、则越接近红色,由此表示效果范围33001。FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an effect range 33001 in which the level of the effect is displayed hierarchically (stepwise). In the example in FIG. 106 , the effect range 33001 includes an inner area and an outer area surrounding the inner area. The inner area is an area where the effect is high, and the outer area is an area where the effect is low. The inner area is displayed in a darker color than the outer area, for example, and the level of effect is displayed in two levels. Thereby, the user can see at a glance an area with a high effect. In addition, in the example of FIG. 106 , the effect range 33001 displays the level of effect in two levels, but this embodiment is not limited thereto, and may be displayed in other than two levels such as three levels and four levels. In this case, display control section 103 may display effect range 33001 in a color that is darker as the effect is higher. When the effect range 33001 is represented by three or more levels, as in the case of two levels, display control section 103 divides the effect range 33001 into a plurality of areas such that the outer area surrounds the adjacent inner area so that The effect area 33001 may be displayed in a darker color as the inner area is. Here, display control section 103 may set transparency for each region constituting effect range 33001 , and display that the inner region of effect range 33001 has lower transparency. Alternatively, the display control unit 103 may also use the same color tone to represent all regions, and represent the effect range 33001 so that the inner region has higher chroma. Alternatively, display control section 103 may determine the color tone of each region so that the inner region is closer to red, thereby indicating the effect range 33001 .
显示控制单元103通过根据登记在设备列表33200A中的对应面积33207使例如预先确定的效果范围33001的基本形状扩大或缩小,求出相应的空调机201的效果范围33001的默认形状。然后,显示控制单元103根据当前所设定的空调机201的风量和风向使该默认形状变形,由此生成在显示器111上显示的效果范围33001即可。Display control section 103 obtains the default shape of corresponding effect range 33001 of air conditioner 201 by expanding or reducing, for example, a predetermined basic shape of effect range 33001 based on corresponding area 33207 registered in device list 33200A. Then, the display control unit 103 may deform the default shape according to the currently set air volume and air direction of the air conditioner 201 to generate the effect range 33001 displayed on the display 111 .
另外,显示控制单元103在所生成的效果范围33001从控制对象区域30103溢出的情况下,也可以使效果范围33001的形状变形以使得控制在控制对象区域30103。在该情况下,显示控制单元103使效果范围33001变形以使得在变形的前后维持效果范围33001的面积即可。In addition, when the generated effect range 33001 overflows the control target area 30103 , display control section 103 may deform the shape of the effect range 33001 so that the control falls within the control target area 30103 . In this case, display control section 103 may deform effect range 33001 so that the area of effect range 33001 is maintained before and after the deformation.
图107A、图107B是在本发明的一个实施方式中家庭控制器100控制设备200的又一例的流程图。图107A所示的S33701~S33704与图80A的S31001~S31004相同。107A and 107B are flowcharts of still another example in which the home controller 100 controls the device 200 in one embodiment of the present invention. S33701 to S33704 shown in FIG. 107A are the same as S31001 to S31004 in FIG. 80A .
在S33705中,显示控制单元103显示符合在配置有已选择的设备图标501的房间区域中的设备200的效果范围。在此,如图100所示,在控制对象区域30103上显示效果范围33001。In S33705, the display control section 103 displays the effect range corresponding to the device 200 in the room area where the selected device icon 501 is arranged. Here, as shown in FIG. 100 , an effect range 33001 is displayed on a control target area 30103 .
图107B所示的S33706~S33711与图80A所示的S31006~S31011相同。S33706 to S33711 shown in FIG. 107B are the same as S31006 to S31011 shown in FIG. 80A .
图108是表示图107B的S33710的设备控制画面502的控制流程的流程图。此外,图108是在设备控制画面502中调整风向和风量的情况下的流程图。S33801~S33810与图81所示的S31101~S31110相同。FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a control flow of the device control screen 502 at S33710 in FIG. 107B . In addition, FIG. 108 is a flowchart in the case of adjusting the wind direction and the air volume on the device control screen 502 . S33801 to S33810 are the same as S31101 to S31110 shown in FIG. 81 .
在S33811中,显示控制单元103在控制对象区域30103显示与设定对应的效果范围33001。在此,显示如图103所示根据风向而变形了的效果范围33001、如图105所示根据风量而变形了的效果范围33001。In S33811 , display control section 103 displays effect range 33001 corresponding to the setting in control target area 30103 . Here, an effective range 33001 deformed according to the wind direction as shown in FIG. 103 and an effective range 33001 deformed according to the air volume as shown in FIG. 105 are displayed.
S33812、S33813与图81所示的S31112、S31113相同。S33812 and S33813 are the same as S31112 and S31113 shown in FIG. 81 .
此外,在上述的说明中,效果范围33001示出了风向和风量,但本实施方式不限于此,也可以使效果范围33001具有表示设定温度的功能。在该情况下,显示控制单元103随着设定温度增大而使效果范围33001的浓度变深即可。另外,显示控制单元103随着减小设定温度而使效果范围33001的浓度变淡即可。In addition, in the above description, the effect area 33001 shows the wind direction and air volume, but this embodiment is not limited thereto, and the effect area 33001 may have the function of indicating the set temperature. In this case, display control section 103 may increase the density of effect range 33001 as the set temperature increases. In addition, the display control section 103 may lighten the density of the effect area 33001 as the set temperature decreases.
图109是表示图107B的S33710的设备控制画面502的控制流程的流程图。图109是在设备控制画面502中调整温度的情况的流程图。FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a control flow of the device control screen 502 at S33710 in FIG. 107B . FIG. 109 is a flowchart of a case where temperature is adjusted on the device control screen 502 .
S33901~S33903与图83所示的S31301~S31303相同。在S33904中,显示控制单元103在控制对象区域30103显示与设定对应的效果范围33001。S33905、S33906与图83所示的S31305、S31306相同。S33901 to S33903 are the same as S31301 to S31303 shown in FIG. 83 . In S33904, display control section 103 displays effect range 33001 corresponding to the setting in control target area 30103. S33905 and S33906 are the same as S31305 and S31306 shown in FIG. 83 .
图110是表示使用了接触物30603的效果范围33001的操作例的图。如图110(A)→(B)所示,设为接触物30603向效果范围33001的指向性的方向(远离空调机201的图像的方向)划动。具体而言,设为由触摸面板控制单元102检测到的划动是在布局图500上与当前所设定的风向平行、且朝着效果范围33001的外侧的方向。在该情况下,显示控制单元103根据划动的移动量来使效果范围33001变形,以使得在指向性的方向延伸。FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of operation using the area of effect 33001 of the contact object 30603 . As shown in FIG. 110(A)→(B), it is assumed that the contact object 30603 is flicked in the directivity direction of the effect range 33001 (direction away from the image of the air conditioner 201). Specifically, it is assumed that the swipe detected by touch panel control section 102 is parallel to the currently set wind direction on floor plan 500 and goes outside the effect range 33001 . In this case, display control section 103 deforms effect range 33001 so as to extend in the directivity direction according to the movement amount of the swipe.
然后,当由触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物30603的划动结束时,设备控制单元106生成用于根据划动的移动量来增大当前所设定的风量的控制命令,并发送到网络。Then, when the touch panel control unit 102 detects that the swipe of the contact object 30603 ends, the device control unit 106 generates a control command for increasing the currently set air volume according to the movement amount of the swipe, and sends it to the network .
另一方面,如图110(B)→(A)所示,设为接触物30603向缩小效果范围33001的指向性方向的方向(靠近空调机201的图像的方向)划动。具体而言,由触摸面板控制单元102检测到的划动是在布局图500上与当前所设定的风向方向平行、且朝向效果范围33001的内侧的方向。在该情况下,显示控制单元103根据划动的移动量来使效果范围33001变形,以使得向指向性的方向缩小。On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(B)→(A), it is assumed that the touch object 30603 is swiped in a direction that narrows the directivity direction of the effect range 33001 (a direction approaching the image of the air conditioner 201). Specifically, the swipe detected by the touch panel control unit 102 is parallel to the currently set wind direction on the floor plan 500 and directed toward the inside of the effect range 33001 . In this case, display control section 103 deforms effect range 33001 so as to shrink in the directivity direction according to the movement amount of the swipe.
然后,当由触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物30603的划动结束时,设备控制单元106生成用于根据划动的移动量来减少当前所设定的风量的控制命令,并发送到网络。Then, when touch panel control section 102 detects that the swipe of contact object 30603 ends, device control section 106 generates a control command for reducing the currently set air volume according to the movement amount of the swipe, and sends it to the network.
另外,如图110(A)→(D)所示,设为接触物30603向逆时针的方向划动。在该情况下,显示控制单元103使效果范围33001变形,以使得根据划动的转动量而变更效果范围33001的当前的指向性的方向。In addition, as shown in FIG. 110(A)→(D), it is assumed that the contact object 30603 is swiped in the counterclockwise direction. In this case, display control section 103 deforms effect area 33001 so that the current directivity direction of effect area 33001 is changed according to the rotation amount of the swipe.
然后,当由触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物30603的划动结束时,设备控制单元106生成用于使当前所设定的风向变更为与划动的转动量相应的方向的控制命令,并发送到网络。Then, when the touch panel control section 102 detects that the swipe of the contact object 30603 ends, the device control section 106 generates a control command for changing the currently set wind direction to a direction corresponding to the swiped rotation amount, and sent to the network.
另一方面,如图110(D)→(A)所示,设为接触物30603向顺时针的方向划动。在该情况下,显示控制单元103使效果范围33001变形,以使得根据划动的转动量来变更效果范围33001的当前的指向性的方向。On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(D)→(A), it is assumed that the contact object 30603 is swiped in the clockwise direction. In this case, display control section 103 deforms effect area 33001 so that the current directivity direction of effect area 33001 is changed according to the rotation amount of the swipe.
然后,当由触摸面板控制单元102检测到接触物30603的划动结束时,设备控制单元106生成用于将当前所设定的风向变更为与划动的转动量相应的方向的控制命令,并发送到网络。Then, when the touch panel control section 102 detects that the swipe of the contact object 30603 ends, the device control section 106 generates a control command for changing the currently set wind direction to a direction corresponding to the swiped rotation amount, and sent to the network.
另外,如图110(A)→(C)所示,设为相对于效果范围33001的指向性的方向,接触物30603向右斜上的方向划动。具体而言,设为由触摸面板控制单元102检测到的划动在布局图500中相对于当前所设定的风向朝向右斜上方向。在该情况下,显示控制单元103在以根据划动的转动量来变更效果范围33001的当前的指向性方向的方式使效果范围33001变形的同时,以根据划动的移动量而在指向性的方向上延长的方式使效果范围33001变形。In addition, as shown in FIG. 110(A)→(C), it is assumed that the contact object 30603 is swiped in an obliquely upward direction to the right with respect to the directivity direction of the effect range 33001 . Specifically, it is assumed that the flick detected by touch panel control section 102 faces obliquely upward to the right with respect to the currently set wind direction in floor plan 500 . In this case, display control section 103 deforms effect area 33001 so as to change the current directivity direction of effect area 33001 according to the amount of rotation of the swipe, and changes the directivity direction of effect area 33001 according to the amount of movement of the swipe. The way of extending in the direction makes the effect range 33001 deformed.
然后,当由接触摸面板控制单元102检测到触物30603的划动结束时,设备控制单元106生成用于将当前所设定的风向变更为与划动的转动量相应的角度、且将当前所设定的风量增大到与划动的移动量相应的风量的控制命令,并发送到网络。Then, when the touch panel control section 102 detects that the touch object 30603 has been swiped to an end, the device control section 106 generates a method for changing the currently set wind direction to an angle corresponding to the swiped rotation amount and changing the current wind direction to an angle corresponding to the swiped rotation amount. A control command to increase the set air volume to an air volume corresponding to the movement amount of the swipe is sent to the network.
另一方面,如图110(C)→(A)所示,在相对于效果范围33001的指向性的方向,接触物30603向左斜下方向划动的情况下,显示控制单元103在以根据划动的转动量而变更效果范围33001的指向性方向的方式使效果范围33001变形的同时,以根据划动的移动量而在指向性的方向上缩短的方式使效果范围33001变形。On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(C)→(A), when the touch object 30603 is swiped obliquely downward to the left with respect to the directivity direction of the effect range 33001, the display control unit 103 operates according to The effect area 33001 is deformed so that the directivity direction of the effect area 33001 is changed by the rotation amount of the swipe, and the effect area 33001 is deformed so as to shorten in the directional direction according to the movement amount of the swipe.
图111是表示操作效果范围33001时的家庭控制器100的处理流程的流程图。首先,当触摸面板控制单元102检测到对效果范围33001的操作时(在S34101中为“是”),显示控制单元103根据检测到的操作来变更显示在控制对象区域30103的效果范围33001(S34102)。FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the home controller 100 when the effective area 33001 is operated. First, when the touch panel control section 102 detects an operation on the effect range 33001 (YES in S34101), the display control section 103 changes the effect range 33001 displayed on the control target area 30103 according to the detected operation (S34102 ).
另一方面,在触摸面板控制单元102没有检测到对效果范围33001的操作的情况下(在S34101中为“否”),结束处理。On the other hand, when touch panel control section 102 has not detected an operation on effect area 33001 ("No" in S34101), the process ends.
接着,设备控制单元106决定用于根据检测到的操作来变更风向和风量的至少任意一方的控制内容(S34103)。接着,设备控制单元106生成与控制内容对应的控制命令(S34104)。接着,设备控制单元106使处理进入控制命令发送流程(参照图41)(S34105)。Next, the device control section 106 determines control content for changing at least one of the wind direction and the air volume according to the detected operation (S34103). Next, the device control section 106 generates a control command corresponding to the control content (S34104). Next, the device control section 106 advances the processing to the control command transmission flow (see FIG. 41 ) (S34105).
如此,当输入使效果范围33001的形状变更的操作时,根据该操作来变更朝向和风量的至少任意一方,因此,用户能够以犹如操作了不能视觉识别的风这样的操作感来操作空调机201。In this way, when an operation to change the shape of the effect area 33001 is input, at least one of the orientation and the air volume is changed according to the operation, so that the user can operate the air conditioner 201 with an operational feeling as if an unrecognizable wind is operated. .
此外,在上述空调机201的控制例中,用户通过划动接触物30603而输入了对空调机201的操作,但本实施方式不限于此,也可以通过拖拽鼠标来输入对空调机201的操作。另外,用户通过轻敲来输入了用于选择设备图标501的操作,但也可以通过点击鼠标而输入用于选择设备图标501的操作。In addition, in the control example of the air conditioner 201 described above, the user inputs the operation of the air conditioner 201 by swiping the touch object 30603, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the operation of the air conditioner 201 may be input by dragging the mouse. operate. In addition, although the user has input the operation for selecting the device icon 501 by tapping, it is also possible to input the operation for selecting the device icon 501 by clicking the mouse.
产业上的可利用性Industrial availability
根据本发明,由于根据布局图中的与房间相当的区域的面积来切换调整区域和调整画面而进行显示,因此,在使用便携信息终端来作为空调机的遥控器的情况下是有用的。According to the present invention, since the adjustment area and the adjustment screen are switched and displayed according to the area of the area corresponding to the room in the floor plan, it is useful when using the portable information terminal as a remote controller of the air conditioner.
Claims (38)
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201361766900P | 2013-02-20 | 2013-02-20 | |
US61/766,900 | 2013-02-20 | ||
PCT/JP2013/003197 WO2014128785A1 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2013-05-20 | Program and method for controlling portable information terminal |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CN104321592A CN104321592A (en) | 2015-01-28 |
CN104321592B true CN104321592B (en) | 2017-10-20 |
Family
ID=51390630
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CN201380026394.1A Active CN104321592B (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2013-05-20 | Portable information terminal and its control method and recording medium |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US10067640B2 (en) |
JP (1) | JP5727110B2 (en) |
CN (1) | CN104321592B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2014128785A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (15)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
GB201006510D0 (en) * | 2010-04-20 | 2010-06-02 | Senselogix Ltd | Energy management system |
JP6002799B1 (en) * | 2015-03-19 | 2016-10-05 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | Information device control method, program, and information device |
JP6002800B1 (en) * | 2015-03-19 | 2016-10-05 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | Information device control method, program, and information device |
JP6536201B2 (en) * | 2015-06-16 | 2019-07-03 | ヤマハ株式会社 | Control terminal device, audio system and audio system control program |
JP6522237B2 (en) * | 2016-05-11 | 2019-05-29 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Air conditioning visualization system |
CN115003965B (en) * | 2020-01-31 | 2024-05-14 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Temperature setting device, temperature setting method, and storage medium |
WO2021224986A1 (en) * | 2020-05-08 | 2021-11-11 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Air-conditioning apparatus |
WO2021224987A1 (en) * | 2020-05-08 | 2021-11-11 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Air conditioning apparatus |
WO2021224985A1 (en) * | 2020-05-08 | 2021-11-11 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Air conditioner |
CN112462616B (en) * | 2020-11-02 | 2022-10-28 | 青岛海尔空调器有限总公司 | Control method and control device for shared household electrical appliance |
US11981186B2 (en) * | 2021-03-30 | 2024-05-14 | Honda Motor Co., Ltd. | Method and system for responsive climate control interface |
WO2022266451A1 (en) | 2021-06-17 | 2022-12-22 | Research Products Corporation | Whole building air quality control system |
CN114234378A (en) * | 2021-12-23 | 2022-03-25 | 珠海格力电器股份有限公司 | Air conditioner control method and device and air conditioner system |
CN116147275B (en) * | 2022-12-20 | 2024-11-08 | 珠海格力电器股份有限公司 | Refrigerator temperature change condition display method and device and electronic equipment |
US11959763B1 (en) * | 2023-07-20 | 2024-04-16 | Pointr Limited | Methods and systems of generating route guidance in near real-time |
Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN1539250A (en) * | 2001-08-08 | 2004-10-20 | ���µ�����ҵ��ʽ���� | Machine control device and machine control system |
JP2007158574A (en) * | 2005-12-02 | 2007-06-21 | We Are Engineering Kk | Mobile phone terminal device, device control method, device control program, and device control system |
US20100070089A1 (en) * | 2008-09-15 | 2010-03-18 | Johnson Controls Technology Company | Hvac controller user interfaces |
CN102012079A (en) * | 2010-12-20 | 2011-04-13 | 广东美的电器股份有限公司 | Air conditioner and control method thereof |
CN102293011A (en) * | 2009-01-23 | 2011-12-21 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Operation terminal and screen image display method for operation terminal |
CN102662380A (en) * | 2012-05-21 | 2012-09-12 | 浙江优诺肯科技有限公司 | Concentrative networking control method and system for family electric appliances |
CN102769724A (en) * | 2011-05-03 | 2012-11-07 | Lg电子株式会社 | Electronic device and method for operating the same |
Family Cites Families (35)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS5128489B2 (en) | 1971-12-29 | 1976-08-19 | ||
US9513744B2 (en) * | 1994-08-15 | 2016-12-06 | Apple Inc. | Control systems employing novel physical controls and touch screens |
JPH10160229A (en) * | 1996-11-28 | 1998-06-19 | Toshiba Corp | Centralized control device for air conditioner |
JP2000138979A (en) | 1998-10-29 | 2000-05-16 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Home automation system |
JP3903714B2 (en) * | 2000-12-20 | 2007-04-11 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Position relationship acquisition method and equipment |
JP2003052093A (en) * | 2001-08-08 | 2003-02-21 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Equipment remote control device and equipment remote control system |
US20060004605A1 (en) * | 2004-06-21 | 2006-01-05 | Epic Systems Corporation | System and method for a comprehensive interactive graphical representation of a health care facility for managing patient care and health care facility resources |
US7730223B1 (en) * | 2004-07-30 | 2010-06-01 | Apple Inc. | Wireless home and office appliance management and integration |
JP2007104567A (en) | 2005-10-07 | 2007-04-19 | Sharp Corp | Electronic equipment |
US20070130376A1 (en) * | 2005-12-02 | 2007-06-07 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for setting configuration information |
ATE532387T1 (en) | 2005-12-22 | 2011-11-15 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | USER INTERFACE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING LIGHTING SYSTEMS |
US7567844B2 (en) * | 2006-03-17 | 2009-07-28 | Honeywell International Inc. | Building management system |
JP5019331B2 (en) | 2008-02-07 | 2012-09-05 | 三協立山株式会社 | IP / JEM-A conversion adapter, JEM-A / IP conversion adapter, and device remote monitoring control system using the same |
US20090307255A1 (en) * | 2008-06-06 | 2009-12-10 | Johnson Controls Technology Company | Graphical management of building devices |
US8239066B2 (en) * | 2008-10-27 | 2012-08-07 | Lennox Industries Inc. | System and method of use for a user interface dashboard of a heating, ventilation and air conditioning network |
US8390473B2 (en) * | 2008-12-19 | 2013-03-05 | Openpeak Inc. | System, method and apparatus for advanced utility control, monitoring and conservation |
US20110055752A1 (en) * | 2009-06-04 | 2011-03-03 | Rubinstein Jonathan J | Method and Apparatus for Displaying and Auto-Correcting an Over-Scroll State on a Computing Device |
US9124130B2 (en) * | 2009-07-30 | 2015-09-01 | Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. | Wall-mountable temperature control device for a load control system having an energy savings mode |
WO2011013514A1 (en) * | 2009-07-31 | 2011-02-03 | 本田技研工業株式会社 | Operation system for vehicle |
JP5373532B2 (en) * | 2009-10-06 | 2013-12-18 | アズビル株式会社 | Air conditioning operation device and air conditioning operation method |
JP5558855B2 (en) * | 2010-02-10 | 2014-07-23 | 株式会社東芝 | Ultrasonic diagnostic equipment |
JP5355505B2 (en) * | 2010-06-24 | 2013-11-27 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Equipment control device |
US20120013548A1 (en) * | 2010-07-19 | 2012-01-19 | Honda Motor Co., Ltd. | Human-Machine Interface System |
WO2012153391A1 (en) * | 2011-05-10 | 2012-11-15 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Air conditioning management device, and program |
JP5836741B2 (en) * | 2011-09-30 | 2015-12-24 | 日立アプライアンス株式会社 | Air conditioning control terminal and air conditioning control setting operation method |
JP5773268B2 (en) * | 2011-10-31 | 2015-09-02 | 株式会社デンソー | Touch-type operation input device for vehicles |
US9397852B2 (en) * | 2012-08-31 | 2016-07-19 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Connected home user interface systems and methods |
JP5529357B1 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2014-06-25 | パナソニック株式会社 | Control method and program for portable information terminal |
JP5529358B1 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2014-06-25 | パナソニック株式会社 | Control method and program for portable information terminal |
EP2800459B1 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2016-05-25 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | Program and method for controlling portable information terminal |
US9634852B2 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2017-04-25 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Control method for information apparatus and computer-readable recording medium |
US9766799B2 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2017-09-19 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Control method for information apparatus and computer-readable recording medium |
US9800428B2 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2017-10-24 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Control method for information apparatus and computer-readable recording medium |
IN2014CN03231A (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2015-08-14 | Panasonic Corp | |
WO2014128782A1 (en) | 2013-02-20 | 2014-08-28 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | Program and method for controlling portable information terminal |
-
2013
- 2013-05-20 CN CN201380026394.1A patent/CN104321592B/en active Active
- 2013-05-20 WO PCT/JP2013/003197 patent/WO2014128785A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-05-20 JP JP2014550962A patent/JP5727110B2/en active Active
-
2014
- 2014-11-14 US US14/541,545 patent/US10067640B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN1539250A (en) * | 2001-08-08 | 2004-10-20 | ���µ�����ҵ��ʽ���� | Machine control device and machine control system |
JP2007158574A (en) * | 2005-12-02 | 2007-06-21 | We Are Engineering Kk | Mobile phone terminal device, device control method, device control program, and device control system |
US20100070089A1 (en) * | 2008-09-15 | 2010-03-18 | Johnson Controls Technology Company | Hvac controller user interfaces |
CN102293011A (en) * | 2009-01-23 | 2011-12-21 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Operation terminal and screen image display method for operation terminal |
CN102012079A (en) * | 2010-12-20 | 2011-04-13 | 广东美的电器股份有限公司 | Air conditioner and control method thereof |
CN102769724A (en) * | 2011-05-03 | 2012-11-07 | Lg电子株式会社 | Electronic device and method for operating the same |
CN102662380A (en) * | 2012-05-21 | 2012-09-12 | 浙江优诺肯科技有限公司 | Concentrative networking control method and system for family electric appliances |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JPWO2014128785A1 (en) | 2017-02-02 |
CN104321592A (en) | 2015-01-28 |
JP5727110B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 |
WO2014128785A1 (en) | 2014-08-28 |
US20150143249A1 (en) | 2015-05-21 |
US10067640B2 (en) | 2018-09-04 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
CN104321592B (en) | Portable information terminal and its control method and recording medium | |
CN104350334B (en) | The control method and program of portable information terminal | |
CN104350335B (en) | The control method and recording medium of portable information terminal, portable information terminal | |
CN104247445B (en) | The control method of portable information terminal | |
CN104169662B (en) | The control method and recording medium of portable information terminal, portable information terminal | |
CN104169661B (en) | The control method and recording medium of portable information terminal, portable information terminal | |
CN104285502B (en) | The control method of portable information terminal and program | |
CN104755852B (en) | Portable information terminal and its control method | |
CN104247568B (en) | Portable information terminal and its control method | |
CN104321593B (en) | Portable information terminal and its control method | |
CN104160716A (en) | Program and method for controlling portable information terminal | |
CN104169660B (en) | Control method and program of portable information terminal | |
CN104169659B (en) | The control method and portable information terminal of portable information terminal | |
CN104169658B (en) | Control method and program of portable information terminal | |
CN104137654B (en) | Portable information terminal and control method thereof |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
C06 | Publication | ||
PB01 | Publication | ||
C10 | Entry into substantive examination | ||
SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
GR01 | Patent grant | ||
GR01 | Patent grant |